White Papers

ManualsBrandsDell ManualsAccess PlatformsOS9

Table Of Contents

Dell Command Line Reference Guide for the

S4820T System

9.14.1.5

May 2019

Rev. A00

Summary of content (1747 pages)

PAGE 1
Dell Command Line Reference Guide for the S4820T System 9.14.1.5 May 2019 Rev.
PAGE 2
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2018 - 2019 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
PAGE 3
Contents Chapter 1: About this Guide.........................................................................................................40 Objectives........................................................................................................................................................................... 40 Audience..............................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 4
verified boot....................................................................................................................................................................... 85 verified boot hash............................................................................................................................................................. 85 verified startup-config..............................................................................................................................
PAGE 5
show login statistics........................................................................................................................................................134 show memory................................................................................................................................................................... 136 show processes cpu..........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 6
access-class................................................................................................................................................................ 184 clear counters ip access-group.............................................................................................................................. 185 ip access-group..........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 7
description.................................................................................................................................................................. 242 match as-path............................................................................................................................................................243 match community..................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 8
permit tcp (for Extended IP ACLs)............................................................................................................................ 292 seq arp (for Extended MAC ACLs)............................................................................................................................ 293 seq ether-type (for Extended MAC ACLs)...............................................................................................................294 seq (for IP ACLs)....................
PAGE 9
bgp asnotation........................................................................................................................................................... 342 bgp bestpath as-path ignore.................................................................................................................................. 343 bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax.................................................................................................................
PAGE 10
neighbor peer-group (assigning peers)............................................................................................................... 388 neighbor peer-group (creating group).................................................................................................................389 neighbor peer-group passive..................................................................................................................................390 neighbor remote-as...........................
PAGE 11
BGP Extended Communities (RFC 4360).................................................................................................................447 set extcommunity rt................................................................................................................................................. 448 set extcommunity soo..............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 12
clear ets counters..................................................................................................................................................... 485 dcb-enable.................................................................................................................................................................. 485 description........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 13
clear hardware vlan-counters................................................................................................................................ 524 hardware watchdog..................................................................................................................................................525 show hardware mac................................................................................................................................................. 526 show hardware ip.
PAGE 14
ipv6 dhcp snooping database renew.................................................................................................................... 572 ip dhcp snooping trust............................................................................................................................................. 572 ipv6 dhcp snooping trust.........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 15
fip-snooping port-mode fcoe-trusted........................................................................................................................608 show fip-snooping config............................................................................................................................................. 609 show fip-snooping enode..............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 16
Chapter 22: Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)........................................................653 IGMP Commands............................................................................................................................................................ 653 clear ip igmp groups................................................................................................................................................. 653 debug ip igmp..........................................
PAGE 17
negotiation auto.........................................................................................................................................................700 keepalive......................................................................................................................................................................702 monitor interface...............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 18
UDP Broadcast Commands.......................................................................................................................................... 763 debug ip udp-helper..................................................................................................................................................763 ip udp-helper udp-port.............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 19
ip tcp initial-time..............................................................................................................................................................807 show ip tcp initial-time.................................................................................................................................................. 808 ip unreachables.............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 20
ipv6 unicast-routing....................................................................................................................................................... 863 show ipv6 cam stack-unit.............................................................................................................................................864 show ipv6 control-plane icmp......................................................................................................................................
PAGE 21
graceful-restart t3..........................................................................................................................................................905 hello padding.................................................................................................................................................................... 906 hostname dynamic.........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 22
show lacp.......................................................................................................................................................................... 952 Chapter 31: Layer 2................................................................................................................... 954 MAC Addressing Commands........................................................................................................................................954 clear mac-address-table...
PAGE 23
clear lldp counters.....................................................................................................................................................994 clear lldp neighbors...................................................................................................................................................995 debug lldp interface..................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 24
debug spanning-tree mstp.......................................................................................................................................... 1036 disable...............................................................................................................................................................................1037 forward-delay................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 25
show config...............................................................................................................................................................1078 show ipv6 nd ra–guard policy...............................................................................................................................1079 trusted–port.............................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 26
ip ospf auth-change-wait-time.............................................................................................................................. 1121 ip ospf authentication-key...................................................................................................................................... 1121 ip ospf cost................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 27
debug ipv6 ospf packet........................................................................................................................................... 1181 debug ipv6 ospf spf................................................................................................................................................. 1183 default-information originate.................................................................................................................................
PAGE 28
ip pim rp-address.....................................................................................................................................................1230 ip pim rp-candidate.................................................................................................................................................. 1231 ip pim sparse-mode.................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 29
Chapter 45: Quality of Service (QoS)....................................................................................... 1278 Global Configuration Commands............................................................................................................................... 1278 qos-rate-adjust.........................................................................................................................................................1278 Per-Port QoS Commands...........................
PAGE 30
DSCP Color Map Commands......................................................................................................................................1324 dscp.............................................................................................................................................................................1324 qos dscp-color-map................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 31
show rmon statistics.....................................................................................................................................................1370 Chapter 48: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).................................................................. 1373 bridge-priority.................................................................................................................................................................1373 debug spanning-tree rstp..............
PAGE 32
timeout login response............................................................................................................................................ 1413 username.................................................................................................................................................................... 1414 RADIUS Commands.......................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 33
show dot1x interface.............................................................................................................................................. 1449 SSH and SCP Commands............................................................................................................................................ 1451 crypto key generate.................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 34
protocol-tunnel destination-mac............................................................................................................................... 1492 protocol-tunnel enable................................................................................................................................................. 1493 protocol-tunnel rate-limit............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 35
logging console.........................................................................................................................................................1537 logging facility.......................................................................................................................................................... 1538 logging history....................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 36
max-age...........................................................................................................................................................................1596 protocol spanning-tree................................................................................................................................................ 1596 show config..................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 37
ntp disable.......................................................................................................................................................................1629 ntp multicast client....................................................................................................................................................... 1630 ntp master ....................................................................................................................................
PAGE 38
vlan-stack vlan-stack vlan-stack vlan-stack vlan-stack access.......................................................................................................................................................... 1667 compatible.................................................................................................................................................. 1668 dot1p-mapping...................................................................................................................
PAGE 39
ipv6 route-import.......................................................................................................................................................... 1709 match source-protocol................................................................................................................................................. 1710 redistribute.......................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 40
1 About this Guide This guide provides information about the Dell EMC Networking operating system (OS) command line interface (CLI). This book also includes information about the protocols and features supported in Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 41
Information Icons This guide uses the following information symbols: NOTE: The Note icon signals important operational information. CAUTION: The Caution icon signals information about situations that could result in equipment damage or loss of data. NOTE: The Warning icon signals information about hardware handling that could result in injury.
PAGE 42
2 CLI Basics This chapter describes the command line interface (CLI) structure and command modes. The Dell EMC Networking operating software commands are in a text-based interface that allows you to use the launch commands, change command modes, and configure interfaces and protocols.
PAGE 43
User "admin" on line vty0 ( 123.12.1.123 ) User "admin" on line vty1 ( 123.12.1.123 ) User "Irene" on line vty3 ( 123.12.1.321 ) DellEMC#conf When another user enters CONFIGURATION mode, Dell EMC Networking OS sends a message similar to the following: % Warning: User "admin" on line vty2 "172.16.1.210" is in configuration In this case, the user is “admin” on vty2.
PAGE 44
When entering commands, you can take advantage of the following timesaving features: ● Commands are not case-sensitive. ● Enter partial (truncated) command keywords. For example, you can enter int teng 1/1 for the interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 command. ● Use the TAB key to complete keywords in commands. ● Use the up Arrow key to display the last enabled command. ● Use either the Backspace key or Delete key to erase the previous character.
PAGE 45
Using the no Command To disable, delete or return to default values, use the no form of the commands. For most commands, if you type the keyword no in front of the command, you disable that command or delete it from the running configuration. In this guide, the no form of the command is described in the Syntax portion of the command description.
PAGE 46
Enabling Software Features on Devices Using a Command Option The capability to activate software applications or components on a device using a command is supported on this platform. Starting with Release 9.4(0.0), you can enable or disable specific software features or applications that need to run on a device by using a command attribute in the CLI interface. This enables effective, streamlined management and administration of applications and utilities that run on a device.
PAGE 47
show feature Verify the status of software applications, such as VRF, that are activated and running on a device. Syntax show feature Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.0) Updated the command to display the IPV6acloptimized feature on the S6100– ON and Z9100–ON. 9.12(1.
PAGE 48
CLASS-MAP Mode To create or configure a class map, use CLASS-MAP mode. For more information, see Policy-Based QoS Commands. To enter CLASS-MAP mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the class-map command, and then enter the class map name. The prompt changes to include config-classmap. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command.
PAGE 49
1. Verify that you are logged in to DHCP mode. 2. Enter the pool command then the pool name. The prompt changes to include config-dhcp-pool-name. You can return to DHCP mode by using the exit command. ECMP GROUP Mode To enable or configure traffic distribution monitoring on an ECMP link bundle, use ECMP GROUP mode. For more information, see ecmp_overview. To enter ECMP GROUP mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the ecmp-group command then enter the ECMP group ID.
PAGE 50
FRRP Mode To enable or configure Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP), use FRRP mode. For more information, see Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP). To enter FRRP mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the protocol frrp command then the ring ID. The prompt changes to include conf-frrp-ring-id. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. INTERFACE Mode Use INTERFACE mode to configure interfaces or IP services on those interfaces.
PAGE 51
2. Enter either the ip access-list standard command or the ip access-list extended command. Include a name for the ACL. The prompt changes to include conf-std-nacl or conf-ext-nacl. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY Mode To enable or configure IPv6 for ISIS, use ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY mode. For more information, see Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS). To enter ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to ROUTER ISIS mode. 2.
PAGE 52
MONITOR SESSION Mode To enable and configure a traffic monitoring session using port monitoring, use MONITOR SESSION mode. For more information, see Port Monitoring. To enter MONITOR SESSION mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the monitor session command, and then the session ID. The prompt changes to include conf-mon-sesssessionID. MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE (MSTP) Mode To enable and configure MSTP, use MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode.
PAGE 53
1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the ip prefix-list command and the name for the prefix list. The prompt changes to include conf-nprefixl. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. PRIORITY GROUP Mode To create an ETS priority group, use PRIORITY GROUP mode. For more information, see ETS Commands. To enter PRIORITY GROUP mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the priority-group command, and then the group name.
PAGE 54
ROUTER BGP Mode To enable and configure Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), use ROUTER BGP mode. For more information, see Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) To enter ROUTER BGP mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Use the router bgp command, and then enter the AS number. The prompt changes to include conf-router_bgp. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command.
PAGE 55
You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. SupportAssist Mode To enable and configure the SupportAssist, use SupportAssist mode. For more information, see SupportAssist. 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the support-assist command. The prompt changes to include conf-supportassist. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. TRACE-LIST Mode To configure a Trace list, use TRACE-LIST mode. To enter TRACE-LIST mode: 1.
PAGE 56
3 File Management This section contains command line interface (CLI) commands needed to manage the configuration files, as well as other file management commands.
PAGE 57
Command Modes CONFIGURATION. Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. If you enable the boot access password, the system prompts for a password when you access the GRUB interface.
PAGE 58
default Enter the keyword default to specify the default Dell EMC Networking OS image. primary Enter the keyword primary to specify the primary Dell EMC Networking OS image. secondary Enter the keyword secondary to specify the secondary Dell EMC Networking OS image. nfsmount Enter the keyword nfsmount: to retrieve the image from a mounted NFS file system. nfsmount://filepath system: Enter the keyword system: to retrieve the image from the system.
PAGE 59
usbflash: Use the keyword usbflash: to change the current directory to the inserted USB. directory name and path Enter the directory name and path as follows: directory name ([[flash://]directory_path]) NOTE: The cd command without any arguments will change the current directory to flash: Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 60
Command History Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.3(0.1) Introduced on the S6000, Z9000, S4810, and S4820T. copy http://admin:admin123@10.16.206.77/sample_file flash://sample_file copy Copy one file to another location. Dell EMC Networking OS supports IPv4 and IPv6 addressing for FTP, HTTP, TFTP, and SCP (in the hostip field).
PAGE 61
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. Added the nfsmount: parameters that allow you to mount a remote NFS file system. 9.4(0.0) Added the compressed-config parameter. 9.3(0.1) Added the http parameter on the S6000, Z9000, S4810, and S4820T. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.4.1.0 Added IPv6 addressing support for FTP, TFTP, and SCP. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.
PAGE 62
target is the internal flash. The source is on a secure server running secure shell (SSH), so you are prompted for the user datagram protocol (UDP) port of the SSH server on the remote host. Example Example Example Example Related Commands DellEMC# copy running-config nfsmount:///filepath Destination file name [test.txt]: User name to login remote host: usrname Password to login remote host: DellEMC# DellEMC# copy scp: flash: Address or name of remote host []: 10.11.199.
PAGE 63
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 64
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for NFS mount. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command.
PAGE 65
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series You must include the colon (:) when entering this command.
PAGE 66
Usage Information Version Description 9.1(0.0) Introduced on S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on S4820T. Include the colon (:) when entering this command. This command checks the specified flash memory for errors. If errors are found, the command recommends that you format the flash. CAUTION: If you elect to format the flash, all files – including the startup configuration file – are lost.
PAGE 67
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series. DellEMC# mkdir nfsmount:/nfs-mountpoint/guest DellEMC# ● rmdir — remove a directory.
PAGE 68
rmdir Removes a directory from the NFS mounted file system. Syntax rmdir nfsmount://mount-point/usrname Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 69
Defaults tftp: file-url Enter the keyword tftp: and specify the location of the image file in the format //host-ip/filepath or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence. usbflash: file- path Enter the keyword usbflash: and specify the location of the source file in the format //directory-path to upgrade form an external flash device or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence. A: | B: Specify the flash partition of the operating-system image to be upgraded.
PAGE 70
The new set of configurations are parsed from the startup configuration file and applied to the NVRAM. During the system boot up, the new set of configurations are applied to the system from the updated NVRAM configurations.
PAGE 71
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 72
message. With the secure-cli command enabled on the system, the CONFIGURATION mode does not display the root access password option. When you configure the root access password, ensure that your password meets the following criteria: ● ● ● ● ● A A A A A minimum minimum minimum minimum minimum of of of of of eight characters in length one lower case letter (a to z) one upper case letter (A to Z) one numeric character (0 to 9) one special character including a space (" !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~")
PAGE 73
Usage Information Restoring factory defaults deletes the existing startup configuration and all persistent settings (stacking, fan-out, and so forth). When restoring all units in a stack, all the units in the stack are placed into stand-alone mode. When restoring a single unit in a stack, that unit placed in stand-alone mode. No other units in the stack are affected. When restoring units in stand-alone mode, the units remain in stand-alone mode after the restoration.
PAGE 74
-- Restore status -Unit Nvram Config -----------------------1 Success Success Power-cycling the unit(s). DellEMC# Example (NvRAM all stack units) Example (NvRAM, single unit) DellEMC# restore factory-defaults stack-unit all nvram ************************************************************** * Warning - Restoring factory defaults will delete the existing * * persistent settings (stacking, fanout, etc.) * * All the units in the stack will be split into standalone units.
PAGE 75
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series.
PAGE 76
Example Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. DellEMC# show bootvar PRIMARY IMAGE FILE = system://B SECONDARY IMAGE FILE = tftp://10.16.127.35/Dell-SI-9-0-2-0.
PAGE 77
Example DellEMC#show file-systems Size(b) 4286574592 2032525312 DellEMC# Command Fields Related Commands Free(b) 4170424320 590807040 - Feature Type FAT32 USERFLASH unformatted USERFLASH Unknown NFSMOUNT network network network network Flags rw rw rw rw rw rw rw Prefixes flash: fcmfs: nfsmount: ftp: tftp: scp: http: Field Description size(b) Lists the size (in bytes) of the storage location. If the location is remote, no size is listed.
PAGE 78
File Management eis for the current EIS configuration ethernet for the current Ethernet CFM configuration fefd for the current FEFD configuration ftp for the current FTP configuration frrp for the current FRRP configuration fvrp for the current FVRP configuration gvrp for the current GVRP configuration host for the current host configuration hardwaremonitor for hardware-monitor action-on-error settings hypervisor for the current hypervisor configuration igmp for the current IGMP co
PAGE 79
privilege for the current privilege configuration qos-policyinput for the current input QoS policy configuration qos-policyoutput for the current output QoS policy configuration radius for the current RADIUS configuration redirect-list for the current redirect-list configuration redundancy for the current RPM redundancy configuration resolve for the current DNS configuration rip for the current RIP configuration rmon for the current RMON configuration route-map for the current route map c
PAGE 80
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2.(0.0) Added support for the tunnel and EIS interface types. 9.0.0.0 Added support for the VLT option. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 81
show startup-config Display the startup configuration. Syntax show startup-config Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 82
Parameters Defaults file-url (OPTIONAL) Enter the following location keywords and information: ● For a file on the internal flash, enter flash:// followed by the filename. ● For a file on an FTP server, enter ftp://user:password@hostip/ filepath. ● For a file on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath. ● For a file on the USB port, enter usbflash://filepath. none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 83
Command Fields Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 84
Parameters boot Enter the keyword boot to change the boot image. system Enter the keyword system to change the system image. ftp: After entering the keyword ftp:, you can either follow it with the location of the source file in this form: //userid:password@hostip/filepath or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence.
PAGE 85
Reload Dell EMC Networking OS after executing this command. To copy Dell EMC Networking OS from the management unit to one or more stack members, use the upgrade system stack-unit (SSeries stack member) command. Example DellEMC# upgrade system ? ftp: Copy from remote file system (ftp://userid:password@hostip/ filepath) scp: Copy from remote file system (scp://userid:password@hostip/ filepath) tftp: Copy from remote file system (tftp://hostip/filepath) DellEMC# upgrade system ftp://username:password@10.11.
PAGE 86
Parameters Defaults system-image {A: Enter the keyword system-image and A: or B:, depending on where the image | B:} is stored and then the hash value that is present on the iSupport page for your image. startup-config Enter the keyword startup-config and then the hash value for the startup configuration. You can get the hash value for the startup configuration using the generate hash command. hash value Enter the MD5, SHA1, or SHA256 hash.
PAGE 87
Parameters Defaults md5 Enter the md5 keyword to use the MD5 message-digest algorithm. sha256 Enter the sha256 keyword to use the SHA256 Secure Hash Algorithm flash:// (Optional). Enter the flash:// keyword. The default is to use the flash drive. You can just enter the image file name. img-file Enter the name the Dell EMC Networking software image file to validate. hash-value (Optional). Enter the relevant hash published on i-Support.
PAGE 88
4 Control and Monitoring This section contains command information to configure and monitor the system, including Telnet, file transfer protocol (FTP), and trivial file transfer protocol (TFTP).
PAGE 89
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • show memory show processes cpu show processes ipc flow-control show processes memory show software ifm show system show tech-support ssh-peer-stack-unit telnet telnet-peer-stack-unit terminal length traceroute undebug all virtual-ip write asf-mode Enable alternate store and forward (ASF) mode and forward packets as soon as a threshold is reached. Syntax asf-mode stack-unit {unit-id | all} queue size To return to standard Store and Forward mode, use the no asf-mode command.
PAGE 90
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information You must save the configuration and reload the system to implement ASF. When you enter the command, the system sends a message stating that the new mode is enabled when the system reloads. banner exec Configure a message that is displayed when your enter EXEC mode. Syntax banner exec c line c To delete a banner, use the no banner exec command.
PAGE 91
Usage Information Example After entering the banner login command, type one or more spaces and a delineator character. Enter the banner text then the second delineator character. When the user is connected to the router, if a message of the day banner is configured, it displays first. If no message of the day banner is configured, the login banner and prompt appear. After the user has logged in, the banner EXEC (if configured) displays.
PAGE 92
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.2.1.0 Introduced the keyword keyboard-interactive. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 93
line Defaults Enter a text string for your MOTD banner the message with your delineator. The delineator is a percent character (%). No banner is configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.
PAGE 94
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl :0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 Allocate space to each CAM region. Enter the CAM profile name then the amount of CAM space to be allotted. The total space allocated must equal to 13. The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2. Enter 4 or 8 for the number of OpenFlow FP blocks.
PAGE 95
Usage Information For the new settings to take effect, save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then reload the system. The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires three blocks and these blocks cannot be reallocated. The ipv4acl profile range is from 1 to 8. When configuring space for IPv6 ACLs, the total number of Blocks must equal 13. Ranges for the CAM profiles are from 1 to 10, except for the ipv6acl profile which is from 0 to 10.
PAGE 96
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.11(2.1P1) Introduced on all Dell EMC Networking OS platforms This command resets the average power and average power start time to the current time. Average power and average power start time will be calculated from the reset time (i.e current time). DellEMC#clear average-power stack-unit 1 Proceed to clear Average power ? Confirm [yes/no]:yes DellEMC# clear line Reset a terminal line.
PAGE 97
configure Enter CONFIGURATION mode from EXEC Privilege mode. Syntax configure [terminal] Parameters terminal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword terminal to specify that you are configuring from the terminal. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 98
disable Return to EXEC mode. Syntax disable [level] Parameters Defaults level (OPTIONAL) Enter a number for a privilege level of the Dell EMC Networking OS. The range is from 0 to 15. The default is 1. 1 Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 99
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 100
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Added support for roles on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.
PAGE 101
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Replacement command for the S4820T. Replaces the enable xfp-powerupdates command. 8.3.11.4 Replacement command for the Z9000.
PAGE 102
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. E-Series Original command.
PAGE 103
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. To remove the time interval, enter exec-timeout 0 0. Example Dell con0 is now available Press RETURN to get started. DellEMC> exit Return to the lower command mode.
PAGE 104
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. ● end — returns to EXEC Privilege mode. ftp-server enable Enable FTP server functions on the system.
PAGE 105
Example Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. morpheus% ftp 10.31.1.111 Connected to 10.31.1.111. 220 DellEMC(1.0) FTP server ready Name (10.31.1.
PAGE 106
Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. Usage Information After you enable FTP server functions with the ftp-server enable command, Dell EMC Networking recommends specifying a top-level directory path.
PAGE 107
Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. hostname Set the host name of the system. Syntax Parameters Defaults hostname name name Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long. Dell Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 108
ip ftp password Specify a password for outgoing FTP connections. Syntax ip ftp password [encryption-type] password To remove a password and return to the default setting, use the no ip ftp password [password] command. Parameters Defaults encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following numbers: ● 0 (zero) for an unecrypted (clear text) password ● 7 (seven) for a hidden text password password Enter a string up to 40 characters as the password. Not configured.
PAGE 109
ip ftp vrf Configures an FTP client with a VRF that is used to connect to the FTP server. Syntax ip ftp [vrf {vrf-name | management}] To undo the FTP client configuration, use the ip ftp [vrf vrf-name] command. Parameters Defaults vrf-name Enter the vrf-name to specify the VRF that is used by the FTP client. management Enter the keyword management to specify that the VRF used by the FTP client is a management VRF.
PAGE 110
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 111
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 112
Related Commands Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ip ssh server — enables the secure shell (SSH) server on the system. ip telnet server vrf Configures the TELNET server on either a specific VRF or a management VRF.
PAGE 113
DellEMC(conf)# no ip telnet server vrf DellEMC(conf)# ip telnet source-interface Set an interface’s IP address as the source address in outgoing packets for Telnet sessions. Syntax ip telnet source-interface interface To return to the default setting, use the no ip telnet source-interface [interface] command.
PAGE 114
Related Commands Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command telnet — telnet to another device. ip tftp source-interface Assign an interface’s IP address in outgoing packets for TFTP traffic. Syntax ip tftp source-interface interface To return to the default setting, use the no ip tftp source-interface interface command.
PAGE 115
Version Description E-Series Original command ip tftp vrf Configures an TFTP client with a VRF that is used to connect to the TFTP server. Syntax ip tftp [vrf vrf-name] To undo the TFTP client configuration, use the no ip tftp [vrf vrf-name] command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to specify the VRF that is used by the TFTP client. Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 116
end-number Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter a number from 1 to 9 as the last virtual terminal line to configure. You can configure multiple lines at one time. Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 117
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 118
Current sessions for user admin: Line Location 2 vty 0 10.14.1.97 3 vty 1 10.14.1.97 4 vty 2 10.14.1.97 5 vty 3 10.14.1.97 Clear existing session? [line number/Enter to cancel]: Related Commands ● login statistics — enable and configure user login statistics on console and virtual terminal lines. ● show login statistics — displays login statistics of users who have used the console or virtual terminal lines to log in to the system.
PAGE 119
Example When you log into the system, it displays a message similar to the following: $ telnet 10.11.178.14 Trying 10.11.178.14... Connected to 10.11.178.14. Escape character is '^]'. Login: admin Password: Last successful login: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Line vty0 ( 10.11.178.14 ). There were 1 unsuccessful login attempt(s) since the last successful login. There were 1 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in the last 30 day(s).
PAGE 120
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 121
● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. ● For a Tunnel interface, enter the keyword tunnel then a number from 1 to 16383. Defaults tos (IPv4 only) Enter the type of service required. The range is from 0 to 255. The default is 0. df-bit (IPv4 only) Enter Y or N for the “don't fragment” bit in IPv4 header. ● N: Do not set the “don't fragment” bit. ● Y: Do set “don't fragment” bit Default is No. validate-reply (IPv4 only) Enter Y or N for reply validation.
PAGE 122
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Added support for the outgoing-interface option for link-local IPv6 addressing on the S4820T. Usage Information 8.3.12.0 Added support for the outgoing-interface option for link-local IPv6 addressing on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 8.4.1.
PAGE 123
Example (IPv6) DellEMC# ping 100::1 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 100::1, timeout is 2 seconds: !!!!! Success rate is 100.0 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 0/0/0 (ms) DellEMC# reload Reboot the system. Syntax Parameters reload [conditional nvram-cfg-change | no-confirm [discard-running]] conditional nvram-cfgchange (OPTIONAL) Reload into the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) if the condition is true. A configuration change to the NVRAM requires a switch reload.
PAGE 124
You can use the conditional parameter if any configuration changes made to the NVRAM, such as, stack-group and fanout configurations, must be saved. When you use the reload command after making configuration changes, the system prompts you to update the hash for the startup configuration using the verified boot hash command. Example DellEMC# reload Verified startup-configuration is enabled, Hash for startupconfiguration is invalid. Please update Hash for the startup-configuration before reload.
PAGE 125
Usage Information Messages can contain an unlimited number of lines; however, each line is limited to 255 characters. To move to the next line, use . To send the message use CTR-Z; to abort a message, use CTR-C. service timestamps To debug and log messages, add time stamps. This command adds either the uptime or the current time and date with local time zone time difference included or excluded.
PAGE 126
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. If you do not specify parameters and enter service timestamps, it appears as service timestamps debug datetime in the running-configuration. To view the current options set for the service timestamps command, use the show runningconfig command. From 9.14.
PAGE 127
Example Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command.
PAGE 128
show command-history Display a buffered log of all commands all users enter along with a time stamp. Syntax show command-history Defaults none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500.
PAGE 129
DellEMC(conf)#service timestamps log datetime utc DellEMC# show command-history [May 17 10:16:53]: CMD-(CLI):[service timestamps log datetime utc]by default from console [May 17 10:17:05]: CMD-(CLI):[show clock]by default from console [May 17 10:17:20]: CMD-(CLI):[show running-config]by default from console [May 17 10:17:30]: CMD-(CLI):[interface tengigabitethernet 1/2]by default from console [May 17 10:17:32]: CMD-(CLI):[shutdown]by default from console [May 17 10:17:34]: CMD-(CLI):[no shutdown]by default
PAGE 130
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 131
show debugging View a list of all enabled debugging processes. Syntax show debugging Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 132
fan Enter the keyword fan to view information on the fans. The output of this command is chassis-dependent. pem Enter the keyword pem to view only information on power entry modules. stack-unit unit-id Enter the keywords stack-unit then the unit-id to display information on a specific stack member. The range is from 0 to 1. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example (all) This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 133
* Management Unit -- Thermal Sensor Readings (deg C) -Unit Sensor0 Sensor1 Sensor2 Sensor3 Sensor4 Sensor5 Sensor6 ------------------------------------------------------------------0 40 36 37 37 31 31 46 DellEMC# show environment fan -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed ---------------------------------------------------0 0 up up 7021 up 7021 0 1 up up 6971 up 7072 0 2 up up 7021 up 6971 Speed in RPM DellEMC#show environment pem -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(
PAGE 134
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.4 Output expanded to include Piece Part ID (PPID) and eSR4 optics. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced this version of the command for S-Series.
PAGE 135
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced the successful-attempts keyword. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820, S5000, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z9500. To view the successful and failed login details of the current user in the last 30 days or the custom defined period, use the show login statistics command.
PAGE 136
Unsuccessful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 3 Successful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------User: admin3 Last login time: 13:18:42 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
PAGE 137
Parameters stack-unit id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit then the stack unit ID to display memory information on the designated stack member. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Example (S4820T) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 138
stack-unit id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit then the stack member ID. As an option of the show processes cpu command, this option displays CPU usage for the designated stack member. Or, as an option of the command, this option limits the output of memory statistics to the designated stack member. Refer to Example (stack-unit). summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywordsummary to view CPU utilization of processes related to stack-unit processing.
PAGE 139
frrpagt 0xbacf3000 F10StkMgr 0xbad0c000 lcMgr 0xbad24000 dla 0xbad44000 sysAdmTsk 0xbad58000 timerMgr 0xbad6e000 PM 0xbad85000 KP 0xbad9a000 evagt 0xbadb4000 ipc 0xbadc9000 sysReaper 0xbae22000 tme 10 1 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 710 71 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.03% 0 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 50 5 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 650 65 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 50 5 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 1190 119 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.
PAGE 140
PID Runtime(ms) Process 0x00000000 45040 system 0x000001ac 25750 sysdlp 0x0000019a 10650 sysd 0x000003a5 860 clish 0x000001ad 520 lacp 0x000004ba 330 clish 0x000000c9 1240 nvmgr 0x000000e0 530 igmp 0x00000132 420 vrrp 0x0000028d 410 ovsdbsvr 0x000000a9 200 arpm 0x00000253 100 otm 0x00000206 140 tnlmgr 0x00000012 1290 mount_mfs 0x0000024d 40 xstp DellEMC# Related Commands Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 4504 10000 13.12% 13.20% 12.94% 0 2575 10000 2.78% 2.48% 3.40% 0 1065 10000 0.60% 1.16% 2.
PAGE 141
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 142
DHCP0 IPMGR0 DHCP0 IPMGR1 DHCP0 IFMGR0 IPMGR0 NDPM0 IFMGR0 FEFD0 IFMGR0 SNMP0 IFMGR0 SFL_CP0 IFMGR0 PORTMIRR0 IFMGR0 EVENTTERMLOG0 IFMGR0 IPSECMGR0 IFMGR0 DHCP0 IFMGR0 IPMGR0 IFMGR0 IFAGT3 IFAGT3 IFMGR0 IFMGR0 OFMGR0 IFMGR0 ACL0 IFMGR0 VRRP0 IFMGR0 PIM0 IFMGR0 MACMGR0 IFMGR0 L2PM0 IFMGR0 DIFFSERV0 IFMGR0 RTM0 IFMGR0 LLDP0 IFMGR0 MRTM0 IFMGR0 IPMGR1 IFMGR0 LACP0 PORTMIRR0 ACL_AGENT2 IFMGR0 IGMP0 IFMGR0 IFAGT2 DellEMC# 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 20 8 1 8 8 29 1 1
PAGE 143
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.7.1.0 Added the management-unit option. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 144
Total : 151937024, MaxUsed : 111800320 [2/25/2008 4:18:53] CurrentUsed: 98848768, CurrentFree: 53088256 SharedUsed : 13007848, SharedFree : 7963696 PID Process ResSize Size Allocs Frees Max Current 337 KernLrnAgMv 117927936 0 0 0 0 0 331 vrrp 5189632 249856 50572 0 50572 50572 323 frrp 5206016 241664 369238 0 369238 369238 322 xstp 7430144 2928640 38328 0 38328 38328 321 pim 5267456 823296 62168 0 62168 62168 314 igmp 4960256 380928 18588 16564 18588 2024 313 mrtm 6742016 1130496 72758 0 72758 72758 308 l2m
PAGE 145
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.
PAGE 146
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 147
flash: Save to local flash drive (flash://filename. A maximum of 20 characters. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.0) Updated to display the show revision and show os-version command outputs. 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 148
● ● ● ● Example (options under show techsupport) show show show show Inventory log summary command-history (last 20 commands) log DellEMC# show tech-support ? page Page through output stack-unit Unit Number | Pipe through a command DellEMC#show tech-support stack-unit 1 ? | Pipe through a command DellEMC# show tech-support stack-unit 1 | ? except Show only text that does not match a pattern find Search for the first occurrence of a pattern grep Show only text that matches a pattern no-more Don'
PAGE 149
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the S-Series. telnet Connect through Telnet to a server.
PAGE 150
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 151
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 152
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. traceroute View a packet’s path to a specific device. Syntax traceroute {host | vrf instance | ip-address | ipv6-address} Parameters host Enter the name of device.
PAGE 153
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series with IPv6. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series (IPv4 only). 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF. 7.6.1.0 Added support for the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6 address on the E-Series. E-Series Original command.
PAGE 154
DellEMC# Related Commands 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.000 ms ● ping — tests the connectivity to a device. undebug all Disable all debug operations on the system. Syntax undebug all Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
PAGE 155
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 156
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 157
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. Until the authentication, only extensible authentication protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic is allowed through the port to which a client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic passes through the port. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports remote authentication dial-in service (RADIUS) and active directory environments using 802.
PAGE 158
• • • • • dot1x mac show show show tx-period dot1x cos-mapping interface dot1x interface dot1x profile debug dot1x Display 802.1X debugging information. Syntax debug dot1x [all | auth-pae-fsm | backend-fsm | eapol-pdu] [interface interface] Parameters all Enable all debugs in dot1x. auth-pae-fsm Enable Authentication PAE FSM debugs in dot1x. backend-fsm Enable Backend Auth FSM debugs in dot1x. eapol-pdu Enable EAPOL frame trace in dot1x.
PAGE 159
To delete the authentication failure VLAN, use the no dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id [maxattempts number] command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier. The range is from 1 to 4094. max-attempts (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords max-attempts followed number of attempts desired before authentication fails. The range is from 1 to 5. The default is 3.
PAGE 160
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 161
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. The prerequisites for enabling MAB-only authentication on a port are: ● Enable 802.1X authentication globally on the switch and on the port (the dot1x authentication command). ● Enable MAC authentication bypass on the port (the dot1x mac-auth-bypass command).
PAGE 162
Related Commands ● dot1x authentication (Interface) — enable dot1x on an interface. dot1x authentication (Interface) Enable dot1x on an interface. Enable dot1x both globally and at the interface level. Syntax dot1x authentication To disable dot1x on an interface, use the no dot1x authentication command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 163
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3100 series, S4048–ON, S4048–ON, S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, the Configuration Terminal Batch mode on C9010, Z9100–ON, and Z9500. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the C9000 Series.
PAGE 164
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3100 series, S4048–ON, S4048–ON, S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, the Configuration Terminal Batch mode on C9010, Z9100–ON, and Z9500. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. The dot1x profile command configures a dot1x profile to define a list of trusted supplicant MAC addresses. Maximum number of dot1x profiles is limited to 10.
PAGE 165
Port Control: Port Auth Status: Re-Authentication: Untagged VLAN id: Guest VLAN: Guest VLAN id: Auth-Fail VLAN: Auth-Fail VLAN id: Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: Critical VLAN: Critical VLAN id: Mac-Auth-Bypass: Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Static-MAB: Static-MAB Profile: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Host Mode: Auth PAE State: Backend State: AUTO AUTHORIZED (STATIC-MAB) Enable 400 Enable 400 Enable 400 3 Enable 400 Disable Disable Enable Sample 3
PAGE 166
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series. 1X authentication is enabled when an interface is connected to the switch. If the host fails to respond within a designated amount of time, the authenticator places the port in the guest VLAN. If a device does not respond within 30 seconds, it is assumed that the device is not 802.1X capable.
PAGE 167
Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.1.0 Added the multi-auth option on the C-Series and S-Series. 8.3.2.0 Added the single-host and multi-host options on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series. Usage Information ● Single-host mode authenticates only one host per authenticator port and drops all other traffic on the port.
PAGE 168
dot1x max-eap-req Configure the maximum number of times an extensive authentication protocol (EAP) request is transmitted before the session times out. Syntax dot1x max-eap-req number To return to the default, use the no dot1x max-eap-req command. Parameters Defaults number Enter the number of times an EAP request is transmitted before a session time-out. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2. 2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 169
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 170
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The authenticator completes authentication only when you set port-control to auto.
PAGE 171
dot1x reauthentication Enable periodic reauthentication of the client. Syntax dot1x reauthentication [interval seconds] To disable periodic reauthentication, use the no dot1x reauthentication command. Parameters Defaults interval seconds (Optional) Enter the keyword interval then the interval time, in seconds, after which reauthentication is initiated. The range is from 1 to 31536000 (one year). The default is 3600 (1 hour).
PAGE 172
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 173
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When you configure the dot1x server-timeout value, take into account the communication medium used to communicate with an authentication server and the number of RADIUS servers configured.
PAGE 174
Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. dot1x tx-period Configure the intervals at which EAPOL PDUs the Authenticator PAE transmits. Syntax dot1x tx-period seconds To return to the default, use the no dot1x tx-period command.
PAGE 175
mac Configure a list of supplicant MAC addresses for dot1x profile represented with a profile-name. Syntax Parameters Defaults [no] mac {mac-address1 mac-address2… mac-address6} mac-address1 mac-address2 … mac-address6 Enter the keyword mac and type the 48– bit MAC addresses using the H.H.H format. A maximum of 6 MAC addresses are allowed. None Command Modes DOT1X PROFILE CONFIG (conf-dot1x-profile) CONFIGURATION TERMINAL BATCH Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 176
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 177
4 5 6 7 DellEMC# 3 2 1 0 show dot1x interface Display the 802.1X configuration of an interface. Syntax Parameters Defaults show dot1x interface interface [mac-address mac-address] interface Enter one of the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
PAGE 178
802.
PAGE 179
Guest VLAN id: Auth-Fail VLAN: Auth-Fail VLAN id: Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: Mac-Auth-Bypass: Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Host Mode: Max-Supplicants: 100 Disable NONE NONE Enable Enable 3 seconds 60 seconds 2 30 seconds 30 seconds 3600 seconds 2 MULTI_AUTH 128 Port status and State info for Supplicant: 00:00:00:00:00:11 Port Auth Status: Untagged VLAN id: Auth PAE State: Backend State: DellEMC# AUTHORIZED(GUEST
PAGE 180
6 Access Control Lists (ACL) Access control lists (ACLs) are supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 181
• • • • • • • • • • • • seq arp (for Extended MAC ACLs) seq ether-type (for Extended MAC ACLs) seq (for IP ACLs) seq (for IPv6 ACLs) permit udp (for IPv6 ACLs) permit tcp (for IPv6 ACLs) permit icmp (for IPv6 ACLs) permit (for IPv6 ACLs) deny udp (for IPv6 ACLs) deny tcp (for IPv6 ACLs) deny icmp (for Extended IPv6 ACLs) deny (for IPv6 ACLs) Commands Common to all ACL Types The following commands are available within each ACL mode and do not have mode-specific options.
PAGE 182
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The remark command is available in each ACL mode.
PAGE 183
show config Display the current ACL configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes ● ● ● ● Command History Example CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 184
access-class Apply a standard ACL to a terminal line. Syntax access-class access-list-name [ipv4 | ipv6] To remove an ACL, use the no access-class command. Parameters Defaults access-list-name Enter the name of a configured Standard ACL, up to 140 characters. ipv4 Enter the keyword ipv4 to configure an IPv4 access class. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to configure an IPv6 access class. Not configured. Command Modes LINE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 185
already configured on this terminal line. Before applying either IPv4 or IPv6 filtering, first undo the generic configuration using the no access-class access-list-name command. Similarly, if you have configured either IPv4 or IPv6 specific filtering on a terminal line, you cannot apply generic IP ACLs on top of this configuration. Before applying the generic ACL configuration, first undo the existing configuration using the no access-class access-list-name [ipv4 | ipv6] command.
PAGE 186
Parameters Defaults access-list-name Enter the name of a configured access list, up to 140 characters. in Enter the keyword in to apply the ACL to incoming traffic. out Enter the keyword out to apply the ACL to outgoing traffic. implicit-permit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword implicit-permit to change the default action of the ACL from implicit-deny to implicit-permit (that is, if the traffic does not match the filters in the ACL, the traffic is permitted instead of dropped).
PAGE 187
NOTE: This command supports Loopback interfaces EE3 and EF series route processor modules (RPMs). This command does not support Loopback interfaces ED series RPMs and S-Series Loopback interfaces. NOTE: If you apply outbound(egress) IP acl on a switch port, the filter applies only for routed traffic egressing out of that port. To associate an access-list to a non-default VRF, use the vrf attribute of this command.
PAGE 188
show ip accounting access-list Display the IP access-lists created on the switch and the sequence of filters. Syntax show ip accounting {access-list access-list-name | cam_count} interface interface [vrf vrf-name] Parameters access-list-name Enter the name of the ACL to be displayed. cam_count List the count of the CAM rules for this ACL.
PAGE 189
Usage Information Example NOTE: The vrf option is available only when VRF feature is enabled. show ip accounting accesslists Field Description “Extended IP...” Displays the name of the IP ACL. “seq 5...” Displays the filter. If the keywords count or byte were configured in the filter, the number of packets or bytes the filter processes is displayed at the end of the line. “order 4” Displays the QoS order of priority for the ACL entry.
PAGE 190
Defaults bytes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bytes to count the bytes. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log. dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match the IP DSCP values. The range is from 0 to 63. ecn (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ecn to match the ECN bits. The range is from 0 to 3. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order for the ACL entry.
PAGE 191
Usage Information Version Description 7.4.1.0 Added support for the non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, see the Quality of Service section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. The software cannot count both packets and bytes; when you enter the count byte options, only bytes increment.
PAGE 192
Usage Information Dell EMC Networking OS supports one ingress and one egress IP ACL per interface. Prior to Dell EMC Networking OS version 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specifications on entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation. Example Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# ip access-list standard TestList DellEMC(config-std-nacl)# ● ip access-list extended — create an extended access list.
PAGE 193
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Removed the session–ID option from the monitor parameter. 9.11(0.0) Added support for session–ID to the monitor parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 194
Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 195
The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names were up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 196
lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). Defaults monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to describe the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. NOTE: For more information, see “Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring section of the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 197
● If you do not configure sequence-number, the rules with the same order value are ordered according to their configuration order. ● If you configure sequence-number, the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for rules with the same order. Related Commands ● deny — configure a filter to drop packets. ● permit — configure a filter to forward packets. Extended IP ACL Commands When an ACL is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects an implicit permit.
PAGE 198
● range(inclusive range of values) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that falls between the specified range of ttl values. Defaults count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets that the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes that the filter processes. log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log. dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values.
PAGE 199
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for the noncontiguous mask and added the monitor option. 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, see the Quality of Service section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. When you use the log option, the CP processor logs detail the packets that match.
PAGE 200
● range(inclusive range of values) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that falls between the specified range of ttl values. Defaults dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
PAGE 201
Usage Information Version Description 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, see the Quality of Service section of the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. For more information, see Port Monitoring .
PAGE 202
● gt = greater than ● lt = less than ● range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command) port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535. The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: ● 23 = Telnet ● 20 and 21 = FTP ● 25 = SMTP ● 169 = SNMP Defaults destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
PAGE 203
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Added the keyword dscp. 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.
PAGE 204
deny udp To drop user datagram protocol (UDP) packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter. Syntax deny udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [ttl operator] [dscp] [operator port [port]] [count [byte] [order] [fragments] [monitor] [no-drop] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 205
Defaults monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to describe the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. For more information, see Flow-based Monitoring in the Port Monitoring section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. no-drop Enter the keywords no-drop to match only the forwarded packets. Not configured.
PAGE 206
Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (for example, gt, lt or range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on bit mask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range. Example An ACL rule with a TCP port range of 4000–8000 uses eight entries in the CAM.
PAGE 207
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names were up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 208
● gt(greater than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is greater than the specified ttl value. ● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value. ● range(inclusive range of values) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that falls between the specified range of ttl values. Defaults count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
PAGE 209
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for the non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, see the “Quality of Service” section of the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 210
● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value. ● range(inclusive range of values) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that falls between the specified range of ttl values. dscp Enter the keyword dscp to permit a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63.
PAGE 211
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Added the no-drop parameter. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.
PAGE 212
Example An ACL rule with a TCP port lt 1023 uses only one entry in the CAM. DellEMC# Data Mask 1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 From To #Covered 1023 1024 Total Ports: 1024 Related Commands ● ip access-list extended — create an extended ACL. ● permit — assign a permit filter for IP packets. ● permit udp — assign a permit filter for UDP packets. permit udp To pass UDP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter.
PAGE 213
Defaults destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority).
PAGE 214
NOTE: When you configure ACL logging and byte counters simultaneously, byte counters may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead. The S-Series cannot count both packets and bytes; when you enter the count byte options, only bytes increment. The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. For more information, refer to Port Monitoring. Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM.
PAGE 215
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.
PAGE 216
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information When you have exhausted all the sequence numbers, this feature permits re-assigning a new sequence number to entries of an existing prefix list. Related Commands resequence access-list — resequences an access-list. seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the filter.
PAGE 217
The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: ● 23 = Telnet ● 20 and 21 = FTP-DATA and FTP ● 25 = SMTP ● 169 = SNMP Defaults destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. ttl Enter the keyword ttl to permit or deny a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255. operator Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value.
PAGE 218
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Added the no-drop parameter. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 219
Common MAC Access List Commands The following commands are available within both MAC ACL modes (Standard and Extended) and do not have mode-specific options. These commands allow you to clear, display, and assign MAC ACL configurations. The platform supports both Ingress and Egress MAC ACLs. The MAC ACL can be applied on Physical, Port-channel and VLAN interfaces. As per the specified rules in the ACL, the traffic on the interface/ VLAN members or Port-channel members will be permitted or denied.
PAGE 220
Parameters access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC access list, up to 140 characters. NOTE: This option is available only with the keyword in option. vlan vlan-range (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan and then enter a range of VLANs. The range is from 1 to 4094 (you can use IDs 1 to 4094). NOTE: This option is available only with the keyword in option. optimized Enter the keyword optimized to enable ACL optimization. in Enter the keyword in to configure the ACL to filter incoming traffic.
PAGE 221
Usage Information You can assign one ingress ACL and one egress ACL (standard or extended) to an interface. Related Commands ● mac access-list standard — configure a standard MAC ACL. ● mac access-list extended — configure an extended MAC ACL. show mac access-lists Display all of the Layer 2 ACLs configured in the system, whether or not they are applied to an interface, and the count of matches/mismatches against each ACL entry displayed.
PAGE 222
show mac accounting access-list Display MAC access list configurations and counters (if configured). Syntax show mac accounting access-list access-list-name interface interface in | out Parameters access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC ACL, up to 140 characters.
PAGE 223
Example DellEMC# show mac accounting access-list TestMac interface tengigabitethernet 1/8 in Ingress Standard mac access-list TestMac on TenGigabitEthernet 1/89 Total cam count 2 seq 5 permit aa:aa:aa:aa:00:00 00:00:00:00:ff:ff count (0 packets) seq 10 deny any count (20072594 packets) DellEMC# Standard MAC ACL Commands When you create an access control list without any rule and then apply it to an interface, the ACL behavior reflects implicit permit.
PAGE 224
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added the monitor option.
PAGE 225
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 226
Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The threshold range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
PAGE 227
Parameters Defaults any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match). count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
PAGE 228
NOTE: When you configure the ACL logging and byte counters simultaneously, byte counters may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead. Related Commands ● deny — configure a filter to drop packets. ● permit — configure a filter to forward packets. Extended MAC ACL Commands When an access-list is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects implicit permit. The following commands configure Extended MAC ACLs.
PAGE 229
Defaults log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to include ACL messages in the log. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated.
PAGE 230
mac access-list extended Name a new or existing extended MAC access control list (extended MAC ACL). Syntax mac access-list extended access-list-name [cpu-qos] To delete a MAC access list, use the no mac access-list extended access-list-name command. Parameters access-list-name Enter a text string as the MAC access list name, up to 140 characters. cpu-qos Defaults Enter the keywords cpu-qos to assign this ACL to control plane traffic only (CoPP).
PAGE 231
DellEMC(config-ext-macl)# exit DellEMC(conf)# do show mac accounting access-list snickers interface tengig 1/17 in Extended mac access-list snickers on TenGigabitEthernet 1/17 seq 10 permit any any ev2 eq 800 count bytes (559851886 packets 191402152148 bytes) seq 20 permit any any ev2 eq 806 count bytes (74481486 packets 5031686754 bytes) seq 30 permit any any ev2 eq 86dd count bytes (7751519 packets 797843521 bytes) Related Commands ● mac access-list standard — configure a standard MAC access list.
PAGE 232
monitor Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. NOTE: For more information, see Flow-based Monitoring in the “Port Monitoring” section of the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 233
To delete a filter, use the no seq sequence-number command. Parameters sequencenumber Enter a number as the filter sequence number. The range is from zero (0) to 65535. deny Enter the keyword deny to drop any traffic matching this filter. permit Enter the keyword permit to forward any traffic matching this filter. any Enter the keyword any to filter all packets. host macaddress Enter the keyword host and then enter a MAC address to filter packets with that host address.
PAGE 234
Usage Information 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added the monitor option. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When you use the log option, the CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details. NOTE: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters may display an incorrect value.
PAGE 235
Related Commands Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increase the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names were up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ip prefix-list — configure a prefix list. deny To drop packets meeting the criteria specified, configure a filter.
PAGE 236
Usage Information Version Description 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Sequence numbers for this filter are automatically assigned starting at sequence number 5. If you do not use the ge or le options, only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered. ip prefix-list Enter the PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list. Syntax ip prefix-list prefix-name To delete a prefix list, use the no ip prefix-list prefix-name command.
PAGE 237
permit Configure a filter that passes packets meeting the criteria specified. Syntax permit ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] To delete a forward filter, use the no permit ip-prefix command. Parameters ip-prefix Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example, 35.0.0.0/8 means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0. ge min-prefix- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge and then enter the minimum prefix length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
PAGE 238
ip-prefix /nn (OPTIONAL) Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example, 35.0.0.0/8 means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0. ge min-prefix- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge and then enter the minimum prefix length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32. length le max-prefix- length bitmask number Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword le and then enter the maximum prefix length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
PAGE 239
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.
PAGE 240
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 241
Example Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 242
Usage Information The continue feature allows movement from one route-map entry to a specific route-map entry (the sequence number). If you do not specify the sequence number, the continue feature simply moves to the next sequence number (also known as an implied continue). If a match clause exists, the continue feature executes only after a successful match occurs. If there are no successful matches, the continue feature is ignored.
PAGE 243
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced. ● route-map — enable a route map. match as-path To match routes that have a certain AS number in their BGP path, configure a filter. Syntax match as-path as-path-name To delete a match AS path filter, use the no match as-path as-path-name command.
PAGE 244
match community To match routes that have a certain COMMUNITY attribute in their BGP path, configure a filter. Syntax match community community-list-name [exact] To delete a community match filter, use the no match community command. Parameters Defaults community-listname Enter the name of a configured community list. exact (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords exact to process only those routes with this community list name. Not configured.
PAGE 245
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 246
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON.
PAGE 247
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 248
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.
PAGE 249
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 250
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. match route-type To match routes based on the how the route is defined, configure a filter.
PAGE 251
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● ● ● match match match match match match interface — redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface. ip address — redistribute routes that match an IP address. ip next-hop — redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.
PAGE 252
Related Commands Version Description pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● ● ● match match match match match match interface — redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface. ip address — redistribute routes that match an IP address. ip next-hop — redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address. ip route-source — redistribute routes that match routes advertised by other routers. metric — redistribute routes that match a specific metric.
PAGE 253
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 254
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. You can prepend up to eight AS numbers to a BGP route. This command influences best path selection in BGP by inserting a tag or AS number into the AS_PATH attribute. ● match as-path — redistribute routes that match an AS-PATH attribute. set automatic-tag To automatically compute the tag value of the route, configure a filter.
PAGE 255
set comm-list delete To remove the specified community list from the BGP route’s COMMUNITY attribute, configure a filter. Syntax set comm-list community-list-name delete To insert the community list into the COMMUNITY attribute, use the no set comm-list community-list-name delete command. Parameters Defaults community-listname Enter the name of an established Community list, up to 140 characters. Not configured.
PAGE 256
set community Allows you to assign a BGP COMMUNITY attribute. Syntax set community {community-number | local-as | no-advertise | no-export | none} [additive] To delete a BGP COMMUNITY attribute assignment, use the no set community {communitynumber | local-as | no-advertise | no-export | none} command. Parameters communitynumber Enter the community number in AA:NN format where AA is the AS number (2 bytes) and NN is a value specific to that autonomous system.
PAGE 257
Related Commands Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● match community — redistribute routes that match the COMMUNITY attribute. ● show ip bgp community — display BGP community groups. set level To specify the IS-IS level or OSPF area to which matched routes are redistributed, configure a filter.
PAGE 258
Related Commands Version Description pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● set set set set automatic-tag — compute the tag value of the route. metric — specify the metric value assigned to redistributed routes. metric-type — specify the metric type assigned to redistributed routes. tag — specify the tag assigned to redistributed routes. set local-preference To set the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for routers within the local autonomous system, configure a filter.
PAGE 259
set metric To assign a new metric to redistributed routes, configure a filter. Syntax set metric [+ | -] metric-value To delete a setting, enter no set metric. Parameters Defaults + (OPTIONAL) Enter + to add a metric-value to the redistributed routes. - (OPTIONAL) Enter - to subtract a metric-value from the redistributed routes. metric-value Enter a number as the new metric value. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. Not configured.
PAGE 260
Parameters Defaults internal Enter the keyword internal to assign the Interior Gateway Protocol metric of the next hop as the route’s BGP MULTI_EXIT_DES (MED) value. external Enter the keyword external to assign the IS-IS external metric. type-1 Enter the keyword type-1 to assign the OSPF Type 1 metric. type-2 Enter the keyword type-2 to assign the OSPF Type 2 metric. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 261
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 262
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.
PAGE 263
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● set set set set automatic-tag — compute the tag value of the route. level — specify the OSPF area for route redistribution. metric — specify the metric value assigned to redistributed routes.
PAGE 264
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. If you do not use the set weight command, router-originated paths have a weight attribute of 32768 and all other paths have a weight attribute of zero. show config Display the current route map configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Example 264 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 265
show route-map Display the current route map configurations. Syntax Parameters show route-map [map-name] map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured route map, up to 140 characters. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 266
ip as-path access-list Enter AS-PATH ACL mode and configure an access control list based on the BGP AS_PATH attribute. Syntax ip as-path access-list as-path-name Parameters Defaults as-path-name Enter the access-list name, up to 140 characters. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 267
Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show ip as-path-access-lists ip as-path access-list acc permit 750 deny 10 DellEMC# IP Community List Commands IP community list commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. ip community-list Enter COMMUNITY-LIST mode and create an IP community-list for BGP.
PAGE 268
show ip community-lists Display configured IP community lists in alphabetic order. Syntax show ip community-lists [name] Parameters name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the standard or extended IP community list, up to 140 characters. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.
PAGE 269
monitor Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled.
PAGE 270
To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no deny {ip | ip-protocol-number} {source mask | any | host ipaddress} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command. Parameters Defaults ttl Enter the keyword ttl to deny a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255.
PAGE 271
Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
PAGE 272
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms.
PAGE 273
● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value. ● range(inclusive range of values) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that falls between the specified range of ttl values. Defaults log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
PAGE 274
specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands ● deny — assign a filter to deny IP traffic. ● deny udp — assign a filter to deny UDP traffic. deny udp (for Extended IP ACLs) To drop user datagram protocol (UDP) packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter.
PAGE 275
Usage Information Version Description 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
PAGE 276
Usage Information Version Description 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 277
Defaults threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The time interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
PAGE 278
To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no deny ether-type protocol-type-number {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {source-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} command. Parameters Defaults log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
PAGE 279
deny (for Standard MAC ACLs) To drop packets with a the MAC address specified, configure a filter. Syntax deny {any | mac-source-address [mac-source-address-mask]} [count [byte]] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]][monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no deny {any | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} command.
PAGE 280
that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists.
PAGE 281
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 282
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 283
which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
PAGE 284
● Use the no permit ether-type protocol-type-number {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {source-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} command. Parameters Defaults log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated.
PAGE 285
permit icmp (for Extended IP ACLs) Configure a filter to allow all or specific ICMP messages. Syntax permit icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [ttl operator] [dscp] [count [byte]] [order] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 286
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 287
Defaults threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
PAGE 288
permit (for Extended IP ACLs) To pass IP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter. Syntax permit {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [count [bytes]] [ttl operator] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 289
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added the support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added the support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 290
The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is 5 minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 291
which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
PAGE 292
permit tcp (for Extended IP ACLs) To pass TCP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter. Syntax permit tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operator port [port]] {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [ttl operator] [dscp] [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] [order] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 293
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 294
monitor Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is 5 minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled.
PAGE 295
Parameters Defaults log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated. with the seq, permit, or deny commands. You can enter a threshold in the range of 1-100.
PAGE 296
| host ip-address} [operator port [port]] [ttl operator] [count [byte]] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] Parameters Defaults ttl Enter the keyword ttl to permit or deny a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255. operator Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value.
PAGE 297
and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
PAGE 298
● lt = less than ● range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter.) portnumber (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535. The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: ● 23 = Telnet ● 20 and 21 = FTP-DATA and FTP ● 25 = SMTP ● 169 = SNMP Defaults destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
PAGE 299
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
PAGE 300
The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 301
Parameters source address mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x). any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ipv6- Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. address destination address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
PAGE 302
monitor Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is 5 minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 303
permit icmp (for IPv6 ACLs) To allow all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter. Syntax permit icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address | any | host ipv6-address} [message-type] [ttl operator] [count [byte]] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 304
Usage Information Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.11(2.0P1) Added the type parameter to filter the ICMP packets based on the type and code on the S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 305
which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
PAGE 306
deny udp (for IPv6 ACLs) Configure a filter to drop user datagram protocol (UDP) packets meeting the filter criteria.
PAGE 307
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, Z9000, and MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, Z9000, and MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms.
PAGE 308
● ● ● ● psh: rst: syn: urg: push function reset the connection synchronize sequence numbers urgent field operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq = equal to ● neq = not equal to ● gt = greater than ● lt = less than ● range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter) port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535.
PAGE 309
Usage Information Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.11(2.0P0) Added the established parameter on the on the S6000, S6000–ON, S6100– ON, Z9100–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON.
PAGE 310
Parameters source address mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip- Enter the keyword host then the IPv6 address to specify a host IP address. v6address Defaults destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
PAGE 311
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.3.0.0 Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 312
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 313
7 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This section describes the access control list (ACL) virtual local area network (VLAN) group, and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • member vlan ip access-group show acl-vlan-group show cam-acl-vlan cam-acl-vlan show cam-usage show running config acl-vlan-group acl-vlan-group show acl-vlan-group detail description (ACL VLAN Group) member vlan Add VLAN members to an ACL VLAN group.
PAGE 314
Attaching an ACL individually to VLAN interfaces is similar to the behavior of ACL-VLAN mapping storage in CAM prior to the implementation of the ACL VLAN group functionality. ip access-group Apply an egress IP ACL to the ACL VLAN group. Syntax ip access-group {group name} out implicit-permit Parameters Default group-name Enter the name of the ACL VLAN group where you want the egress IP ACLs applied, up to 140 characters. out Enter the keyword out to apply the ACL to outgoing traffic.
PAGE 315
Version Description 9.3.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, Z9000 and MXL platforms Usage Information When an ACL-VLAN-Group name or the Access List Group Name contains more than 30 characters, the name is truncated in the show acl-vlan-group command output. Examples The following sample illustrates the output of the show acl-vlan-group command. NOTE: Some group names and some access list names are truncated.
PAGE 316
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.3.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, Z9000 and MXL platforms After CAM configuration for ACL VLAN groups is performed, you must reboot the system to enable the settings to be stored in nonvolatile storage. During the initialization of CAM, the chassis manager reads the NVRAM and allocates the dynamic VCAP regions.
PAGE 317
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000 platforms.
PAGE 318
Example 1: Output of the show cam-usage Command 318 Field Description Total CAM Total amount of space in the CAM block Used CAM Amount of CAM space that is currently in use Available CAM Amount of CAM space that is free and remaining to be allocated for ACLs DellEMC#show cam-usage Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM | Available CAM ========|========|=================|=============|=============| ============== 1 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1536 | 0 | 1536 | | IN-L3 ACL | 1024 | 1 | 1023
PAGE 319
Example 2: Output of the show cam-usage acl Command Example 3: Output of the show cam-usage router Command DellEMC#show cam-usage acl Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM | Available CAM ========|========|=================|=============|=============| ============== 1 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1536 | 0 | 1536 | | IN-L3 ACL | 1024 | 1 | 1023 | | IN-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | OUT-L2 ACL | 206 | 9 | 197 | | OUT-L3 ACL | 178 | 9 | 169 | | OUT-V6 ACL | 178 | 4 | 174 2 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1536 | 0 | 1536
PAGE 320
| | IN-L3 ACL | 1024 | | | IN-V6 ACL | 0 | | | OUT-L3 ACL | 178 | | | OUT-V6 ACL | 178 | Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%.
PAGE 321
DellEMC#show running-config acl-vlan-group ! acl-vlan-group Test member vlan 1-100 ip access-group test in DellEMC# Test acl-vlan-group Create an ACL VLAN group. Syntax acl-vlan-group {group name} To remove an ACL VLAN group, use the no acl-vlan-group {group name} command. Parameters Default group-name Specify the name of the ACL VLAN group. The name can contain a maximum 140 characters.
PAGE 322
Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.3.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, Z9000 and MXL platforms Usage Information The output for this command displays in a line-by-line format.
PAGE 323
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) is a detection protocol that provides fast forwarding path failure detection.
PAGE 324
Command Modes ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFv3 ROUTER BGP ROUTER ISIS Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Introduced support for enabling BFD on non-default VRFs for IPv4 BGP, default, and non-default VRFs for IPv6 BGP on the S3100 series, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, C9010, Z9500, and Z9100–ON. 9.11(2.
PAGE 325
disable values configured with the bfd neighbor command or configured for the peer group to which a neighbor belongs. The neighbors inherit only the global timer values (configured with the bfd neighbor command). You can only enable BFD for VRRP in INTERFACE command mode (vrrp bfd all-neighbors). You can enable BFD on both default and nondefault VRFs for OSPF and BGP protocols for both IPv4 and IPv6 neighbors. NOTE: The bfd all-neighbors command is applicable for both IPv4 and IPv6 BGP sessions.
PAGE 326
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 327
bfd interval Specify non-default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval. Syntax Parameters bfd interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive} interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds Enter the keywords interval to specify non-default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 200. Dell EMC recommends using more than 100 milliseconds.
PAGE 328
bfd neighbor Establish a BFD session with a neighbor. Syntax bfd neighbor ip-address To remove the BFD session with the neighbor, use the no bfd neighbor ip-address command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). None Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 329
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Protocol Liveness is a feature that notifies the BFD Manager when a client protocol (for example, OSPF and ISIS) is disabled. When a client is disabled, all BFD sessions for that protocol are torn down. Neighbors on the remote system receive an Admin Down control packet and are placed in the Down state.
PAGE 330
Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced the prefix-list keyword. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.3.(0.0) Introduced on S6000. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2.(0.
PAGE 331
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.2) Introduced support for enabling BFD on non-default VRFs for OSPFv2. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S4820T, and S4810.
PAGE 332
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S4820T, and S4810. This command provides the flexibility to fine-tune the timer values based on individual interface needs when you configure ipv6 ospf BFD in CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 333
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command provides the flexibility to fine-tune the timer values based on individual interface needs when ISIS BFD is configured in CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 334
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.3 Introduced on the E-Series. When you enable a BFD session with a specified BGP neighbor or peer group using the bfd neighbor command, the default BFD session parameters are used (interval: 200 milliseconds, min_rx: 200 milliseconds, multiplier: 3 packets, and role: active) if you have not specified parameters with the bfd neighbor command.
PAGE 335
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.3 Introduced on the E-Series. When you explicitly disable a BGP neighbor for a BFD session with the neighbor bfd disable command: ● The neighbor does not inherit the global BFD disable values configured with the bfd neighbor command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs. ● The neighbor only inherits the global timer values configured with the bfd neighbor command: interval, min_rx, and multiplier.
PAGE 336
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Added support for BFD for BGP on the S4810. 8.4.1.3 Added support for BFD for BGP on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Added support for BFD for VLAN and port-channel interfaces on the E-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced BFD on physical ports on the E-Series.
PAGE 337
Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 6 DellEMC# Related Commands ● bfd all-neighbors — establish BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by the IS-IS protocol or OSPF protocol out of all interfaces. vrrp bfd neighbor Establish a BFD for VRRP session with a neighbor. Syntax vrrp bfd neighbor ip-address To remove the BFD session with the neighbor, use the no vrrp bfd neighbor ip-address command.
PAGE 338
9 Border Gateway Protocol BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless inter-domain routing (CIDR) and the aggregation of routes and AS paths. Basically, two routers (called neighbors or peers) exchange information including full routing tables and periodically sent messages to update those routing tables.
PAGE 339
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for IPv6 VRF. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.
PAGE 340
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.
PAGE 341
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced command. 7.7.1.
PAGE 342
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information Using this command recycles all current sessions. Related Commands ● neighbor add-path — specify that this neighbor/peer group can send/receive multiple path advertisements. bgp asnotation Allows you to implement a method for AS number representation in the command line interface (CLI).
PAGE 343
router bgp 1 bgp four-octet-as-support bgp asnotation asdot DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# bgp asnotation asdot+ DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# ex DellEMC(conf)#do show run | grep bgp router bgp 1 bgp four-octet-as-support bgp asnotation asdot+ DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# bgp asnotation asplain DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# ex DellEMC(conf)#do show run |grep bgp router bgp 1 bgp four-octet-as-support DellEMC(conf)# Related Commands ● bgp four-octet-as-support — enable
PAGE 344
Usage Information If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path. bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax Include prefixes received from different AS paths during multipath calculation. Syntax bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax To return to the default BGP routing process, use the no bgp bestpath as-path multipathrelax command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 345
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 346
Usage Information Version Description 6.3.1.0 Introduced The MED is a 4-byte unsigned integer value and the default behavior is to assume a missing MED as 4294967295. This command causes a missing MED to be treated as 0. During path selection, paths with a lower MED are preferred over paths with a higher MED. bgp bestpath router-id ignore Do not compare router-id information for external paths during best path selection.
PAGE 347
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 348
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. When a BGP cluster contains only one route reflector, the cluster ID is the route reflector’s router ID. For redundancy, a BGP cluster may contain two or more route reflectors. Assign a cluster ID with the bgp cluster-id command.
PAGE 349
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Added support for the 4-byte format To accept 4-byte formats before entering a 4-byte AS number, configure your system. All the routers in the Confederation must be 4 byte or 2 byte identified routers. You cannot mix them. The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors.
PAGE 350
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Added support for the 4-byte format. All the routers in the Confederation must be 4 byte or 2 byte identified routers. You cannot mix them. The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors.
PAGE 351
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 352
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Usage Information All routers apply the bgp default local-preference command setting within the AS. To set the local preference for a specific route, use the set local-preference command in ROUTE-MAP mode.
PAGE 353
bgp enforce-first-as Disable (or enable) enforce-first-as check for updates received from EBGP peers. Syntax bgp enforce-first-as To turn off the default, use the no bgp enforce-first-as command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 354
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 355
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Routers supporting 4-byte ASNs advertise that function in the OPEN message. The behavior of a 4-byte router is slightly different depending on whether it is speaking to a 2-byte router or a 4-byte router. When creating Confederations, all the routers in the Confederation must be 4 byte or 2 byte identified routers. You cannot mix them.
PAGE 356
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. This feature is advertised to BGP neighbors through a capability advertisement. In Receiver Only mode, BGP saves the advertised routes of peers that support this capability when they restart. BGP graceful restart is active only when the neighbor becomes established.
PAGE 357
compares MED between adjacent paths within an AS group because all paths in the AS group are from the same AS. When you change the path selection from Deterministic to Non-Deterministic, the path selection for the existing paths remains Deterministic until you enter the clear ip bgp command to clear existing paths. bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop Enable next-hop resolution through other routes learned by BGP.
PAGE 358
bgp regex-eval-optz-disable Disables the Regex Performance engine that optimizes complex regular expression with BGP. Syntax bgp regex-eval-optz-disable To re-enable optimization engine, use the no bgp regex-eval-optz-disable command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP (conf-router_bgp) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 359
Capable of ROUTE_REFRESH For Address Family IPv4 Unicast BGP table version is 0, main routing table version 0 Distance: external 20 internal 200 local 200 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# Related Commands ● show ip protocols — view information on all routing protocols enabled and active on the E-Series. bgp router-id Assign a user-given ID to a BGP router. Syntax bgp router-id ip-address To delete a user-assigned IP address, use the no bgp router-id command.
PAGE 360
clear ip bgp Reset BGP sessions. The soft parameter (BGP Soft Reconfiguration) clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection. S4820T Syntax clear ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [* | <1–4294967295> | <0.1–65535.65535> | A.B.C.D {soft {in | out}} | X:X:X:X::X {soft {in | out}} | dampening | flap-statistics | ipv4 | ipv6 | peer-group] Parameters vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to clear all BGP sessions corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 361
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the as-number option.
PAGE 362
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 363
filter-list as- path-name regexp regular- expression (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords filter-list then the name of a configured AS-PATH list. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword regexp then regular expressions. Use one or a combination of the following: ● . = (period) any single character (including a white space). ● * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences). ● + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences). ● ? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either 0 or 1 sequences).
PAGE 364
clear ip bgp peer-group Reset a peer-group’s BGP sessions. S4820T Syntax clear ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] peer-group peer-group-name [ipv4 [multicast | unicast] | ipv6 unicast] [soft {in | out}] Parameters vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to reset the peer group corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: You can use this attribute on a specific VRF to remove history routes corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 365
debug ip bgp Display all information on BGP, including BGP events, keepalives, notifications, and updates. S4820T Syntax debug ip bgp [ vrf vrf-name | A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-groupname] [in | out] To disable all BGP debugging, use the no debug ip bgp command. Parameters vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to debug BGP information corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 366
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To view information on both incoming and outgoing routes, do not include the in and out parameters in the debugging command.
PAGE 367
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.
PAGE 368
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 369
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 370
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Added ipv6 support. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. debug ip bgp soft-reconfiguration Enable soft-reconfiguration debug. S4820T Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.
PAGE 371
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.2.1.0 Introduced. This command turns on BGP soft-reconfiguration inbound debugging. If no neighbor is specified, debug turns on for all neighbors. debug ip bgp updates Allows you to view information about BGP updates. S4820T Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.
PAGE 372
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 373
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Usage Information The default-metric command in BGP sets the value of the BGP MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attribute for redistributed routes only. Related Commands ● bgp always-compare-med — enable comparison of all BGP MED attributes.
PAGE 374
deny bandwidth Enables you to specify link band width extended-community attribute as the matching criteria to deny incoming or outgoing traffic. Syntax deny bandwidth To disable this setting, enter the no deny bandwidth command. Parameters Defaults bandwidth Enter the keyword bandwidth to specify extended-community attribute as the matching criteria for denying traffic. The range is from 0 to 102400.
PAGE 375
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.
PAGE 376
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 377
Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group. Defaults send Enter the keyword send to indicate that the system sends multiple paths to peers. receive Enter the keyword receive to indicate that the system accepts multiple paths from peers. both Enter the keyword both to indicate that the system sends and accepts multiple paths from peers. path-count Enter the number paths supported.
PAGE 378
● seconds = 30 seconds (external peers) Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 379
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. neighbor allowas-in Set the number of times an AS number can occur in the AS path.
PAGE 380
Usage Information You cannot set this configuration for a peer that is associated with a peer group. Similarly, you cannot associate a peer to a peer group if that peer is already configured with these settings. Related Commands ● bgp four-octet-as-support — enable 4-byte support for the BGP process. neighbor default-originate Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor.
PAGE 381
When you apply a default route to a BGP peer or peer group using the neighbor defaultoriginate command, changes to the configured default route-map are applied to the BGP peer or peer group only after a delay of 15 seconds. As a result, you must wait for a period of 15 seconds before manually resetting BGP using the clear ip bgp command. In case of eBGP, the neighbor default-originate command does not support extendedcommunity as a non-transtive route-map attribute.
PAGE 382
neighbor distribute-list Distribute BGP information via an established prefix list. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
PAGE 383
To disallow and disconnect connections, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-groupname} ebgp-multihop command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group. ttl Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of hops as the Time to Live (ttl) value. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 255. Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 384
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON and S4048–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.
PAGE 385
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 386
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 387
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. If you configure the set next-hop command in ROUTE-MAP mode, the configuration takes precedence over the neighbor next-hop-self command. If you do not use the all keyword, the next hop of only eBGP-learned routes is updated by the route reflector.
PAGE 388
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. This command automatically restarts the neighbor session for the configuration to take effect. Configure the same password on both BGP peers or a connection does not occur.
PAGE 389
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the dmzlink-bw parameter. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 390
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 391
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced the limit keyword on the S4810. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 392
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Added 4-byte support. To accept 4-byte formats before entering a 4 byte AS Number, configure your system.
PAGE 393
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Added 4-byte support. Applies to EBGP neighbors only. Configure your system to accept 4-byte formats before entering a 4 byte AS Number. If the AS-PATH contains both public and private AS number or contains AS numbers of an EBGP neighbor, the private AS numbers are not removed.
PAGE 394
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. When you apply a route map to outbound routes, only routes that match at least one section of the route map are permitted.
PAGE 395
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. A route reflector reflects routes to the neighbors assigned to the cluster. Neighbors in the cluster do not need not to be fully meshed. By default, when you use no route reflector, the internal BGP (IBGP) speakers in the network must be fully meshed.
PAGE 396
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To configure a COMMUNITY attribute, use the set community command in ROUTE-MAP mode.
PAGE 397
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Peers that are enabled within a peer group are disabled when their peer group is disabled. The neighbor shutdown command terminates all BGP sessions on the BGP neighbor or BGP peer group. Use this command with caution as it terminates the specified BGP sessions. When a neighbor or peer group is shut down, use the show ip bgp summary command to confirm its status.
PAGE 398
Usage Information This command enables soft-reconfiguration for the BGP neighbor specified. BGP stores all the updates the neighbor receives but does not reset the peer-session. You cannot set this configuration for a peer that is associated with a peer group. Similarly, you cannot associate a peer to a peer group if that peer is already configured with these settings. CAUTION: Inbound update storage is a memory-intensive operation.
PAGE 399
Usage Information Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Timer values configured with the neighbor timers command override the timer values configured with any other command.
PAGE 400
Usage Information Loopback interfaces are up constantly and the BGP session may need one interface constantly up to stabilize the session. The neighbor update-source command is not necessary for directly connected internal BGP sessions. Neighbors are sorted according to the source and destination ip addresses. If an update-source ip address exists, then the source ip address determines the order in which the neighbors are displayed.
PAGE 401
network Specify the networks for the BGP process and enter them in the BGP routing table. S4820T Syntax network ip-address mask [route-map map-name] To remove a network, use the no network ip-address mask [route-map map-name] command. Parameters ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network. mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format (for example, / 24). The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
PAGE 402
Usage Information Dell EMC Networking OS software resolves the network address the network command configures with the routes in the main routing table to ensure that the networks are reachable using non-BGP routes and non-default routes. As BGP does not query next-hop information corresponding to locally originated routes, a local route with an unreachable next-hop is chosen as the best route.
PAGE 403
Usage Information Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Although Dell EMC Networking OS does not generate a route due to the backdoor config, there is an option for injecting/sourcing a local route in the presence of network backdoor config on a learned route. permit bandwidth Enables you to specify link band width extended-community attribute as the matching criteria to permit incoming or outgoing traffic.
PAGE 404
● ● ● ● ● ● ● match ip address set community set local-preference set metric set next-hop set origin set weight If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.
PAGE 405
It is possible to keep only one locally originated route in the BGP database. Network command has preference over the re-distributed routes. When the locally originated route is no longer present in the database the other route is automatically installed. Related Commands ● neighbor default-originate — inject the default route. redistribute ospf Redistribute OSPF routes into BGP.
PAGE 406
Usage Information You can use the redistribute command to advertise the IGP cost as the MED on redistributed routes. When you set the route-map with metric-type internal and apply outbound to an EBGP peer/peer-group, the advertised routes corresponding to those peer/peer-groups have the IGP cost set as MED. When you enter the redistribute isis process-id command without any other parameters, Dell EMC Networking OS redistributes all OSPF internal routes, external type 1 routes, and external type 2 routes.
PAGE 407
shutdown all Disables all the BGP neighbors. Syntax shutdown all Use the no shutdown all command to enable all the configured BGP neighbors. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced on the S-Series, Z-Series, MXL, and IOM. You can use this command to disable all the configured BGP neighbors. This command is global for all VRFs.
PAGE 408
shutdown address-family-ipv6–unicast Disables all the BGP neighbors corresponding to the unicast IPv6 address families. Syntax shutdown address-family-ipv6–unicast Use the no shutdown address-family-ipv6–unicast command to enable all the configured BGP neighbors corresponding to the unicast IPv6 address families. Command Modes ROUTER BGP CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced on the S-Series, Z-Series, MXL, and IOM.
PAGE 409
show capture bgp-pdu neighbor Display BGP packet capture information for an IPv4 address on the system. Syntax Parameters show capture bgp-pdu neighbor ipv4-address ipv4-address Enter the IPv4 address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP address to display packet information for that address. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 410
ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 [. . .] DellEMC# show config View the current ROUTER BGP configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 411
routes}] [network[network-mask]]] [next-hop] [paths] [peer-group peergroup-name] [regexp regular-expression] [summary] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to view ipv4– unicast route information corresponding to that VRF. ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes. ipv4 multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 multicast to view information only related to ipv4 multicast routes.
PAGE 412
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced the [all {received-routes}] option for IPv4 and IPv6 neighbors on S4810 and S4820T. 9.14(0.0) Introduced the [all {received-routes}] option for IPv4 and IPv6 neighbors. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 413
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r redistributed n - network, D - denied, S - stale Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete *> *> Network 55.0.0.0/24 66.0.0.0/24 Next Hop 172.16.0.2 172.16.0.2 Metric LocPrf Weight Path 0 200 i 0 200 i All the show and debugs commands display the link band width extended-community prefixed with DMZ-Link-bw along with other extended communities. DellEMC# show ip bgp 3.3.3.0/24 BGP routing table entry for 3.3.3.
PAGE 414
*>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I Related Commands ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 200:0:0:6::/64 200:0:0:7::/64 200:0:0:8::/64 200:0:0:9::/64 200:0:0:a::/64 200:0:0:b::/64 200:0:0:c::/64 200:0:0:d::/64 200:0:0:e::/64 200:0:0:f::/64 200:0:0:10::/64 200:0:0:11::/64 200:0:0:12::/64 200:0:0:13::/64 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 i i i i i i i i i i i i i i show ip bgp communit
PAGE 415
Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 416
show ip bgp community View information on all routes with Community attributes or view specific BGP community groups. S4820T Syntax show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {multicast | unicast} | ipv6 unicast] community [community-number] [local-as] [no-export] [no-advertise] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords vrf and then the name of the VRF to view information either on all routes with community attributes or specific BGP community routes corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 417
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command.
PAGE 418
show ip bgp community-list View routes that a specific community list affects. S4820T Syntax show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {unicast | multicast} | ipv6 unicast] community-list community-list-name [exact-match] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords vrf and then the name of the VRF to view routes affected by a specific community list corresponding to that VRF. ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes.
PAGE 419
Example Field Description Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route. Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router. If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing table. Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned. LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route. Weight Displays the route’s weight. Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network.
PAGE 420
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 421
show ip bgp dampened-paths View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active). S4820T Syntax Parameters show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {multicast | unicast} | ipv6 unicast] dampened-paths vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords vrf and then the name of the VRF to view routes that are affected by a specific community list corresponding to that VRF. ipv4 multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword multicast to view information related only to ipv4 multicast routes.
PAGE 422
The following describes the show ip bgp damp command shown in the following example. Example Field Description Network Displays the network ID to which the route is dampened. From Displays the IP address of the neighbor advertising the dampened route. Reuse Displays the hour:minutes:seconds until the dampened route is available. Path Lists all the ASs the dampened route passed through to reach the destination network.
PAGE 423
Example Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 424
Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords vrf and then the name of the VRF to view information on all routes with extended community attributes corresponding to that VRF. ipv4 multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword multicast to view information related only to ipv4 multicast routes. ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes.
PAGE 425
*> 55.0.0.0/24 172.16.0.2 *> 77.0.0.0/24 172.16.0.2 DellEMC#show ip bgp extcommunity-list ec % Error: Extended community list does not exist. DellEMC# 0 200 i 0 200 i show ip bgp filter-list View the routes that match the filter lists.
PAGE 426
Usage Information Example The following describes the show ip bgp filter-list hello command shown in the following example. Field Description Path source codes Lists the path sources shown to the right of the last AS number in the Path column: ● i = internal route entry ● a = aggregate route entry ● c = external confederation route entry ● n = network route entry ● r = redistributed route entry Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router. If 0.0.0.
PAGE 427
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask (in slash prefix (/x) format) of the BGP network address. filter-list as- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword filter-list then the name of a configured AS-PATH ACL. The range is 140 characters. path-name regexp regular- expression Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following characters to match. The range is 256 characters. ● . = (period) any single character (including a white space).
PAGE 428
Example Field Description Flaps Displays the number of times the route flapped. Duration Displays the hours:minutes:seconds since the route first flapped. Reuse Displays the hours:minutes:seconds until the flapped route is available. Path Lists all the ASs the flapping route passed through to reach the destination network. DellEMC# show ip bgp flap-statistics BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 BGP local router ID is 192.168.11.
PAGE 429
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The following describes the show ip bgp inconsistent-as command shown in the following example. Field Description Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route. Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router. If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing table.
PAGE 430
show ip bgp neighbors Allows you to view the information BGP neighbors exchange. Syntax show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {multicast | unicast} | ipv6 unicast] neighbors [ip-address [advertised-routes | dampened-routes | detail | flapstatistics | routes | all {received-routes [network [network-mask]]} | {denied-routes [network [network-mask]]}] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to view information exchanged by BGP neighbors corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 431
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Added the add-path option to the S4810. Output on the S4810 shows the ADDPATH parameters.
PAGE 432
The Lines Beginning with: Description Sent messages The line displays the number of BGP messages sent, the number of notifications (error messages), and the number of messages waiting in a queue for processing. Received updates This line displays the number of BGP updates received and sent. Soft reconfiguration This line indicates that soft reconfiguration inbound is configured. Minimum time Displays the minimum time, in seconds, between advertisements.
PAGE 433
For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 InQ : Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 OutQ : Added 0, Withdrawn 0 Allow local AS number 0 times in AS-PATH attribute Prefixes accepted 2, withdrawn 15 by peer, martian prefixes ignored 0 Prefixes advertised 0, denied 0, withdrawn 0 from peer Connections established 1; dropped 0 Last reset never Local host: 172.16.0.1, Local port: 58145 Foreign host: 172.16.0.
PAGE 434
Usage Information Example Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The following describes the show ip bgp next-hop command shown in the following example. Field Description Next-hop Displays the next-hop IP address. Via Displays the IP address and interface used to reach the next hop. RefCount Displays the number of BGP routes using this next hop. Cost Displays the cost associated with using this next hop.
PAGE 435
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for VRF for the S4810, S4820T, and S6000. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.
PAGE 436
show ip bgp paths community View all unique COMMUNITY numbers in the BGP database. S4820T Syntax show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] paths community Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf to view all unique COMMUNITY numbers in the BGP database corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: You can use this attribute to view information on unique COMMUNITY numbers in a BGP database that correspond to either a default or a nondefault VRF.
PAGE 437
Refcount 1 1 DellEMC# Community NO-ADVERTISE 200:1 1000:1 3000:1 show ip bgp peer-group Allows you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group. S4820T Syntax Parameters show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {multicast | unicast} | ipv6 unicast] peer-group [peer-group-name [detail | summary]] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf to view information on BGP peers in a peer group corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 438
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Added the add-path option to the S4810. Output on the S4810 shows the ADDPATH parameters. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The following describes the show ip bgp peer-group command shown in the following example. Line beginning Description with: Example Peer-group Displays the peer group’s name.
PAGE 439
NOTE: You can use this attribute to view the subset of BGP routing tables that match the regular expression that is specified on either a default or a non-default VRF. regularexpression [ character ] Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following characters to match: ● . = (period) any single character (including a white space). ● * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (zero or more sequences). ● + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (one or more sequences).
PAGE 440
Example Field Description Metric Displays the BGP router’s metric, if assigned. LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route. Weight Displays the route’s weight Path Lists all the AS paths the route passed through to reach the destination network. DellEMC# show ip bgp regexp ^200 BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 BGP local router ID is 192.168.11.
PAGE 441
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. In BGP, route attributes are maintained at different locations.
PAGE 442
Field Description OutQ Displays the number of messages waiting to be sent to that neighbor. If a number appears in parentheses, the number represents the number of messages waiting to be sent to the peer group. Up/Down Displays the amount of time that the neighbor is in the Established stage. If the neighbor has never moved into the Established stage, the word never is displayed.
PAGE 443
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show running-config bgp ! router bgp 100 network 1.1.11.
PAGE 444
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 445
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 446
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. CAUTION: Dell EMC Networking recommends not changing the administrative distance of internal routes. Changing the administrative distances may cause routing table inconsistencies.
PAGE 447
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 448
● Communities are structured using a new “Type” field (1 or 2-octets), allowing you to provide granular control/filter routing information based on the type of extended communities. set extcommunity rt To set Route Origin community attributes in Route Map, use this feature. S4820T Syntax set extcommunity rt {as4 ASN4:NN [non-trans] | ASN:NNNN [non-trans] | IPADDR:NN [non-trans]} [additive] To delete the Route Origin community, use the no set extcommunity command.
PAGE 449
set extcommunity soo To set extended community site-of-origin in Route Map, use this feature. S4820T Syntax set extcommunity soo {as4 ASN4:NN | ASN:NNNN | IPADDR:NN [non-trans]} To delete the site-of-origin community, use the no set extcommunity command. Parameters Defaults as4 ASN4:NN Enter the keyword as4 then the 4-octet AS specific extended community number in the format ASN4:NN (4-byte AS number:2-byte community value).
PAGE 450
show ip bgp ipv4 extcommunity-list To display the IPv4 routes matching the extended community list name, use this feature. Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 [multicast | unicast] | ipv6 unicast] extcommunity-list name Parameters Defaults multicast Enter the keyword multicast to display the multicast route information. unicast Enter the keyword unicast to display the unicast route information. ipv6 unicast Enter the keywords ipv6 unicast to display the IPv6 unicast route information.
PAGE 451
show ip bgp paths extcommunity To display all BGP paths having extended community attributes, use this feature. S4820T Syntax show ip bgp paths extcommunity Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.
PAGE 452
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.
PAGE 453
in Reapply only inbound policies. NOTE: If you enter soft, without an in or out option, both inbound and outbound policies are reset. out Reapply only outbound policies. NOTE: If you enter soft, without an in or out option, both inbound and outbound policies are reset. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.
PAGE 454
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command turns on BGP soft-reconfiguration inbound debugging for IPv6 unicast routes. If no neighbor is specified, debug is turned on for all neighbors. ipv6 prefix-list Configure an IPv6 prefix list. S4820T Syntax ipv6 prefix-list prefix-list name Parameters prefix-list name Enter the name of the prefix list.
PAGE 455
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv4 multicast and IPv4 unicast address families. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.
PAGE 456
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) You can use content addressable memory (CAM) commands to configure the amount of memory allocated to CAM memory partitions. NOTE: Not all CAM commands are supported on all platforms. Be sure to note the platform when looking for a command. NOTE: If you are using these features for the first time, contact Dell EMC Networking Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for guidance.
PAGE 457
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl :0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 l2acl number Enter the keyword l2acl and then the number of l2acl blocks. The range is from 1 to 8. ipv4acl number Enter the keyword ipv4acl and then the number of FP blocks for IPv4 ACL. The range is from 0 to 8. ipv6acl number Enter the keyword ipv6acl and then the number of FP blocks for IPv6 ACL.
PAGE 458
Iscsioptacl number Enter the keyword iscsioptacl and then the number of FP blocks for iSCSI optimization ACL. The range is from 0 to 2. vrfv4acl number Enter the keyword vrfv4acl and then the number of FP blocks for VRF IPv4 ACL. The range is from 0 to 2. ipv4mirracl Enter the ipv4mirracl keyword and then the number of FP blocks for IPv4 mirror ACL. The range is from 0 to 8. You cannot use the ipv4mirracl and ipv4udfmirracl commands at the same time.
PAGE 459
There can be only one odd number of Blocks in the CLI configuration; the other Blocks must be in factors of 2. For example, a CLI configuration of 5+4+2+1+1 Blocks is not supported; a configuration of 6+4+2+1 Blocks is supported. If allocation values are not entered for the CAM regions, the value is 0. If you enable BMP, to perform a reload on the chassis to upgrade any configuration changes that have changed the NVRAM content, use the command reload conditional nvram-cfg-change.
PAGE 460
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 461
Supported Modes Command History Usage Information Example Version Description 9.14.1.0 Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13.0.0 Introduced on the MXL, FN IOM, S5000, S4048-ON, S6000, S6000-ON, S3048ON, S3100 Series, C9010, S4048T-ON, Z9500, Z9100-ON, S6100-ON, S6010-ON. The no cam-threshold command will set the CAM threshold to 90 percent and silence period to 0.
PAGE 462
Example DellEMC# show cam-acl -- Chassis Cam ACL -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 -- stack-unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 F
PAGE 463
L2Acl : Ipv4Acl : Ipv6Acl : Ipv4Qos : L2Qos : L2PT : IpMacAcl : VmanQos : EcfmAcl : FcoeAcl : iscsiOptAcl : ipv4pbr : vrfv4Acl : Openflow : fedgovacl : nlbclusteracl: 2 4 4 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- stack-unit 1 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 4 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 -- stack-unit 3 -Current Settings(in blo
PAGE 464
Ipv4Qos* : L2Qos : L2PT : IpMacAcl : VmanQos : EcfmAcl : EtsAcl : FcoeAcl : iscsiOptAcl : ipv4pbr : vrfv4Acl : Openflow : fedgovacl : nlbclusteracl : ipv4udfmirracl: ipv4mirracl : * - shared regions 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 show cam-usage Display the amount of memory space used and available in each CAM partition (including Layer 2 ACL, Layer 3 ACL, and IPv4Flow) Syntax show cam-usage [acl | router | switch] Parameters Defaults acl (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword acl to display Layer 2 and Layer
PAGE 465
Table 3.
PAGE 466
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 467
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. The CoPP filters prevent traffic that is not identified as legitimate from reaching the control plane, and rate-limit traffic to an acceptable level.
PAGE 468
ip unknown-unicast Enable IPv4 catch-all route. S4820T Syntax ip unknown-unicast [vrf vrf-name] To remove the IPv4 catch-all route (0.0.0.0/0) from the LPM route forwarding table in hardware which gets added as a default configuration after the initialization of FIB Agent module, use the no ip unknown-unicast command. Defaults Parameters None vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable catch-all routes corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 469
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000.
PAGE 470
For CoPP, use the keyword cpu-qos when creating qos-policy-input. Related Commands ● qos-policy-input — create a QoS input policy map. ● policy-map-input — create an input policy map. service-policy rate-limit-protocols Apply a policy for the system to rate limit control protocols on a per-protocol basis. S4820T Syntax service-policy rate-limit-protocols policy-name Parameters Defaults policy-name Enter the service-policy name, using a string up to 32 characters. Not configured.
PAGE 471
show cpu-queue rate cp Display the rates for each CPU queue. S4820T Syntax show cpu-queue rate cp Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 472
show ip protocol-queue-mapping Display the queue mapping for each configured protocol. Syntax show ip protocol-queue-mapping Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(3.0) Modified the output to display MCAST data packet information. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.
PAGE 473
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(3.0) Modified the output to display MCAST data packet information. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 474
Example 474 Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 475
12 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of IEEE Ethernet enhancements that provide data centers with a single, robust, converged network to support multiple traffic types, including local area network (LAN), server, and storage traffic. The Dell EMC Networking OS commands for data center bridging features include 802.1Qbb priority-based flow control (PFC), 802.1Qaz enhanced transmission selection (ETS), and the data center bridging exchange (DCBX) protocol.
PAGE 476
Parameters Defaults pfc-queues Enter the pfc-queue range. To disable DCB, use the no dcb enable command. The range is from 1 to 4. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON.
PAGE 477
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 478
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. NOTE: Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9.4.(0.0) release. A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb-map commands in the future.
PAGE 479
dot1p Value in Description heading the Incoming Frame 0 1 1 0 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 ● Before configuring the port queues to function as no-drop queues, you must first apply the dcb-map map with pfc mode off. To apply the dcb-map with pfc mode off, use the following commands: dcb-map pfcoff and no pfc mode on. show dcb Displays the data center bridging status, the number of PFC-enabled ports, and the number of PFC-enabled queues.
PAGE 480
show interface pfc Displays the PFC configuration applied to ingress traffic on an interface, including priorities and link delay. Syntax show interface port-type slot/port[] pfc {summary | statistics | detail | buffer-threshold} Parameters port-type slot/ port[] pfc Enter the port-type slot and port PFC information. {summary | statistics | detail | bufferthreshold} Enter the keyword summary for a summary list of results or enter the keyword detail for a full list of results.
PAGE 481
Field Description from peers; received PFC configuration take effect. The admin operational status for a DCBX exchange of PFC configuration is enabled or disabled. Remote is enabled, Priority list Remote Willing Status is enabled Operational status (enabled or disabled) of peer device for DCBX exchange of PFC configuration with a list of the configured PFC priorities. Willing status of peer device for DCBX exchange (Willing bit received in PFC TLV): enabled or disable.
PAGE 482
Example (Summary) Field Description PFC TLV Statistics: Error pkts Number of PFC error packets received. PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Tx pkts Number of PFC pause frames transmitted. PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Rx pkts Number of PFC pause frames received.
PAGE 483
NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. However, for Open Networking (ON) platforms the notation for specifying port range in the command is different from how you specify in non-ON platforms. ● For non-ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port-range. For example, if you want to display information corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interface-type 1/1 - 4.
PAGE 484
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example (Summary) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 485
Usage Information By default, equal bandwidth is assigned to each port queue and each dot1p priority in a priority group. To configure bandwidth amounts in associated dot1p queues, use the bandwidth-percentage command. When specified bandwidth is assigned to some port queues and not to others, the remaining bandwidth (100% minus assigned bandwidth amount) is equally distributed to unassigned non-strict priority queues in the priority group.
PAGE 486
Parameters Defaults pfc-queues Enter the pfc-queue range. To disable DCB, use the no dcb enable command. The range is from 1 to 4. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON.
PAGE 487
priority-list Configure the 802.1p priorities for the traffic on which you want to apply an ETS output policy. Syntax priority-list value To remove the priority list, use the no priority-list command. Parameters Defaults value Enter the priority list value. Separate priority values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example, priority-list 3,5-7. The range is from 0 to 7. None Command Modes PRIORITY-GROUP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 488
The maximum number of priority groups supported in ETS output policies on an interface is equal to the number of data queues (4) on the port. The 802.1p priorities in a priority group can map to multiple queues. If you configure more than one priority queue as strict priority or more than one priority group as strict priority, the higher numbered priority queue is given preference when scheduling data traffic.
PAGE 489
set-pgid Configure the priority-group identifier. Syntax set-pgid value To remove the priority group, use the no set-pgid command. Parameters Defaults value Enter the priority group identification. The range is from 0 to 7. none Command Modes PRIORITY-GROUP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 490
The configuration of bandwidth allocation and strict-queue scheduling is not supported at the same time for a priority group. If you configure both, the configured bandwidth allocation is ignored for prioritygroup traffic when you apply the output policy on an interface. If you enable this command for a QoS ETS output policy, no bandwidth percentage is assigned to the policy. Related Commands ● qos-policy-output ets — configure the ETS bandwidth allocation.
PAGE 491
Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/3 Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 8 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters : -----------------Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 1 0,1,2 100% ETS 2 3 0 % SP 3 4,5,6,7 0 % SP 4 5 6 7 Remote Parameters : ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 1 0,1,2 100% ETS 2 3 0 % S
PAGE 492
Remote is disabled Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 1 0,1,2 100% ETS 2 3 0 % SP 3 4,5,6,7 0 % SP 4 5 6 7 Oper status is init ETS DCBX Oper status is Down State Machine Type is Asymmetric Conf TLV Tx Status is enabled Reco TLV Tx Status is enabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 1955 Output Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts 0 Input Reco TLV Pkts, 1955 Output Reco TLV Pkts, 0 Error Reco TLV Pkts DellEMC# show interfa
PAGE 493
4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts 0T LIVnput Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Traffic Class Pkts Example (Detail) DellEMC(conf)# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 1/1 ets detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 8 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters : -----
PAGE 494
0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Traffic Class TLV Pkts show qos priority-groups Displays the ETS priority groups configured on the switch, including the 802.1p priority classes and ID of each group. Syntax show qos priority-groups Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example (Summary) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 8.
PAGE 495
Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - Stack unit 2 stack port all Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 1 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters: -------------------Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 - DCBX Commands The following DCBX commands are supported on the Dell EMC Net
PAGE 496
advertise dcbx-appln-tlv On a DCBX port with a manual role, configure the application priority TLVs advertised on the interface to DCBX peers. Syntax advertise dcbx-appln-tlv {fcoe | iscsi} To remove the application priority TLVs, use the no advertise dcbx-appln-tlv {fcoe | iscsi} command. Parameters Defaults {fcoe | iscsi} Enter the application priority TLVs, where: ● fcoe: enables the advertisement of FCoE in application priority TLVs.
PAGE 497
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You can configure the transmission of more than one TLV type at a time; for example: advertise dcbx-tlv ets-conf ets-reco. You can enable ETS recommend TLVs (ets-reco) only if you enable ETS configuration TLVs (etsconf).
PAGE 498
Usage Information DCBX requires that you enable LLDP to advertise DCBX TLVs to peers. Configure DCBX operation at the INTERFACE level on a switch or globally on the switch. To verify the DCBX configuration on a port, use the show interface dcbx detail command. If you use the auto-upstream option and the port does not come up on a switch from a different vendor, manually configure the version a CEE on the peer device. dcbx version Configure the DCBX version used on the interface.
PAGE 499
To disable DCBX debugging, use the no debug dcbx command. Parameters Defaults {all | autodetect-timer | config-exchng | fail | mgmt | resource | sem | tlv} Enter the type of debugging, where: ● all: enables all DCBX debugging operations. ● auto-detect-timer: enables traces for DCBX auto-detect timers. ● config-exchng: enables traces for DCBX configuration exchanges. ● fail: enables traces for DCBX failures. ● mgmt: enables traces for DCBX management frames.
PAGE 500
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command is available at the global level only. iscsi priority-bits Configure the iSCSI priority advertised for the iSCSI protocol in application priority TLVs. Syntax iscsi priority-bits priority-bitmap To remove the configured iSCSI priority, use the no iscsi priority-bits command.
PAGE 501
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.9(0.0) Added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON.
PAGE 502
Field Description Local DCBX Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs. Status: Sequence Number Local DCBX Acknowledgement number transmitted in Control TLVs. Status: Acknowledgment Number Local DCBX Status: Protocol State Current operational state of the DCBX protocol: ACK or IN-SYNC. Peer DCBX Status: DCBX Operational Version DCBX version advertised in Control TLVs received from the peer device.
PAGE 503
Peer Operating version is CEE Local DCBX TLVs Transmitted: ErPfi Local DCBX Status ----------------DCBX Operational Version is 0 DCBX Max Version Supported is 0 Sequence Number: 2 Acknowledgment Number: 2 Protocol State: In-Sync Peer DCBX Status: ---------------DCBX Operational Version is 0 DCBX Max Version Supported is 255 Sequence Number: 2 Acknowledgment Number: 2 Total DCBX Frames transmitted 27 Total DCBX Frames received 6 Total DCBX Frame errors 0 Total DCBX Frames unrecognized 0 dcb-map Create a DCB
PAGE 504
You can enable or disable pfc mode on the DCB mode using the pfc mode on or pfc mode off command. priority-pgid Assign 802.1p priority traffic to a priority group in a DCB map. Syntax priority-pgid dot1p0_group-num dot1p1_group-num dot1p2_group-num dot1p3_group-num dot1p4_group-num dot1p5_group-num dot1p6_group-num dot1p7_group-num Parameters Defaults dot1p0–7_group- Enter the priority group number for each 802.1p class of traffic in a DCB map.
PAGE 505
Command Modes DCB MAP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module. By applying a DCB input policy with PFC enabled, you enable PFC operation on ingress port traffic.
PAGE 506
Usage Information Version Description 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S6000 platforms. Use the dcb-map command to configure priority groups with PFC and/or ETS settings and apply them to Ethernet interfaces. Use the priority-pgid command to map 802.1p priorities to a priority group. You can assign each 802.1p priority to only one priority group. A priority group consists of 802.
PAGE 507
show qos dcb-map Display the DCB parameters configured in a specified DCB map. Syntax Parameters show qos dcb-map map-name map-name Displays the PFC and ETS parameters configured in the specified map. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.3(0.
PAGE 508
dcb pfc-shared-buffer-size Configure the maximum amount of shared buffer size for PFC packets in kilobytes. Syntax dcb pfc-shared—buffer—size buffer-size Parameters Default buffer-size Enter a number in the range of 0 to 7787. The default is 832KB. Command Modes CONFIGURATION mode Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(2.
PAGE 509
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.6(0.0) Introduced on the S5000. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, and S6000. Usage Information When you enter the profile name, you enter the DCB buffer threshold configuration mode.
PAGE 510
size Weightage of the priorities on the shared buffer size in the system. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 9. The default shared threshold weight is 10. Command Modes DCB-BUFFER-THRESHOLD mode Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(2.
PAGE 511
value Enter a number in the range of 0 to 7 to denote the priority to be allocated to the dynamic buffer control mechanism buffer-size Ingress buffer size size Size of the ingress buffer in KB. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 7787. The default is 45 KB. pause-threshold Buffer limit for pause frames to be sent threshold-value Buffer limit at which the port sends the pause to peer in KB. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 7787. The default is 10 KB.
PAGE 512
dcb-policy buffer-threshold (Interface Configuration) Assign the DCB policy to the DCB buffer threshold profile on interfaces. This setting takes precedence over the global buffer-threshold setting. Syntax dcb-policy buffer-threshold profile-name Parameters Default buffer-threshold Configure the profile name for the DCB buffer threshold profile-name Enter the name of the profile, which can be a string of up to 32 characters in length.
PAGE 513
Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S6000 and the S6000–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.6(0.0) Introduced on the S5000. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T platforms. Usage Information You can configure up to a maximum of four lossless (PFC) queues. By configuring four lossless queues, you can configure four different priorities and assign a particular priority to each application that your network is used to process.
PAGE 514
dcb pfc-total-buffer-size Configure the total buffer size for PFC in kilobytes. Syntax dcb pfc-total—buffer—size buffer-size Parameters Default buffer-size Enter a number in the range of 0 to 7787. The default is 6592KB. Command Modes CONFIGURATION mode Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(2.
PAGE 515
show running-config dcb-buffer-threshold Displays the DCB buffer threshold details in the running configuration. Syntax show running—config dcb-buffer-threshold Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.
PAGE 516
7 - No Denotes dynamic buffering is enabled in respective queues - On interface in which PFC is not enabled: DellEMC#show interface tengigabitethernet 1/20 pfc buffer-threshold The following table describes the output fields displayed for the show interface pfc bufferthreshold command: Field Description queue Number of the queue lossless Whether the queue is a lossy or lossless queue for which buffer threshold is configured buffer-size Ingress buffer size pause-threshold- Buffer limit at which t
PAGE 517
Usage Information Example You can configure all the data queues. You can configure queues 0-7. The following table describes the mapping between the threshold weight of the shared buffer on the queue. It also shows the percentage of the available shared buffer used by the queues for each of the corresponding threshold weights of the shared buffer: sharedthresholdweight on the queue % of available shared buffer that can be consumed by the queue 0 No dynamic sharing; shared buffer = 0. 1 0.77% 2 1.
PAGE 518
Example DellEMC(conf)# dcb pfc-queues 4 dcb {ets | pfc} enable Enable priority flow control or enhanced transmission selection on interface. Syntax dcb {ets | pfc} enable ● To disable ETS on interface, use “no dcb ets enable” command. ● To disable PFC on interface, use “no dcb pfc enable” command. Defaults Enable Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 519
13 Debugging and Diagnostics The basic debugging and diagnostic commands are supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • • Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands Offline Diagnostic Commands Hardware Commands Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands The following section describes the diagnostics and monitoring commands. For similar commands, refer to the Control and Monitoring chapter. logging coredump stack-unit Enable coredump on a stack.
PAGE 520
is not reachable, the application coredump is aborted. Dell EMC Networking OS completes the coredump process and wait until the upload is complete before rebooting the system. Offline Diagnostic Commands The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. While tests are running, Dell EMC Networking OS results are saved as a text file (TestReport-SU-X.txt) in the flash directory. This show file command is available only on master and standby.
PAGE 521
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 522
Usage Information Version Description 8.2.1.0 Added a warning message to the off-line diagnostic. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. You cannot enter this command on a Master or Standby unit. The system reboots when the off-line diagnostics complete. This reboot is an automatic process. A warning message appears when the offline stack-unit command is implemented. Warning - Diagnostic execution will cause stack-unit to reboot after completion of diags.
PAGE 523
Related Commands ● show environment (S-Series) — view the S-Series system component status (for example, temperature, voltage). Hardware Commands These commands display information from a hardware sub-component or ASIC. clear hardware stack-unit Clear statistics from selected hardware components.
PAGE 524
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. ● show hardware stack-unit — display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member. clear hardware system-flow Clear system-flow statistics from selected hardware components.
PAGE 525
Parameters Defaults vlan-id Enter the interface VLAN number. The range is from 1 to 4094. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 526
show hardware mac Display MAC ACL entries for the specified stack-unit, port-pipe and pipeline ID. Syntax show hardware mac {eg-acl | in-acl} stack-unit id port-set 0–0 Parameters Defaults eg-acl | in-acl Enter either the keyword eg-acl or the keyword in-acl to select between ingress or egress ACL data. stack- unit id Enter the keyword stack-unit to select the stack unit ID.
PAGE 527
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 528
Defaults drops [unit unitnumber ] Enter the keyword drops to display internal drops on the selected stack member. Enter the optional keyword unit unit-number to display the internal drop counters of the specified port pipe. fpga register Enter the keyword to display the register value of the fpga register.
PAGE 529
0 Multicasts, 3 Broadcasts, 322 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec Output 00.
PAGE 530
0x0060a04c ASFPORTSPEED.ge10 = 0x00000000 0x0060b04c ASFPORTSPEED.ge11 = 0x00000000 0x0060c04c ASFPORTSPEED.ge12 = 0x00000000 0x0060d04c ASFPORTSPEED.ge13 = 0x00000000 0x0060e04c ASFPORTSPEED.ge14 = 0x00000000 0x0060f04c ASFPORTSPEED.ge15 = 0x00000000 0x0061004c ASFPORTSPEED.ge16 = 0x00000000 0x0061104c ASFPORTSPEED.ge17 = 0x00000000 0x0061204c ASFPORTSPEED.ge18 = 0x00000000 0x0061304c ASFPORTSPEED.ge19 = 0x00000000 0x0061404c ASFPORTSPEED.ge20 = 0x00000000 0x0061504c ASFPORTSPEED.
PAGE 531
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - Unicast Packet Counter 64 Byte Frame Counter 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Fra
PAGE 532
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority Debug Counter 0 Debug Counter 1 Debug Counter 2 Debug Counter 3 Debug Counter 4 Debug Counter 5 Debug Counter 6 Debug Counter 7 Debug Counter 8 Debug Counter 9 Debug Counter 10 Debug Counter 11 3 4 5 6 7 --------------------unit: 0 port: 61 (interface Fo 1/60) Description RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX
PAGE 533
RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX Example (Details) - Debug Counter 6 Debug Counter 7 Debug Counter 8 64 Byte Frame Counter 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4096 to 9216 Byte Fra
PAGE 534
****************************************************** Link Status of all the ports in the Device - 1 The linkStatus of Front End Port 0 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 1 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 2 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 3 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 4 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 5 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 6 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 7 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 8 is FALSE The linkStatus
PAGE 535
Related Commands ● clear hardware system-flow — clear the statistics from selected hardware components. ● show interfaces stack-unit — display information on all interfaces on a specific S-Series stack member. ● show processes cpu (S-Series) — display the CPU usage information based on the processes running in an S-Series. ● show system — display the current status of all the stack members or a specific member. show hardware buffer interface Display buffer statistics for a specific interface.
PAGE 536
Example displaying queue range DellEMC# show hardware buffer interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 queue all buffer-info ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Te 1/1 Queue 0 ----Maximum Shared Limit: 29514 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: 8 Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Te 1/1 Queue 1 ----Maximum Shared Limit: 29514 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: 8 Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Te 1/1 Queue 2 ----Maximum Shared Limit: 29514 Default Packet
PAGE 537
interface interface Enter any of the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. queue Enter the keyword queue followed by all for displaying details of all queues, ucast queue-id or all for displaying Unicast queue details, and mcast queue-id or all for displaying Multicast queue details.
PAGE 538
MCAST MCAST Example displaying egress queue-level snapshot for unicast packets for the specific interface 7 8 0 0 DellEMC# show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource interface fortyGigE 0/0 queue ucast 10 Unit 0 unit: 0 port: 1 (interface Fo 0/0) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------UCAST 10 0 DellEMC# show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource interface fortyGigE 0/0 queue ucast all Unit 0 unit: 0 port: 1 (interface Fo 0/0) -----
PAGE 539
fortyGigE 0/0 priority-group all Unit 0 unit: 0 port: 1 (interface Fo 0/0) --------------------------------------PG# SHARED CELLS HEADROOM CELLS --------------------------------------0 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 show hardware counters interface Display the counter information for a specific interface. Syntax Parameters show hardware counters interface interface counters Enter the keywords counters to display counter value for the specified stackmember the port-pipe.
PAGE 540
RX - 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter RX - 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter RX - 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter RX - 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter RX - 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter RX - 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter RX - 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter RX - 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter RX - Good Packet Counter RX - Packet/Frame Counter RX - Unicast Frame Counter RX - Multicast Frame Counter RX - Broadcast Frame Counter RX - Byte Counter RX - Control Frame Counter RX - Pause Control Frame Count
PAGE 541
Version Description 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.11(0.0) Included the FEC BER details in the output for 100G interfaces of S6100–ON and Z9100–ON . Included FCS Error Ratio in the output for all interfaces of S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. Example displaying internal drops 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 542
HOL DROPS on COS9 HOL DROPS on COS10 HOL DROPS on COS11 HOL DROPS on COS12 HOL DROPS on COS13 HOL DROPS on COS14 HOL DROPS on COS15 HOL DROPS on COS16 HOL DROPS on COS17 TxPurge CellErr Aged Drops --- Egress MAC counters--Egress FCS Drops --- Egress FORWARD PROCESSOR IPv4 L3UC Aged & Drops TTL Threshold Drops INVALID VLAN CNTR Drops L2MC Drops PKT Drops of ANY Conditions Hg MacUnderflow TX Err PKT Counter --- Error counters--Internal Mac Transmit Errors Unknown Opcodes Internal Mac Receive Errors : : : : :
PAGE 543
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Added the keyword interface all. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.6(0.0) Introduced on the S5000. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S6000, S4810, and S4820T.
PAGE 544
Example Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 545
, FPF4=0x00 MASK=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 ffffffff ffff0000 00000000 00000000 , 0x00 action={act=Drop, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=CosQCpuNew, param0=7(0x07), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=UpdateCounter, param0=1(0x01), param1=0(0x00)}, meter=NULL, counter={idx=2, mode=0x01, entries=1} ################# FP Entry for redirecting GVRP traffic to RSM ########### EID 2044: gid=1, slice=15, slice_idx=0x03, prio=0x7fc, flags=0x82, Install
PAGE 546
Example Related Commands 546 Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced this command. DellEMC# show hardware vlan-counters 1 Counters for vlanid: 1 -----------------------Total number of inpackets: 0 Total number of inbytes: 0 Total number of outpackets: 0 Total number of outbytes: 0 DellEMC# ● clear hardware system-flow — clear the statistics from selected hardware components.
PAGE 547
14 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on the configuration policies the network administrators determine.
PAGE 548
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Press Enter after the clear ip dhcp binding command clears all the IPs from the binding table.
PAGE 549
debug ipv6 dhcp To enable debug logs for DHCPv6 relay agent transactions. Syntax debug ipv6 dhcp To disable the debug logs for dhcpv6 relay agent transactions, use the debug ipv6 dhcp command. Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 550
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. disable Disable the DHCP server. S4820T Syntax disable DHCP Server is disabled by default. To enable the system to be a DHCP server, use the no disable command.
PAGE 551
dns-server Assign a DNS server to clients based on address pool. S4820T Syntax Parameters Defaults dns-server address [address2...address8] address Enter a list of DNS servers that may service clients on the subnet. You may list up to eight servers, in order of preference. None Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 552
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 553
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. hardware-address For manual configurations, specify the client hardware address. S4820T Syntax Parameters Defaults hardware-address address address Enter the hardware address of the client. None Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 554
Command Modes DHCP-POOL Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14.1.3 This command replaces host command. Introduced on S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, S6000, S4810, S4820T, S5048F-ON, MXL, FN-IOM, and C9010. When you upgrade the Dell EMC Networking OS from an earlier version to 9.14.1.
PAGE 555
lease Specify a lease time for the addresses in a pool. S4820T Syntax Parameters Defaults lease {days [hours] [minutes] | infinite} days Enter the number of days of the lease. The range is from 0 to 31. hours Enter the number of hours of the lease. The range is from 0 to 23. minutes Enter the number of minutes of the lease. The range is from 0 to 59. infinite Specify that the lease never expires. 24 hours Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 556
Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 557
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. network Specify the range of addresses in an address pool. S4820T Syntax Parameters Defaults network network /prefix-length network/ prefixlength Specify a range of addresses.
PAGE 558
pool Create an address pool. S4820T Syntax pool name Parameters Defaults name Enter the address pool’s identifying name. None Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 559
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
PAGE 560
Example Version Description 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. DellEMC# show ip dhcp configuration global Protocol status : Enabled Number of ping packets : 1 DellEMC# DellEMC# show ip dhcp configuration Pool Name Pool Type Domain Name Lease Time DNS Servers Default Routers Network : : : : : : : pool p1 p1 Dynamic dell.com 2Days 0Hrs 0Mins 10.11.0.1 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 show ip dhcp conflict Display the address conflict log.
PAGE 561
show ip dhcp server Display the DHCP server statistics. S4820T Syntax show ip dhcp server statistics Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series.
PAGE 562
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 563
Defaults Disabled Command Modes ● INTERFACE ● INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 564
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.6(0.0) Added the keywords discard-counters, interface, and the variable interface on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, Z9000, Z9500. 9.2(1.
PAGE 565
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. DellEMC# clear ipv6 dhcp snooping? binding Clear the snooping binding database ip dhcp relay Enable Option 82.
PAGE 566
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ip dhcp snooping Enable DHCP snooping globally.
PAGE 567
Introduced in Dell EMC Networking OS version 7.8.1.0, DHCP snooping was available for Layer 3 only and dependent on DHCP Relay Agent (ip helper-address). Dell EMC Networking OS version 8.2.1.0 extends DHCP Snooping to Layer 2. You do not have to enable relay agent to snoop on Layer 2 interfaces. ipv6 dhcp snooping Enable DHCPv6 snooping globally for ipv6. Syntax [no] ipv6 dhcp snooping To disable the snooping globally, use the no ipv6 dhcp snooping command.
PAGE 568
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. ip dhcp snooping binding Create a static entry in the DHCP binding table. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ip ip-address interface interface-type lease number Parameters Defaults mac address Enter the keyword mac then the MAC address of the host to which the server is leasing the IP address.
PAGE 569
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Usage Instructions You can map multiple IP addresses to the same MAC address. Related Commands ● show ip dhcp snooping — display the contents of the DHCP binding table.
PAGE 570
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. ip dhcp snooping database Delay writing the binding table for a specified time. S4820T Syntax ip dhcp snooping database write-delay minutes Parameters Defaults minutes The range is from 5 to 21600. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 571
Parameters Defaults value The range is from 5 to 21600. The value of the minutes range is from 5 min. to 15 days. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 572
Version Description 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ipv6 dhcp snooping database renew To load the binding entries from the file to DHCPv6 snooping binding database. Syntax ipv6 dhcp snooping database renew Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 573
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ipv6 dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted for DHCP snooping.
PAGE 574
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.6(0.0) Added the vlan keyword and the vlan-id variable . Introduced support for SAV on port channels interfaces. 9.2(1.
PAGE 575
vpn Default Enter the keyword vpn to add VPN/VRF related sub-option to relay agent information Option 82. NOTE: Adds the VPN/VRF related sub-options into the relay agent information option(82). When DHCP broadcasts are forwarded by the relay agent from clients to DHCP server. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 576
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet information, enter the keyword FortyGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a Tunnel interface, enter the keyword tunnel then the tunnel ID. The range is from 1 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter thee keyword port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 577
Command Modes ● CONFIGURATION ● INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the C9010, MXL, FN IOM, S3100 series, S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F-ON, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. ● ip dhcp relay source-interface— Configure DHCP relay source IP interface.
PAGE 578
To disable verify source mac-address against IPv6 DHCP packet MAC address, use the no ipv6 dhcp snooping verify mac-address command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.
PAGE 579
Example DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/12)# ip helper-address vrf jay 10.0.0.2 ipv6 helper-address Configures the IPv6 DHCP helper addresses. Syntax [no] ipv6 helper-address [vrf vrf-name] ipv6-address To delete the IPv6 helper address, use the [no] ipv6 helper-address [vrf vrf-name] ipv6-address command. Parameters Default vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF through which the host address can be reached.
PAGE 580
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000 and Z-Series. Dell(conf)# ip dhcp relay secondary-subnet show ip dhcp snooping Display the contents of the DHCP binding table or display the interfaces configured with IP Source Guard.
PAGE 581
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. The following example displays the interfaces configured with IP Source Guard: DellEMC> show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation ip sav access-list on TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 Total cam count 3 permit host 0.0.0.
PAGE 582
The following example displays the SAV discard counters on a particular interface: DellEMC> show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation discardcounters interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 deny access-list on TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 Total cam count 2 deny vlan 10 count (0 packets) deny vlan 20 count (0 packets) The following example displays the SAV discard counters on a port channel interface: DellEMC> show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation discardcounters interface portchannel 10 deny access-list
PAGE 583
DHCP Binding File Details Invalid File Invalid Binding Entry Binding Entry lease expired : 0 : 0 : 0 DellEMC# Commands to Configure DNS To configure the Domain Names Systems (DNS) on the system, use the following commands: ip name-server Configures one or more name server (DNS) IP addresses. You can configure up to six IP addresses.
PAGE 584
ip domain-name Configures the default domain corresponding to a specific VRF. This domain is appended to the in complete DNS requests corresponding to the specified VRF. S4820T Syntax ip domain-name [vrf vrf-name] name To undo the domain name configuration corresponding to a specific VRF, use the no ip domain-name [vrf vrf-name] name command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the key word vrf and then the name of the VRF to configure the domain corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 585
Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the key word vrf and then the name of the VRF to add a domain name to the DNS list corresponding to that VRF. name Enter the name of the domain to be appended to the DNS list corresponding to the VRF. None Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 586
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series.
PAGE 587
15 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) Equal cost multi-path (ECMP) supports multiple "best paths" in next-hop packet forwarding to a destination device. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • ecmp-group hash-algorithm hash-algorithm ecmp hash-algorithm seed ip ecmp-group ip ecmp weighted link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold link-bundle-monitor enable show config show link-bundle distribution ecmp-group Provides a mechanism to monitor traffic distribution on an ECMP link bundle.
PAGE 588
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. Using CONFIGURATION mode, create an ECMP group ID.
PAGE 589
● xor4: Use CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR4 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor4 ● xor8: Use CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR8 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor8 ● xor16: Use CR16 — 16 bit XOR hg { crc16 | crc16cc | Enter the keyword hg then one of the following options available in the stack-unit and linecard provisioned devices: crc32MSB | ● crc16: Use CRC16_BISYNC — 16 bit CRC16-bisync polynomial (default) crc32LSB | xor1 | ● crc16cc: Use CRC16_CCITT — 16 bit CRC16 using CRC16-CCITT po
PAGE 590
Usage Information Version Description 9.9(0.0) Added flow-based-hashing support for hashing on ECMP for S4820T, S6000, S4048 and Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.
PAGE 591
hash-algorithm ecmp Change the hash algorithm used to distribute traffic flows across an ECMP (equal-cost multipath routing) group. S4820T Term heading Description heading Syntax hash-algorithm ecmp {crc-upper} | {dest-ip} | {lsb} To return to the default hash algorithm, use the no hash-algorithm ecmp command. Parameters Defaults crc-upper Uses the upper 32 bits of the key for the hash computation. The default is crclower. dest-ip Uses the destination IP for ECMP hashing. The default is enabled.
PAGE 592
Parameters Defaults seed value Enter the keyword seed then the seed value. The range is from 0 to 2,147,483,646. stack–unit slot/ port Enter the keyword stack-unit then the slot/port number. port-set number Enter the keyword port-set then the port-pipe number. The value is 0. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 593
path-fallback Defaults Use the keywords path-fallback to enable this feature. If you enable the feature, re-enter this keyword to disable the feature. 16 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.
PAGE 594
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series. Enabling this CLI would inform the FIB to re-program the destination prefix paths with weights in the HW/CAM on the fly. If disabled, the CLI would inform the FIB to re-program the destination prefix paths with no weights or regular ECMP.
PAGE 595
link-bundle-monitor enable Provides a mechanism to enable monitoring of traffic distribution on an ECMP link bundle. S4820T Syntax link-bundle-monitor enable To exit from ECMP group mode, use the exit command. Command Modes ● ECMP-GROUP ● PORT-CHANNEL INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.
PAGE 596
Related Commands ● show running-config ecmp-group — display interfaces, LAG, or LAG link bundles being monitored for uneven traffic distribution. show link-bundle distribution Display the link-bundle distribution for the interfaces in the bundle, type of bundle (LAG or ECMP), and the most recently calculated interface utilization (either bytes per second rate or maximum rate) for each interface.
PAGE 597
16 FIPS Cryptography To configure federal information processing standards (FIPS) cryptography, use the following commands: Topics: • • • • fips mode enable show fips status show ip ssh ssh fips mode enable Enable the FIPS cryptography mode on the platform. Syntax [no] fips mode enable To disable the FIPS cryptography mode, use the no fips mode enable command. Default Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 598
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 599
Password Authentication : enabled. Hostbased Authentication : disabled. RSA Authentication : disabled. Vty Encryption HMAC Remote IP With FIPS Mode enabled: DellEMC# show ip ssh SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v2. SSH server vrf : default. SSH server ciphers : 3des-cbc,aes128-cbc,aes192-cbc,aes256cbc,aes128-ctr,aes192-ctr,aes256-ctr. SSH server macs : hmac-sha1-96. SSH server kex algorithms : diffie-hellman-group14-sha1. Password Authentication : enabled. Hostbased Authentication : disabled.
PAGE 600
● aes128–ctr: Force ssh to use the aes256–cbc encryption cipher. ● aes128–cbc: Force ssh to use the aes128–cbc encryption cipher. ● 3des-cbc: Force ssh to use 3des-cbc encryption cipher. -l username (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword —l then the user name used in this SSH session. The default is the user name of the user associated with the terminal. -m HMAC algorithm Enter one of the following HMAC algorithms to use. (For v2 clients only.
PAGE 601
Example If FIPS mode is not enabled: DellEMC# ssh 10.10.10.10 ? -c Encryption cipher to use (for v2 clients only) -l User name option -m HMAC algorithm to use (for v2 clients only) -p SSH server port option (default 22) -v SSH protocol version DellEMC# ssh 10.10.10.
PAGE 602
17 FIP Snooping In a converged Ethernet network, a switch can operate as an intermediate Ethernet bridge to snoop on FIP packets during the login process on Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) forwarders (FCFs). Acting as a transit FIP snooping bridge, the switch uses dynamically created access control lists (ACLs) to permit only authorized FCoE traffic to transmit between an FCoE end-device and an FCF.
PAGE 603
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. clear fip-snooping statistics Clears the statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all VLANs, a specified VLAN, or a specified port interface.
PAGE 604
Parameters all Enter the keyword all to enable debugging on all the options. acl Enter the keyword acl for ACL-specific debugging. error Enter the keyword error for error-specific debugging. ifm Enter the keyword ifm for IFM-specific debugging. info Enter the keyword info for information-specific debugging. ipc Enter the keyword ipc for IPC-specific debugging. ns Enter the keyword ns for name-server-specific debugging. rscn Enter the keyword rscn for RSCN-specific debugging.
PAGE 605
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 606
DellEMC(conf)#cam-acl l2acl 2 ipv4acl 0 ipv6acl 0 ipv4qos 2 l2qos 0 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vman-qos 0 fcoeacl 2 etsacl 1 iscsi 2 DellEMC(conf)#feature fip-snooping fip-snooping enable Enable FIP snooping on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. S4820T Syntax fip-snooping enable To disable the FIP snooping feature on all or a specified VLAN, use the no fip-snooping enable command. Defaults FIP snooping is disabled on all VLANs.
PAGE 607
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 608
Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 609
show fip-snooping config Display the FIP snooping status and configured FC-MAP values. S4820T Syntax show fip-snooping config Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 610
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. The following describes the show fip-snooping enode command shown in the following example. Field Description ENode MAC MAC address of the ENode.
PAGE 611
Usage Information The following describes the show fip-snooping fcf command shown in the following example. Field Description FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF. FCF Interface Slot/port number of the interface to which the FCF is connected. VLAN VLAN ID number the session uses. FC-MAP FC-Map value the FCF advertises. ENode Interface Slot/ number of the interface connected to the ENode. FKA_ADV_PERIO Time (in milliseconds) during which FIP keep-alive advertisements transmit.
PAGE 612
Field Description Number of VLAN Requests Number of FIP-snoop VLAN request frames received on the interface. Number of VLAN Notifications Number of FIP-snoop VLAN notification frames received on the interface. Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits Number of FIP-snoop multicast discovery solicit frames received on the interface. Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits Number of FIP-snoop unicast discovery solicit frames received on the interface.
PAGE 613
Field Description due to Hardware Config Example DellEMC# show fip-snooping statistics interface vlan 100 Number of Vlan Requests :0 Number of Vlan Notifications :0 Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits :2 Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits :0 Number of FLOGI :2 Number of FDISC :16 Number of FLOGO :0 Number of Enode Keep Alive :9021 Number of VN Port Keep Alive :3349 Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisement :4437 Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisement :2 Number of FLOGI Accepts :2 Number of FLOG
PAGE 614
Number Number Number Number Number Number of of of of of of FLOGO Accepts :0 FLOGO Rejects :0 CVL :0 FCF Discovery Timeouts :0 VN Port Session Timeouts :0 Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 show fip-snooping system Display information on the status of FIP snooping on the switch (enabled or disabled), including the number of FCoE VLANs, FCFs, ENodes, and currently active sessions.
PAGE 615
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 616
18 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP is a proprietary protocol for that offers fast convergence in a Layer 2 network without having to run the spanning tree protocol (STP). The resilient ring protocol is an efficient protocol that transmits a high-speed token across a ring to verify the link status. All the intelligence is contained in the master node with practically no intelligence required of the transit mode. Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FRRP is media- and speed-independent.
PAGE 617
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 618
Defaults ring-id (Optional) Enter the ring identification number. The range is from 1 to 255. count number Enter the keyword count then the number of debug outputs. The range is from 1 to 65534. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON.
PAGE 619
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 620
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. interface Configure the primary, secondary, and control-vlan interfaces. S4820T Syntax interface {primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan-id} To return to the default, use the no interface {primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan-id} command.
PAGE 621
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. Usage Information This command causes the Ring Manager to take ownership of the two ports after IFM validates the configuration.
PAGE 622
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. mode Set the Master or Transit mode of the ring. S4820T Syntax mode {master | transit} To reset the mode, use the no mode {master | transit} command. Parameters Defaults master Enter the keyword master to set the Ring node to Master mode. transit Enter the keywordtransit to set the Ring node to Transit mode.
PAGE 623
protocol frrp Enter the Resilient Ring Protocol and designate a ring identification. Syntax protocol frrp {ring-id} To exit the ring protocol, use the no protocol frrp {ring-id} command. Parameters Defaults ring-id Enter the ring identification number. The range is from 1 to 255. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 624
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 625
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 626
Hello Statistics: Tx:13028 Rx:12348 Number of state Changes: 34 Member Vlans: 1000-1009 DellEMC# Example (2 Summary) DellEMC# show frrp 2 summary DellEMC#show frrp 2 summary Ring-ID State Mode Ctrl_Vlan Member_Vlans ----------------------------------------------2 Up Master 2 11-20, 25, 27-30 DellEMC# Related Commands ● protocol frrp — enter the resilient ring protocol and designate a ring identification. timer Set the hello interval or dead interval for the Ring control packets.
PAGE 627
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. The hello interval command is the interval at which ring frames are generated from the primary interface of the master node. The dead interval command is the time that elapses before a time-out occurs.
PAGE 628
19 GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) The Dell EMC Networking operating system supports the basic GVRP commands on the Dell EMC Networking OS. The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) mechanism allows the configuration of a GARP participant to propagate through a network quickly. A GARP participant registers or de-registers its attributes with other participants by making or withdrawing declarations of attributes.
PAGE 629
• • • • show show show show config garp timers gvrp gvrp statistics clear gvrp statistics Clear GVRP statistics on an interface. S4820T Syntax Parameters clear gvrp statistics interface interface interface interface Defaults Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
PAGE 630
debug gvrp Enable debugging on GVRP. S4820T Syntax debug gvrp {config | events | pdu} To disable debugging, use the no debug gvrp {config | events | pdu} command. Parameters Defaults config Enter the keyword config to enable debugging on the GVRP configuration. event Enter the keyword event to enable debugging on the JOIN/LEAVE events.
PAGE 631
disable Globally disable GVRP. S4820T Syntax disable To re-enable GVRP, use the no disable command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 632
NOTE: Designate the milliseconds in multiples of 100. leave Enter the keyword leave then the number of milliseconds to configure the leave time. The range is from 100 to 2147483647 milliseconds. The default is 600 milliseconds. NOTE: Designate the milliseconds in multiples of 100. leave-all Enter the keywords leave-all then the number of milliseconds to configure the leave-all time. The range is from 100 to 2147483647 milliseconds. The default is 1000 milliseconds.
PAGE 633
gvrp enable Enable GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs. S4820T Syntax gvrp enable To disable GVRP on the interface, use the no gvrp enable command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
PAGE 634
forbidden Defaults Enter the keyword forbidden then the VLAN range in a comma-separated VLAN ID set. normal Command Modes CONFIGURATION-INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 635
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 636
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series ● gvrp enable — enable GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs. ● protocol gvrp — access the GVRP protocol. show garp timers Display the GARP timer settings for sending GARP messages. S4820T Syntax show garp timers Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands 636 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 637
show gvrp Display the GVRP configuration. S4820T Syntax Parameters Defaults show gvrp [brief | interface] brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display a brief summary of the GVRP configuration. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
PAGE 638
Te 3/5 Disabled Te 3/6 Disabled Te 3/7 Disabled Te 3/8 Disabled DellEMC# show gvrp brief Related Commands No No No No ● show gvrp statistics — display the GVRP statistics. show gvrp statistics Display the GVRP configuration statistics.
PAGE 639
● The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid attribute length. ● The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid GARP event. ● The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid VLAN ID. The valid range is from 1 to 4095. A failed registration can occur for the following reasons: ● Join requests were received on a port that was blocked from learning dynamic VLANs (GVRP Blocking state). ● An entry for a new GVRP VLAN could not be created in the GVRP database.
PAGE 640
20 High Availability (HA) High availability (HA) in the Dell EMC Networking OS is the configuration synchronization to minimize recovery time in the event of a route processor module (RPM) failure. In general, a protocol is defined as “hitless” in the context of an RPM failure/failover and not failures of a line card, SFM, or power module. A protocol is defined as hitless if an RPM failover has no impact on the protocol. You must specifically enable some protocols for HA.
PAGE 641
Usage Information The patch filename includes the Dell EMC Networking OS version, the platform, the CPU, and the process it affects (FTOS-platform-cpu-process-patchversion.rtp). For example, a patch labeled “7.8.1.0-EH-rp2-l2mgr-1.rtp” identifies that this patch applies to Dell EMC Networking OS version 7.8.1.0 — E-Series platform, for RP2, addressing the layer 2 management process, and this patch is the first version of this patch. There is no need to reload or reboot the system when you insert the patch.
PAGE 642
redundancy disable-auto-reboot Prevent the system from auto-rebooting the failed module. S4820T Syntax redundancy disable-auto-reboot stack-unit [stack—unit ID| members} [rpm| card number | all] To return to the default, use the no redundancy disable-auto-reboot stack-unit rpm command. Parameters Default rpm Enter the keyword rpm to disable auto-reboot of the failed RPM. stack-unit Enter the keyword stack-unit then the stack-unit ID number. Disabled — the failed module is automatically rebooted.
PAGE 643
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 644
redundancy protocol Enable hitless protocols. S4820T Syntax redundancy protocol {lacp | xstp} To disable a hitless protocol, use the no redundancy protocol {lacp | xstp} command. Parameters Default lacp Enter the keyword lacp to make LACP hitless. xstp Enter the keyword xstp to invoke hitless STP (all STP modes — MSTP, PVST+, RSTP, and STP). Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 645
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. redundancy sfm standby Place the SFM in an offline state. S4820T Syntax redundancy sfm standby To place the SFM in an online state, use the no redundancy sfm standby command. Default The SFM is online by default.
PAGE 646
-- Switch Fabric Modules -Slot Status ----------------------------------------0 active 1 standby Dell(conf)# no redundancy sfm Taking secondary SFM online... ! 10Dell(conf)# do show sfm all Switch Fabric State: up -- Switch Fabric Modules -Slot Status ------------------------------------------0 active 1 active redundancy synchronize Manually synchronize data once between the Master and Stand-by stack units.
PAGE 647
Command Modes EXEC Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant DellEMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● patch flash://RUNTIME_PATCH_DIR — insert an In-Service Modular Hot-Fix patch.
PAGE 648
show redundancy Display the current redundancy configuration. S4820T Syntax show redundancy Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
PAGE 649
Field Description ● RPM failover counter (to reset the counter, use the redundancy resetcounter command) ● the time and date of the last RPM failover ● the reason for the last RPM failover Last Data Sync Record Displays the data sync information and the timestamp for the data sync: ● Start-up Config is the contents of the startup-config file. ● Line Card Config is the line card types configured and interfaces on those line cards. ● Runtime Event Log is the contents of the Event log.
PAGE 650
RPM State: RPM SW Version: Standby 7.5.1.
PAGE 651
21 ICMP Message Types This section lists and describes the possible ICMP message type resulting from a ping. The first three columns list the possible symbol or type/code. For example, you would receive a ! or 03 as an echo reply from your ping. Table 4. ICMP messages and their definitions Symbol Type Code . 0 U 3 3 Error echo reply . destination unreachable: 0 network unreachable . 1 host unreachable . 2 protocol unreachable . 3 port unreachable .
PAGE 652
Table 4. ICMP messages and their definitions (continued) Symbol Type Code Description 0 time-to-live equals 0 during transit . 1 time-to-live equals 0 during reassembly . 12 652 Query Error parameter problem: 1 IP header bad (catchall error) . 2 required option missing . 13 0 timestamp request . 14 0 timestamp reply . 15 0 information request (obsolete) . 16 0 information reply (obsolete) . 17 0 address mask request . 18 0 address mask reply .
PAGE 653
22 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) The IGMP commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • IGMP Commands IGMP Snooping Commands IGMP Commands Dell EMC Networking OS supports IGMPv1/v2/v3 and is compliant with RFC-3376. Important Points to Remember ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports protocol-independent multicast-sparse (PIM-SM) and protocol-independent sourcespecific multicast (PIM-SSM) include and exclude modes. ● IGMPv2 is the default version of IGMP on interfaces.
PAGE 654
Command Modes EXEC Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 655
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 656
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
PAGE 657
ip igmp immediate-leave Enable IGMP immediate leave. S4820T Syntax ip igmp immediate-leave [group-list prefix-list-name] To disable ip igmp immediate leave, use the no ip igmp immediate-leave command. Parameters Defaults group-list prefix- Enter the keywords group-list then a string up to 16 characters long of the list-name prefix-list-name. Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 658
ip igmp last-member-query-interval Change the last member query interval, which is the Max Response Time inserted into Group-Specific Queries sent in response to Leave Group messages. This interval is also the interval between Group-Specific Query messages. S4820T Syntax ip igmp last-member-query-interval milliseconds To return to the default value, use the no ip igmp last-member-query-interval command. Parameters Defaults milliseconds Enter the number of milliseconds as the interval.
PAGE 659
ip igmp query-interval Change the transmission frequency of IGMP general queries the Querier sends. S4820T Syntax ip igmp query-interval seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip igmp query-interval command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the number of seconds between queries sent out. The range is from 1 to 18000. The default is 60 seconds. 60 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 660
ip igmp query-max-resp-time Set the maximum query response time advertised in general queries. NOTE: The IGMP query-max-resp-time value must be less than the IGMP query-interval value. Syntax ip igmp query-max-resp-time seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip igmp query-max-resp-time command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the number of seconds for the maximum response time. The range is from 1 to 25. The default is 10 seconds.
PAGE 661
ip igmp ssm-map To translate (*,G) memberships to (S,G) memberships, use a statically configured list. S4820T Syntax ip igmp [vrf vrf-name] ssm-map std-access-list source-address Undo this configuration, that is, remove SSM map (S,G) states and replace them with (*,G) state, use the ip igmp [vrf vrf-name] ssm-map std-access-list source-address command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF.
PAGE 662
ip igmp version Manually set the version of the router to IGMPv2 or IGMPv3. S4820T Syntax ip igmp version {2 | 3} Parameters Defaults 2 Enter the number 2 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv2. 3 Enter the number 3 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv3. 2 (IGMPv2) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 663
Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format to view information on that group only. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 664
Example Example (VLT) Field Description Mode Displays the IGMP version used. Uptime Displays the amount of time the group has been operational. Expires Displays the amount of time until the entry expires. Last Reporter Displays the IP address of the last host to be a member of the IGMP group. DellEMC# show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 5 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Uptime Expires 225.0.0.0 Vlan 100 00:00:05 00:02:04 225.0.0.
PAGE 665
show ip igmp interface View information on the interfaces participating in IGMP. S4820T Syntax Parameters show ip igmp [vrf vrf-name] interface [interface] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to view IGMP interfaces associated with that VRF. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 666
Example Example (VRF) DellEMC# show ip igmp interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 is down, line protocol is down Internet protocol processing disabled TenGigabitEthernet 1/5 is down, line protocol is down Internet protocol processing disabled TenGigabitEthernet 1/6 is down, line protocol is down Internet protocol processing disabled TenGigabitEthernet 1/7 is up, line protocol is down Internet protocol processing disabled Vlan 20 Inbound IGMP access group is not set Internet address is 35.0.0.
PAGE 667
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 668
● ● ● ● IGMP snooping is not enabled by default on the switch. A maximum of 1800 groups and 600 VLAN are supported. IGMP snooping is not supported on a default VLAN interface. IGMP snooping is not supported over VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN interfaces (you must disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN interface before configuring VLAN-Stack-related commands). ● IGMP snooping does not react to Layer 2 topology changes triggered by spanning tree protocol (STP).
PAGE 669
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on S-Series and Z–Series. IGMP commands accept only non-VLAN interfaces — specifying VLAN does not yield results. debug ip igmp snooping Enable debugging of IGMP snooping packets on interfaces and groups.
PAGE 670
ip igmp snooping enable Enable IGMP snooping on all or a single VLAN. This command is the master on/off switch to enable IGMP snooping. Syntax ip igmp snooping enable To disable IGMP snooping, use the no ip igmp snooping enable command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ● CONFIGURATION ● INTERFACE VLAN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 671
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 672
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Seris and S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information On the C-Series and S-Series, unregistered multicast data traffic drops when you disable flooding; they do not forward the packets to multicast router ports. On the C-Series and S-Series, in order to disable Layer 2 multicast flooding, disable Layer 3 multicast (no ip multicast-routing).
PAGE 673
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information This last-member-query-interval is also the interval between successive Group-Specific Query messages. To change the last-member-query interval, use this command. ip igmp snooping mrouter Statically configure a VLAN member port as a multicast router interface.
PAGE 674
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command. Usage Information The Dell EMC Networking OS provides the capability of statically configuring the interface to which a multicast router is attached. To configure a static connection to the multicast router, enter the ip igmp snooping mrouter interface command in the VLAN context. The interface to the router must be a part of the VLAN where you are entering the command.
PAGE 675
Usage Information This command enables the IGMP switch to send General Queries periodically. This behavior is useful when there is no multicast router present in the VLAN because the multicast traffic is not routed. Assign an IP address to the VLAN interface for the switch to act as a querier for this VLAN. show ip igmp snooping groups Display snooping related information for all the IGMP groups, interface or one group of one interface.
PAGE 676
Example Field Description Mode Displays the IGMP version used. Uptime Displays the amount of time the group has been operational. Expires Displays the amount of time until the entry expires. Last Reporter Displays the IP address of the last host to be a member of the IGMP group. Member Ports Indicates the port channel. If the port channel is VLT, an asterisk (*) after the port channel number indicates the port channel is locally down and that a remote VLT port is up.
PAGE 677
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command. Usage Information Example Related Commands If the port channel is a VLT port channel, an asterisk (*) after the port channel number (Po 100*) indicates the port channel is locally down and that a remote VLT port is up. DellEMC# show ip igmp snooping mrouter Interface Router Ports Vlan 2 Te 1/3, Po 1 DellEMC# ● ip igmp snooping mrouter — configure a static connection to the multicast router.
PAGE 678
23 Interfaces To configure egress, port channel, time domain, and UDP, use these interface commands. Topics: • • • • • • Basic Interface Commands Egress Interface Selection (EIS) Commands Port Channel Commands Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) Commands UDP Broadcast Commands ip http source-interface Basic Interface Commands The following commands are for Physical, Loopback, and Null interfaces.
PAGE 679
● For ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port/[subport] - slot/port/[subport]. For example, if you want to clear the port configurations corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interface-type 1/1/1 - 1/1/4. vrrp [ipv6 {vr-id} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrrp to clear the counters of all VRRP groups. To | vr-id] clear the counters of VRRP groups on all IPv6 interfaces, enter ipv6.
PAGE 680
Related Commands ● mac learning-limit — allow aging of MACs even though a learning-limit is configured or disallow station move on learned MACs. clear counters eee Clear the counters for EEE on all copper ports or specific ports. Syntax clear counters [interface—type [slot/port | slot/port-range]] eee Parameters interface-type Enter the interface information as TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot and the port number or range of port numbers.
PAGE 681
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.
PAGE 682
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 683
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. range Defaults ● For non-ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port-range. For example, if you want to display information corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interfacetype 1/1 - 4. ● For ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port/[subport] - slot/port/[subport].
PAGE 684
Parameters Defaults desc_text Enter a text string up to 240 characters long. None Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 685
full Defaults Enter the keyword full to set the physical interface to transmit in both directions. Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 686
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S4820T and S5000. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. Usage Information EEE is an IEEE 802.3 az standard that reduces power consumptions on Ethernet ports. When EEE is enabled, transmission is stopped when there is no data to be transmitted and is resumed on arrival of new packets. You can enable EEE only on ten Gigabit native or optional module copper ports.
PAGE 687
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.6.0.0 Added support for the negotiate feature on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.
PAGE 688
NOTE: If you use the disable rx flow control command, Dell EMC Networking recommends rebooting the system. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking OS does not support mirroring of tx pause frames. Example Example (Monitor Session) DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1)# show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 no ip address switchport no negotiation auto flowcontrol rx off tx on no shutdown ...
PAGE 689
interface Configure a physical or virtual interface on the switch. Syntax Parameters Defaults interface interface interface Enter one of the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a null interface, enter the keyword null then the slot/port information. The Null interface number is 0. ● For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
PAGE 690
Usage Information You cannot delete a physical interface. By default, physical interfaces are disabled (shutdown) and are not assigned to an IP address or switchport. To place an interface in Layer 2 mode, ensure that the interface’s configuration does not contain an IP address and enter the switchport command. You can create up to 64 tunnel interfaces. The tunnel is added as a logical interface with no default configuration. To delete a tunnel interface, use the no interface tunnel tunnel-id command.
PAGE 691
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, Z9000, and MXL Switch. The interface group command will create all the non-existent VLANs specified in the range. On successful command execution, the CLI switches to the interface group context.
PAGE 692
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.4.1.0 Introduced Example Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# interface loopback 1655 DellEMC(conf-if-lo-1655)# ● ● ● ● interface interface interface interface — configure a physical interface. null — configure a Null interface.
PAGE 693
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.4.1.0 Introduced You cannot delete a Management port. The Management port is enabled by default (no shutdown). To assign an IP address to the Management port, use the ip address command. DellEMC(conf)# interface managementethernet 0/0 DellEMC(conf-if-ma-0/0)# ● management route — configure a static route that points to the Management interface or a forwarding router.
PAGE 694
Usage Information You cannot delete the Null interface. The only configuration command possible in a Null interface is ip unreachables. Example Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# interface null 0 DellEMC(conf-if-nu-0)# ● ● ● ● ● interface — configure a physical interface. interface loopback — configure a Loopback interface. interface port-channel — configure a port channel. interface vlan — configure a VLAN.
PAGE 695
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Added support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series. Prior releases supported 2094. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 696
Use the show running-config command to display the VLAN and port-channel interfaces. VLAN or port-channel interfaces that are not displayed in the show running-config command cannot be used with the bulk configuration feature of the interface range command. You cannot create virtual interfaces (VLAN, Port-channel) using the interface range command. NOTE: If a range has VLAN, physical and port-channel interfaces, only commands related to physical interfaces can be bulk configured.
PAGE 697
interface range macro (define) Defines a macro for an interface range and then saves the macro in the running configuration. Syntax Parameters define interface range macro name interface , interface , ... name Enter up to 16 characters for the macro name. interface, interface,... Enter the keywords interface range and the interface information. Select the range of interfaces for bulk configuration. You can enter up to six comma-separated ranges. Spaces are not required between the commas.
PAGE 698
Example (Single Range) This example shows how to define an interface range macro named test. Execute the show runningconfig command to display the macro definition.
PAGE 699
Example (Single Range) This example shows the macro named test that was defined earlier. DellEMC(config)# interface range macro test DellEMC(config-if-range-te-1/1-3,te-5/1-47,te-2/1-89)# Dell Related Commands ● interface range — configure a range of command (bulk configuration). ● interface range macro (define) — define a macro for an interface range (bulk configuration). interface vlan Configure a VLAN. You can configure up to 4094 VLANs.
PAGE 700
Example (Single Range) Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# int vlan 3 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-3)# ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● interface — configure a physical interface. interface loopback — configure a loopback interface. interface null — configure a null interface. interface port-channel — configure a port channel group. show vlan — display the current VLAN configuration on the switch. shutdown — disable/enable the VLAN. tagged — add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as a tagged interface.
PAGE 701
Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 702
end Exit from configuration mode exit Exit from autoneg configuration mode mode Specify autoneg mode no Negate a command or set its defaults show Show autoneg configuration information DellEMC(conf-if-autoneg)# mode ? forced-master Force port to master mode forced-slave Force port to slave mode DellEMC(conf-if-autoneg)# Example (Configured) User Information DellEMC# show interfaces configured TenGigabitEthernet 1/18 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:fc Current ad
PAGE 703
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.
PAGE 704
Command History Usage Information 704 Interfaces This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 705
Example (Single Interface) systest-3 Monitor time: 00:00:06 Refresh Intvl.
PAGE 706
mtu Set the link maximum transmission unit (MTU) (frame size) for an Ethernet interface. Syntax mtu value To return to the default MTU value, use the no mtu command. Parameters Defaults value Enter a maximum frame size in bytes. The range is from 594 to 12000. 1554 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 707
● Members can have different Link MTU values. Tagged members must have a link MTU 4 bytes higher than untagged members to account for the packet tag. ● The VLAN link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the VLAN members. For example, the VLAN contains tagged members with Link MTU of 1522 and IP MTU of 1500 and untagged members with Link MTU of 1518 and IP MTU of 1500.
PAGE 708
Usage Information The following describes the interface command shown in the following example. This example sets a port as hybrid, makes the port a tagged member of VLAN 20, and an untagged member of VLAN 10, which becomes the native VLAN of the port. The port now accepts: ● untagged frames and classify them as VLAN 10 frames ● VLAN 20 tagged frames The following describes the do show interfaces command shown in the following example.
PAGE 709
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 710
Usage Information Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced on all Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. The output of the show interfaces command displays the configured rate interval, along with the collected traffic data. When rate-interval is not configured in the global configuration mode or interface mode, the default value of 299 seconds is applied.
PAGE 711
no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-fo-1/4)# show config (from INTERFACE RANGE mode) Display the bulk configured interfaces (interface range). Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (conf-if-range) Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 712
show hardware Display the hardware counters on a specified interface or on a specified stack unit. Syntax show hardware {counters interface interface—type slot/port | stack-unit stack-unit-number unit unit-number counters} Parameters counters Enter the keyword counters to display the counters on a specified interface. interface Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface information and the slot/ port number.
PAGE 713
RX - Ingress Dropped Packet RX - MTU Check Error Frame Counter RX - PFC Frame Priority 0 RX - PFC Frame Priority 1 RX - PFC Frame Priority 2 RX - PFC Frame Priority 3 RX - PFC Frame Priority 4 RX - PFC Frame Priority 5 RX - PFC Frame Priority 6 RX - PFC Frame Priority 7 RX - Debug Counter 0 RX - Debug Counter 1 RX - Debug Counter 2 RX - Debug Counter 3 RX - Debug Counter 4 RX - Debug Counter 5 RX - Debug Counter 6 RX - Debug Counter 7 RX - Debug Counter 8 RX - EEE LPI Event Counter RX - EEE LPI Duration Cou
PAGE 714
Description RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX 714 Interfaces - IPV4 L3 Unicast Frame Counter IPV4 L3 Routed Multicast Packets IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Counter IPV6 L3 Routed Multicast Packets Unicast Packet Counter 64 Byte Frame Counter 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 10
PAGE 715
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - Jabber Counter VLAN Tag Frame Counter Double VLAN Tag Frame Counter RUNT Frame Counter Fragment Counter PFC Frame Priority 0 PFC Frame Priority 1 PFC Frame Priority 2 PFC Frame Priority 3 PFC Frame Priority 4 PFC Frame Priority 5 PFC Frame Priority 6 PFC Frame Priority 7 Debug Counter 0 Debug Counter 1 Debug Counter 2 Debug Counter 3 Debug Counter 4 Debug Counter 5 Debug Counter 6 Debug Counter 7 Debug Counter 8 Debug Count
PAGE 716
● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.3) Included the FEC types in the output for 25G, 50G, and 100G interfaces of the Z9100–ON. 9.14(0.0) Included the FEC counter details in the output for 25 and 50G interfaces of the S5048–ON. 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.12(0.
PAGE 717
Usage Information Version Description 6.3.1.0 Added the Pluggable Media Type field in the E-Series output. Use the show interfaces command for details on a specific interface. NOTE: In the CLI output, the power value is rounded to a 3-digit value. For receive/transmit power that is less than 0.000, an snmp query returns the corresponding dbm value even though the CLI displays as 0.000. NOTE: After the counters are cleared, the line-rate continues to increase until it reaches the maximum line rate.
PAGE 718
Line Description ○ discarded = the sum of runts, giants, CRC, and overrun packets discarded without any processing Example Output Statistics: Displays output statistics sent out of the interface including: ● Number of packets, bytes, and underruns out of the interface ● Packet size and the number of the packets outbound to the interface ● Number of Multicast, Broadcast, and Unicast packets: ○ Multicasts = number of MAC multicast packets ○ Broadcasts = number of MAC broadcast packets ○ Unicasts = number
PAGE 719
Example DellEMC# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 1/1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 is up, line protocol is down Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:41:77:95 Current address is 00:01:e8:41:77:95 Pluggable media present, SFP type is 1000BASE-SX Wavelength is 850nm Interface index is 100974648 Port will not be disabled on partial SFM failure Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 1000 Mbit Flowcontrol rx on tx on ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show
PAGE 720
Example (Management Ethernet) Example (Management Ethernet, two IPv6 addresses) DellEMC# show interfaces managementethernet 0/0 ManagementEthernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:0b:a9:4c Current address is 00:01:e8:0b:a9:4c Pluggable media not present Interface index is 503595208 Internet address is 10.11.201.
PAGE 721
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:05:12 Queueing strategy: fifo Time since last interface status change: 00:05:12 Related Commands ● show interfaces configured – display any interface with a non-default configuration. ● show ip interface – display Layer 3 information about the interfaces. ● show range – display all interfaces configured using the interface range command. show interfaces configured Display any interface with a non-default configuration.
PAGE 722
0 over 255-byte pkts, 10 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 1 packets, 64 bytes, 0 underruns 1 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 1 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 Vlans, 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.
PAGE 723
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 724
Use the show interfaces interface-type slot/port eee command to view the status of EEE on the specified port. Use the show interfaces interface-type slot/port-range eee command to view the status of EEE on the specified range of ports.
PAGE 725
show interfaces eee statistics Display the statistical details of Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE). Syntax Parameters Defaults show interfaces [interface-type [slot/port | slot/port-range]] eee statistics interface-type Enter the interface information as GigabitEthernet or TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot and the port number or range of port numbers. None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 726
Te 0/18 0 Te 0/19 0 Te 0/20 0 Te 0/21 0 Te 0/22 0 Te 0/23 0 Te 0/24 0 Te 0/25 0 Te 0/26 0 Te 0/27 0 Te 0/28 0 Te 0/29 0 Te 0/30 0 Te 0/31 0 Te 0/32 0 Te 0/33 0 Te 0/34 0 Te 0/35 0 Te 0/36 0 Te 0/37 0 Te 0/38 0 Te 0/39 0 Te 0/40 0 Te 0/41 0 Te 0/42 0 Te 0/43 0 Te 0/44 0 Te 0/45 0 Te 0/46 0 Te 0/47 0 Fo 0/48 Te 0/52 Te 0/53 Te 0/54 Te 0/55 Fo 0/56 - 726 Interfaces Yes No 0 0 0 Yes No 0 0 0 Yes No 0 0 0 Yes No 0 0 0 Yes No 0 0 0 Yes No 0 0 0 Yes No 0 0 0 Yes No 0 0 0
PAGE 727
Fo 0/60 - N/A - - - - <> Example for a specific interface S4820T DellEMC#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/5 eee statistics Port EEE LPI TxLPIEventCount TxLPIDuration RxLPIEventCount RxLPIDuration Te 0/5 Yes Yes 12 32546138 0 0 Related Commands ● show interfaces — display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface. show interfaces phy Display auto-negotiation and link partner information.
PAGE 728
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 6.5.4.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show interfaces gigabitethernet command following example. Mode Control Indicates if auto negotiation is enabled. If so, indicates the selected speed and duplex. Mode Status Displays auto negotiation fault information.
PAGE 729
Mode Status: AutoNegComplete: False RemoteFault: False LinkStatus: False JabberDetect: False AutoNegotation Advertise: 100MegFullDplx: True 100MegHalfDplx: True 10MegFullDplx: False 10MegHalfDplx: True Asym Pause: False Sym Pause: False AutoNegotiation Remote Partner's Ability: 100MegFullDplx: False 100MegHalfDplx: False 10MegFullDplx: False 10MegHalfDplx: False Asym Pause: False Sym Pause: False AutoNegotiation Expansion: ParallelDetectionFault: False ...
PAGE 730
Pluggable media not present Interface index is 34129154 Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed auto, Mode auto ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 3w0d17h Queueing strategy: fifo Input Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes 5144 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Outp
PAGE 731
Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.9(0.0) Added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.8(2.
PAGE 732
show interfaces switchport Display only virtual and physical interfaces in Layer 2 mode. This command displays the Layer 2 mode interfaces’ IEEE 802.1Q tag status and VLAN membership. Syntax show interfaces switchport [interface-type | stack-unit unit-id ] Parameters interface-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 733
Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Support added for hybrid port/native VLAN, introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information The following describes the show interfaces switchport command for the following example. Items Description Name Displays the interface’s type, slot/port number. 802.
PAGE 734
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. However, for Open Networking (ON) platforms the notation for specifying port range in the command is different from how you specify in non-ON platforms. ● For non-ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port-range.
PAGE 735
Line Description Rx Power measurement type Output depends on the vendor, typically either “Average” or “OMA” (Receiver optical modulation amplitude). Tx Power measurement type Output depends on the vendor, typically either “Supported” or “Not supported”. Temp High Alarm Factory-defined setting, typically in Centigrade. Value differs between SFPs and threshold SFP+. Voltage High Alarm threshold Displays the interface index number used by SNMP to identify the interface.
PAGE 736
Line Description TX Power Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Power Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Temperature Current temperature of the SFPs. If this temperature crosses Temp High alarm/ warning thresholds, the temperature high alarm/warning flag is set to true. Voltage Current voltage of the SFPs.
PAGE 737
Line Description Rx Power Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Rx power value displayed above. Temperature High Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Temperature value displayed above. Voltage High Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Voltage value displayed above. Tx Bias High Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Tx bias current value displayed above.
PAGE 738
SFP 1 Temp Low Alarm threshold = -25.000C SFP 1 Voltage Low Alarm threshold = 2.700V SFP 1 Bias Low Alarm threshold = 1.000mA SFP 1 TX Power Low Alarm threshold = 0.067mW SFP 1 RX Power Low Alarm threshold = 0.010mW =================================== SFP 1 Temp High Warning threshold = 90.000C SFP 1 Voltage High Warning threshold = 3.700V SFP 1 Bias High Warning threshold = 14.000mA SFP 1 TX Power High Warning threshold = 0.631mW SFP 1 RX Power High Warning threshold = 0.
PAGE 739
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.9(0.0) Added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series.
PAGE 740
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Added support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 741
shutdown Disable an interface. Syntax shutdown To activate an interface, use the no shutdown command. Defaults The interface is disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.
PAGE 742
To return to the default setting, use the no speed {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000} command. Parameters Defaults 10 Enter the keyword 10 to set the interface’s speed to 10 Mb/s. NOTE: This interface speed is not supported on the LC-EH-GE-50P or the LC-EJ-GE-50P card. If the command is entered for these interfaces, an error message appears. 100 Enter the keyword 100 to set the interface’s speed to 10/100 Mb/s.
PAGE 743
When you configure a speed for the 10/100/1000/10000 interface, confirm the negotiation auto command setting. Both sides of the link must have auto-negotiation either enabled or disabled. For speed settings of 1000 or auto, the software sets the link to auto-negotiation and you cannot change that setting. NOTE: Starting with Dell EMC Networking OS version 7.8.1.
PAGE 744
Usage Information This command is found on the Management interface only. Related Commands ● interface ManagementEthernet — configure the Management port on the system (either the Primary or Standby RPM). ● management route — configure a static route that points to the Management interface or a forwarding router. stack-unit portmode Split a single 40G port into four 10G ports.
PAGE 745
switchport Place an interface in Layer 2 mode. Syntax switchport [[backup interface {interface | port-channel number}] | mode private-vlan {host | promisucous | trunk}] To remove an interface from Layer 2 mode and place it in Layer 3 mode, enter the no switchport command. If a switchport backup interface is configured, first remove the backup configuration. To remove a switchport backup interface, enter the no switchport backup interface command.
PAGE 746
Usage Information Version Description 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.4.1.0 Added support for port-channel interfaces (the port-channel number option). 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Added the backup interface option. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 747
Egress Interface Selection (EIS) Commands The following commands are Egress Interface Selection (EIS) commands. application Configure the management egress interface selection. Syntax application {all | application-type} To remove a management application configuration, use the no application {all | application-type} command. Parameters Defaults application-type Enter any of the following keywords: ● For DNS, enter the keyword dns. ● For FTP, enter the keyword ftp. ● For NTP, enter the keyword ntp.
PAGE 748
Parameters Defaults application-type Enter any of the following keywords: ● For HTTP, enter the keyword http. ● For ICMP, enter the keyword icmp. all Configure all applications. None. Command Modes EIS Mode (conf-mgmt-eis) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.3.(0.
PAGE 749
management egress-interface-selection To make configured application traffic egress through the management port instead of the front-end (FE) port, enable and configure a management egress interface. Syntax management egress-interface-selection To disable and remove management egress interface selection (EIS) configurations, use the no management egress-interface-selection command. Defaults None. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 750
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant DellEMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2.(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S4810, and S4820T.
PAGE 751
Port Channel Commands A Link Aggregation Group (LAG) is a group of links that appear to a MAC client as if they were a single link according to IEEE 802.3ad. In Dell EMC Networking OS, a LAG is referred to as a Port Channel. ● The platform supports 128 port channels and 16 members per port channel.
PAGE 752
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Use the interface port-channel command to access this command. You cannot add an interface to a Port Channel if the interface contains an IP address in its configuration. Only the shutdown, description, mtu, and ip mtu commands can be configured on an interface if it is added to a Port Channel. The mtu and ip mtu commands are only available when the chassis is in Jumbo mode.
PAGE 753
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series.
PAGE 754
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series. pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series. Port Channel interfaces are logical interfaces and can be either in Layer 2 mode (by using the switchport command) or Layer 3 mode (by configuring an IP address). You can add a Port Channel in Layer 2 mode to a VLAN.
PAGE 755
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 756
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Usage Information This feature groups two LAGs to work in tandem as a supergroup. For example, if one LAG goes down, the other LAG is taken down automatically, providing an alternate path to reroute traffic, avoiding oversubscription on the other LAG. You can use both static and dynamic (LACP) LAGs to configure failover groups.
PAGE 757
show interfaces port-channel Display information on configured Port Channel groups. ` Syntax Parameters show interfaces port-channel [channel-number] [brief] [description] channel-number For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. ● For port-channel interfaces, you can specify multiple ports as portrange.
PAGE 758
Example 758 Interfaces Field Description Port-Channel 1... Displays the LAG’s status. In the Example, the status of the LAG’s LAG fatesharing group (“Failover-group”) is listed. Hardware is... Displays the interface’s hardware information and its assigned MAC address. Port-channel is part... Indicates whether the LAG is part of a LAG fate-sharing group (“Failover-group”). Internet address... States whether an IP address is assigned to the interface.
PAGE 759
Output 00.02Mbits/sec,4 packets/sec Time since last interface status change: 00:22:34 DellEMC# User Information Example The following describes the show interfaces port-channel brief command shown in the following example. Field Description LAG Lists the port channel number. Mode Lists the mode: ● L3 — for Layer 3 ● L2 — for Layer 2 Status Displays the status of the port channel.
PAGE 760
destination-ip address source-port number destination-port number source-mac Enter the keywords destination-ip then the IP destination address in IP address format. Enter the keywords source-port then the source port number. The range is from 1 to 65536. The default is None. Enter the keywords destination-port then the destination port number. The range is from 1 to 65536. The default is None. address Enter the keywords source-mac then the MAC source address in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
PAGE 761
Example DellEMC# show port-channel-flow outgoing-port-channel 1 incominginterface te 3/3 source-mac 00:00:50:00:00:00 destination-mac 00:00:a0:00:00:00 Egress Port for port-channel 1, for the given flow, is Te 13/2 Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) Commands TDR is useful for troubleshooting an interface that is not establishing a link; either it is flapping or not coming up at all. TDR detects open or short conditions of copper cables on 100/1000 Base-T modules.
PAGE 762
Usage Information Version Description 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The interface must be enabled to run the test or an error message is generated: DellEMC# tdr-cable-test tengigabitethernet 11/1 % Error: Interface is disabled Te 11/1. Syslog messages are generated when the link flaps during TDR tests. Related Commands ● show tdr — display the results of the TDR test. show tdr Display the TDR test results.
PAGE 763
Example Related Commands Status Definition Length: 92 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Shorted A short is detected on the cable. The location, in this Example is 92 meters. The short is accurate to plus or minus one meter. Length: 93 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Open An opening is detected on the cable. The location, in this Example is 93 meters. The open is accurate to plus or minus one meter. Status: Impedance Mismatch There is an impedance mismatch in the cables.
PAGE 764
Example Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Pre-version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# debug ip udp-helper UDP helper debugging is on 01:20:22: Pkt rcvd on Gi 3/0 with IP DA (0xffffffff) will be sent on Gi 5/1 Gi 5/2 Vlan 3 01:44:54: Pkt rcvd on Gi 4/0 is handed over for DHCP processing.
PAGE 765
Usage Information If you configure the ip helper-address command and ip udp-helper udp-port command, the behavior is that the UDP broadcast traffic with port numbers 67/68 is unicast relayed to the DHCP server per the ip helper-address configuration. This occurs regardless if the ip udp-helper udp-port command contains port numbers 67/68 or not.
PAGE 766
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 767
24 Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) Internet protocol security (IPSec) is an end-to-end security scheme for securing IP communications by authenticating and encrypting all packets in a session. Use IPSec between hosts, gateways, or hosts and gateways. IPSec uses a series of protocol functions to achieve information security: ● Authentication Headers (AH) — Connectionless integrity and origin authentication for IP packets.
PAGE 768
Defaults ahauthentication Enter the keywords ah-authentication then the transform type of operation to apply to traffic. The transform type represents the encryption or authentication applied to traffic. ● md5 — Use Message Digest 5 (MD5) authentication. ● sha1 — Use Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (SHA-1) authentication. ● null — Causes an encryption policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface.
PAGE 769
crypto ipsec policy Create a crypto policy used by ipsec. S4820T Syntax crypto ipsec policy name seq-num ipsec-manual To delete a crypto policy entry, use the no crypto ipsec policy name seq-num ipsecmanual command. Parameters Defaults name Enter the name for the crypto policy set. seq-num Enter the sequence number assigned to the crypto policy entry. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 770
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000, S4810, and S4820T. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. match Apply an match filter to the crypto policy.
PAGE 771
match 6 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 21 match 7 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 21 1.1.1.2 /32 0 session-key Specify the session keys used in the crypto policy entry. S4820T Syntax session-key {inbound | outbound} {ah spi hex-key-string | esp spi encrypt hex-key-string auth hex-key-string To delete the session key information from the crypto policy, use the no session-key {inbound | outbound} {ah | esp} command. Parameters Defaults name Enter the name for the transform set.
PAGE 772
show crypto ipsec transform-set Display the transform set configuration. S4820T Syntax show crypto ipsec transform-set name Parameters name Enter the name of the transform set. Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(0.
PAGE 773
Policy refcount : Sequence Num : SA Mode : Transform-Set Name : Peer IP Address : Inbound AH SPI : Inbound ESP Auth SPI : Inbound ESP Encry SPI : Inbound AH Key : Inbound ESP Auth Key : Inbound ESP Encry Key : Outbound AH SPI : Outbound ESP Auth SPI : Outbound ESP Encry SPI: Outound AH Key : Outound ESP Auth Key : Outound ESP Encry Key : Match sequence Num Protocol type IP or IPv6 Source address Source mask Source port Destination address Destination mask Destination port source-interface name source-interf
PAGE 774
25 IPv4 Routing The basic IPv4 commands are supported by Dell EMC Networking OS on the S4820T platform.
PAGE 775
• • • • • • • show show show show show show show ip management-route ip protocols ip route ip route list ip route summary ip traffic tcp statistics arp To associate an IP address with a MAC address in the switch, use address resolution protocol (ARP). Syntax arp [vrf vrf-name] ip-address mac-address interface To remove an ARP address, use the no arp ip-address command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name Enter a VRF name to configure an ARP entry for that VRF.
PAGE 776
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. You cannot use Class D or Class E IP addresses or zero IP address (0.0.0.0) when creating a static ARP. Zero MAC addresses (00:00:00:00:00:00) are also invalid. You can use the vrf attribute of this command to create a static ARP entry on either a default or a non-default VRF.
PAGE 777
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information This timer is an exponential backoff timer. Over the specified period, the time between ARP requests increases. This behavior reduces the potential for the system to slow down while waiting for a multitude of ARP responses. Related Commands ● show arp retries — display the configured number of ARP retries. arp learn-enable Enable ARP learning using gratuitous ARP.
PAGE 778
arp max-entries Enables you to configure the maximum number of ARP entries per VRF that are allowed for IPv4.. S4820T Syntax arp max-entries [vrf vrf-name] max-number Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name Enter the name of a specific VRF for which you want to configure maximum number of ARP entries that IPv4 allows. max-number Enter the maximum number of ARP entries that a VRF RTM can hold. The range is from 0 to 65535. Not configured.
PAGE 779
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 780
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 781
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.
PAGE 782
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 783
clear ip route Clear one or all routes in the routing table. S4820T Syntax Parameters clear ip route [vrf vrf-name] {* | ip-address mask} vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to clear the routes corresponding to that VRF. * Enter an asterisk (*) to clear all learned IP routes. ip-address mask Enter a specific IP address and mask in dotted decimal format to clear that IP address from the routing table.
PAGE 784
clear tcp statistics Clear TCP counters. S4820T Syntax clear tcp statistics [all | cp] Parameters all Enter the keyword all to clear all TCP statistics maintained on all switch processors. cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the cp to clear only statistics from the Control Processor. rp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp to clear only the statistics from Route Processor. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 785
Parameters Defaults interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 786
debug ip dhcp Enable debug information for dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) relay transactions and display the information on the console. S4820T Syntax debug ip dhcp To disable debug, use the no debug ip dhcp command. Defaults Debug disabled Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 787
Request, hops = 0, XID = 0xda4f9503, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 0.0.0.0 00:12:40 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREQUEST: Forwarded BOOTREQUEST for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 14.4.4.2 00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REPLY (Unicast) received at interface 14.4.4.1 BOOTP Reply, hops = 0, XID = 0xda4f9503, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 113.3.3.17 00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREPLY: Forwarded BOOTREPLY for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 113.3.3.
PAGE 788
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.
PAGE 789
● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 790
Field Description ICMP type= Displays the ICMP type and code. IP Fragment States that it is a fragment and displays the unique number identifying the fragment (Ident) and the offset (in 8-byte units) of this fragment (fragment offset) from the beginning of the original datagram. Example Usage Information IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.206 (Ma 0/0), len 54, sending TCP src=23, dst=40869, seq=2112994894, ack=606901739, win=8191 ACK PUSH IP: s=10.1.2.206 (Ma 0/0), d=10.1.2.
PAGE 791
icmp6-redirect enable Enable ICMP and ICMP6 redirects. Syntax icmp6-redirect enable Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description Legacy command Legacy command Usage Information Use this command to notify hosts on the same network that a better route is available for a specific destination.
PAGE 792
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. You must be in INTERFACE mode before you add an IP address to an interface. Assign an IP address to an interface prior to entering ROUTER OSPF mode. ip directed-broadcast Enables the interface to receive directed broadcast packets.
PAGE 793
ip domain-list Configure names to complete unqualified host names. S4820T Syntax ip domain-list name To remove the name, use the no ip domain-list name command. Parameters Defaults name Enter a domain name to be used to complete unqualified names (that is, incomplete domain names that cannot be resolved). Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 794
ip domain-lookup To address resolution (that is, DNS), enable dynamic host-name. S4820T Syntax ip domain-lookup To disable DNS lookup, use the no ip domain-lookup command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 795
ip domain-name Configure one domain name for the switch. S4820T Syntax ip domain-name name To remove the domain name, use the no ip domain-name command. Parameters Defaults name Enter one domain name to be used to complete unqualified names (that is, incomplete domain names that cannot be resolved). Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 796
ip helper-address Specify the address of a DHCP server so that DHCP broadcast messages can be forwarded when the DHCP server is not on the same subnet as the client. S4820T Syntax ip helper-address ip-address To remove a DHCP server address, use the no ip helper-address command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 797
ip helper-address hop-count disable Disable the hop-count increment for the DHCP relay agent. S4820T Syntax ip helper-address hop-count disable To re-enable the hop-count increment, use the no ip helper-address hop-count disable command. Defaults Enabled; the hops field in the DHCP message header is incremented by default. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 798
ip host Assign a name and an IP address to the host-to-IP address mapping table. S4820T Syntax ip host name ip-address To remove an IP host, use the no ip host name [ip-address] command. Parameters Defaults name Enter a text string to associate with one IP address. ip address Enter an IP address, in dotted decimal format, to be mapped to the name. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 799
● For a Management Ethernet interface, enter the keyword managementethernet. NOTE: ○ When you configure the capability to enable the loopback IP address to be sent for easy debugging and diagnosis (IP addresses of the devices for which the ICMP source interface is configured), the source IP address of the outgoing ICMP error message is modified, although the packets are not sent out using the configured interface.
PAGE 800
to easily and quickly identify the device and devices along the path because the DNS server maps the loopback IP address to the hostname and does not translate the IP address of every interface of the switch to the hostname.
PAGE 801
Usage Information You can enable the mechanism to configure the source or the originating interface from which the packet (the device that generates the ICMP error messages) is received by the switch to send the loopback address instead of its source IP address to be used in the ICMP unreachable messages and in the traceroute command output. The loopback address must be unique in a particular domain.
PAGE 802
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced for the E-Series. To avoid denial of service (DOS) attacks, keep the number of fragments allowed for re-assembly low. ip max-routes Enables you to configure the maximum number of protocol routes per VRF that are allowed for IPv4.
PAGE 803
Defaults No name servers are configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 804
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 805
● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 806
Usage Information Version Description 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2.(0.0) Added support for tunnel interface type. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Added support for 4094 VLANs on the E-Series (the prior limit was 2094). 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.9.1.
PAGE 807
ip source-route Enable Dell EMC Networking OS to forward IP packets with source route information in the header. S4820T Syntax ip source-route To drop packets with source route information, use the no ip route-source command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 808
Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. You can configure the amount of time for which the device must wait before it attempts to establish a TCP connection.
PAGE 809
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.
PAGE 810
● source-mac — Uses the source MAC address, VLAN, Ethertype, source module ID and source port ID fields to hash. The hashing mechanism returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the packet should be forwarded. Defaults tcp-udp enable Enter the keywords to distribute traffic based on the following: ● enable — Takes the TCP/UDP source and destination ports into consideration when doing hash computations. This option is enabled by default.
PAGE 811
mac [source-mac | source-port-id | source-module-id | dest-mac | dest-portid | dest-module-id | vlan | ethertype | source-dest-mac ] | tunnel [ipv4over-ipv4 | ipv4-over-gre-ipv4 | mac-in-mac]} Parameters Defaults {{ip-selection| ipv6-selection [ source-ip | source-ipv6 | To use IPv4 key fields in hash computation, enter the keyword ip-selection then one of the parameters. To use IPv6 key fields in hash computation, enter the keyword ipv6-selection then one of the parameters.
PAGE 812
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. management route Configure a static route that points to the Management interface or a forwarding router. S4820T Syntax management route {ip-address mask | ipv6-address 1.1.1.1prefix-length} {forwarding-router-address | managementethernet | fortyGigE | vlan | tengigabitethernet } To remove a static route, use the no management route command.
PAGE 813
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Added support for forty gigabit, vlan, and tengigabit ethernet interfaces. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000 and added support for IPv6. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 814
macaddress mac- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword macaddress then a MAC address in address mask nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. Enter the optional MAC address mask in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format also. static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to view entries entered manually. retries (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword retries to show the number of ARP retries before a 20–second back off. dynamic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dynamic to view dynamic entries.
PAGE 815
Description Example Example (Private VLAN) Protocol Displays the protocol type. Address Displays the IP address of the ARP entry. Age(min) Displays the age (in minutes) of the ARP entry. Hardware Address Displays the MAC address associated with the ARP entry. Interface Displays the first two letters of the interfaces type and the slot/port associated with the ARP entry. VLAN Displays the VLAN ID, if any, associated with the ARP entry. CPU Lists which CPU the entries are stored on.
PAGE 816
Related Commands ● ip local-proxy-arp — enable/disable Layer 3 communication in secondary VLANs. ● switchport mode private-vlan — set PVLAN mode of the selected port. show arp retries Display the configured number of ARP retries. S4820T Syntax show arp retries Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 817
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Added support for IPv6 addresses. 8.3.19.
PAGE 818
ks (perm, 4200-1 (perm, 1230-3 (perm, ZZr (perm, Z10-3 (perm, DellEMC# Related Commands OK) OK) OK) OK) OK) - IP IP IP IP IP 2.2.2.2 192.68.69.2 192.68.99.2 192.71.18.2 192.71.23.1 ● traceroute — view the DNS resolution. ● ip host — configure a host. show ip cam linecard View CAM entries for a port pipe on a line card.
PAGE 819
Example Usage Information Example (Summary) Field Description Destination Displays the destination route of the index. EC Displays the number of equal cost multipaths (ECMP) available for the default route for non-Jumbo line cards. For Jumbo line cards, displays 0,1 when ECMP is more than eight. CG Displays 0. V Displays a 1 if the entry is valid and a 0 if the entry is for a line card with Catalog number beginning with LC-EF. C Displays the CPU bit.
PAGE 820
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Dell# 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3932 1312 1312 1312 1312 1312 40610 3932 2622 2622 2622 2622 1312 1312 3932 1312 1312 1312 1312 1312 1312 1312 1312 1312 1312 1312 1312 1312 1312 1312 8 show ip cam stack-unit Display CAM entries for a port-pipe of a stack-unit on a S-Series or Z-Series switch.
PAGE 821
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table listing route prefixes and the total number routes which can be entered in to CAM. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 822
-------------------------------------------------------------------------1.1.1.2/32 0 0 1000 00:01:00:00:00:02 Te 3/42 2.1.1.2/32 0 0 20 00:03:00:00:00:02 Po 10 2.1.1.1/32 0 1 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 CP 1.1.1.1/32 0 1 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 CP 2.1.1.0/24 0 1 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 CP 1.1.1.0/24 0 1 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 CP 100.1.1.0/24 1 0 20 00:03:00:00:00:02 Po 10 0 100.1.1.0/24 1 0 1000 00:01:00:00:00:02 Te 3/42 0 0.0.0.
PAGE 823
Usage Information Version Description 9.4(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Added support for up to seven stack members. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. The following describes the show ip fib stack-unit command shown in the following example. Field Description Destination Lists the destination IP address.
PAGE 824
show ip flow Show how a Layer 3 packet is forwarded when it arrives at a particular interface. S4820T Syntax show ip flow interface interface {source-ip address destination-ip address} {protocol number [tcp | udp]} {src-port number destination-port number} Parameters interface interface source-ip address destination-ip Enter the keyword interface then one of the following interface keywords. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 825
Usage Information Version Description pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command provides egress port information for a given IP flow. This information is useful in identifying which interface the packet follows in the case of Port-channel and Equal Cost Multi Paths. Use this command for routed packed only. For switched packets, use the show port-channel-flow command.
PAGE 826
Version Description 9.11(0.0) Updated the command output to include the unicast reverse path forwarding (uRPF) status. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.
PAGE 827
Internet address is not set IP MTU is 1500 bytes Directed broadcast forwarding is disabled Proxy ARP is enabled Split Horizon is enabled Poison Reverse is disabled ICMP redirects are not sent ICMP unreachables are not sent IP unicast RPF check is not supported DellEMC# Usage Information Example (Brief) The following describes the show ip interface brief command shown in the following example. Fields Description Interface Displays type of interface and the associated slot and port number.
PAGE 828
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 829
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Regular evaluation optimization enabled/disabled added to display output. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.
PAGE 830
list prefix-list (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword list and the name of a configured prefix list. For more information, refer to the show ip route list command. protocol (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a routing protocol (bgp, isis, ospf, rip) or the keywords connected or static. NOTE: bgp, isis, ospf, and rip. ● If you enter bgp, you can include the BGP as-number . ● If you enter isis, you can include the ISIS routing-tag. ● If you enter ospf, you can include the OSPF process-id.
PAGE 831
Usage Information The following describes the show ip route all command in the following example.
PAGE 832
Example (Summary) DellEMC# show ip route summary Route Source Active Routes Non-active Routes connected 2 0 static 1 0 Total 3 0 Total 3 active route(s) using 612 bytes R1_E600i>show ip route static ? | Pipe through a command R1_E600i>show ip route static Destination Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change ----------- ------- ----------- ----------*S 0.0.0.0/0 via 10.10.91.
PAGE 833
--------------------S 1.1.1.0/24 C C 4.4.4.0/24 6.6.6.0/24 ------4.4.4.2, via Te 1/4 6.6.6.2, via Te 1/16 Direct, Te 1/4 Direct, Te 1/16 ----------1/0 00:00:01 0/0 0/0 00:01:32 00:01:25 DellEMC(conf)#do show ip route 1.1.1.0/24 Routing entry for 1.1.1.0/24 Known via "static", distance 1, metric 0 Last update 00:05:01 ago Routing Descriptor Blocks: * 4.4.4.2, via TenGigabitEthernet 1/4 * 6.6.6.2, via TenGigabitEthernet 1/16 DellEMC(conf)# show ip route list Display IP routes in an IP prefix list.
PAGE 834
Example DellEMC# show ip route list test Codes:C- connected, S - static, R - RIP, B- BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated, O- OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2- OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2- OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2- IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, >- non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set R R R R C Related Commands Destination --
PAGE 835
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip route summary shown in the following example. Column Heading Description Route Source Identifies how the route is configured in Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 836
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to view only the statistics from Route Processor 1. rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to view only the statistics from Route Processor 2. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information 836 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 837
Keyword Definition ... couldn’t fragment Number of packets that could not be fragmented and forwarded. ...encapsulation failed Counts packets which could not be forwarded due to ARP resolution failure. Dell EMC Networking OS sends an arp request prior to forwarding an IP packet. If a reply is not received, Dell EMC Networking OS repeats the request three times. These packets are counted in encapsulation failed. Rcvd: ...short packets The number of bytes in the packet are too small. ...
PAGE 838
show tcp statistics View information on TCP traffic through the switch. S4820T Syntax show tcp statistics {all | cp} Parameters all Enter the keyword all to view all TCP information. cp Enter the keyword cp to view only TCP information from the Control Processor. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information 838 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 839
Example Field Description 0 packets with data after window Displays the number of packets and bytes received that exceed the switch’s window size. 0 packets after close Displays the number of packet received after the TCP connection was closed. 0 window probe packets... Displays the number of window probe and update packets received. 41 dup ack... Displays the number of duplicate acknowledgement packets and acknowledgement packets with data received. 10184 ack...
PAGE 840
26 IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) IPv6 ACLs and IPv6 Route Map commands are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: For IPv4 ACL commands, see Access Control Lists (ACL). Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Certain platforms require manual CAM usage space allotment. For more information, see cam-acl. Egress IPv6 ACL and IPv6 ACL on the Loopback interface is not supported. Reference to an empty ACL permits any traffic.
PAGE 841
Example Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 842
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 843
Ipv6Acl : Ipv4Qos : L2Qos : 4 2 3 -- Line card 4 -Current L2Acl : Ipv4Acl : Ipv6Acl : Ipv4Qos : L2Qos : Settings(in block sizes) 2 2 4 2 3 DellEMC# Related Commands ● cam-acl — configure CAM profiles to support IPv6 ACLs. permit icmp To allow all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter.
PAGE 844
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 8.2.1.
PAGE 845
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. ipv6 control-plane egress-filter Enable egress Layer 3 ACL lookup for IPv6 CPU traffic. S4820T Syntax ipv6 control-plane egress-filter Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 846
Defaults cpu-qos Enter the keyword cpu-qos to assign this ACL to control plane traffic only (CoPP). permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting this condition. deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition. ospfv3 Specify that this ACL is for OSPFv3 control plane traffic All access lists contain an implicit “deny any”; that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped.
PAGE 847
Parameters default Use the default CAM profile settings, and set the CAM as follows: ● L2 ACL(l2acl): 1 ● L3 ACL (ipv4acl: 1 ● IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 2 l2acl 1-4 ipv4acl 1- 4 ipv6acl 0-4 Allocate space to support IPv6 ACLs. Enter all of the profiles and a range. Enter the CAM profile name then the amount to be allotted. The total space allocated must equal 4. The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 848
cam-acl Allocate space for IPv6 ACLs. S4820T Syntax cam-acl {default | l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 l2qos 1-10} Parameters default Use the default CAM profile settings, and set the CAM as follows: ● L3 ACL (ipv4acl): 6 ● L2 ACL(l2acl): 5 ● IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 0 ● L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1 ● L2 QoS (l2qos): 1 l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 l2qos 1-10 Allocate space to support IPv6 ACLs. Enter all of the profiles and a range.
PAGE 849
Ranges for the CAM profiles are from 1 to 10, except for the ipv6acl profile which is from 0 to 10. The ipv6acl allocation must be a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10).
PAGE 850
27 IPv6 Basics IPv6 basic commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: For information about the Dell EMC Networking OS version and platform that supports IPv6 in each software feature, see the IPv6 Addressing section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 851
unit-number Enter the stack member number. The range is from 0 to 11 for the S4820T. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 852
Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. clear ipv6 mld_host Clear the IPv6 MLD host counters and reset the elapsed time. S4820T Syntax clear ipv6 mld_host Command Modes EXEC Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 853
warning-only Defaults When the warning-only option is used, a syslog message will be thrown when maximum number of dynamic IPv6 routes reaches the limit. Additional dynamic IPv6 routes will still be allowed. No limit is set on the maximum number of dynamic IPv6 routes for a VRF. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-VRF Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 854
address from the current unused prefix is used to create a new address. If there are no remaining prefixes, the software waits to receive a new prefix from the RA. ● If auto-configuration is enabled, all IPv6 addresses on that management interface are auto-configured. Manual and auto-configurations are not supported on a single management interface. ● Removing auto-configuration removes all auto-configured IPv6 addresses and the link-local IPv6 address from that management interface.
PAGE 855
● IPv6 addresses on a single management interface cannot be members of the same subnet. ● IPv6 secondary addresses on management interfaces across platform must be members of the same subnet. ● IPv6 secondary addresses on management interfaces should not match the virtual IP address and should not be in the same subnet as the virtual IP. NOTE: Do not use the /128 prefix length on physical or port channel interfaces. You can use the /128 prefix length on loopback interfaces.
PAGE 856
Example DellEMC(conf)# int ten 1/4 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/4)# ipv6 address 200:1::/64 eui64 DellEMC(conf)# int ten 1/6 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/6)# ipv6 address 801:10::/64 eui64 ipv6 control-plane icmp error-rate-limit Configure the maximum number of ICMP error packets per second that can be sent per second. S4820T Syntax ipv6 control-plane icmp error-rate-limit {1-200} To restore the default value, use the no ipv6 control-plane icmp error-rate-limit command.
PAGE 857
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. If the flowlabel value is already set for BGP or SSH, the system defaults to the already configured value. All packets on the same connection are considered part of the same flow by the system. For new connections, set the new flowlabel to zero.
PAGE 858
Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of the name server to be used. Note: The :: notation specifics successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. ipv6-address2... ipv6-address6 Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter up to five more IPv6 addresses, in the x:x:x:x::x format, of name servers to be used. Separate the IPv6 addresses with a space. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 859
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. ipv6 nd disable-reachable-timer Keep the learnt neighbor discovery entries stateless so that the entries do not time out. Syntax ipv6 nd disable-reachable-timer To restore to default, use the no ipv6 nd disable-reachable-timer command. Default Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 860
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4810, S4820T, and MXL.. Use this command to add, edit, or delete an IPv6 RDNSS address and lifetime value. You can configure up to four IPv6 RDNSS addresses.
PAGE 861
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series, C-Series, and S-Series. By default, all prefixes configured as addresses on the interface are advertised.
PAGE 862
distance (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the metric distance assigned to the route. The range is from 1 to 255. name description (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword name and the description for the IPv6 static route configuration. tag value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag then a tag value number. The range is from 1 to 4294967295. permanent (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword permanent to specify that the route is not to be removed, even if the interface assigned to that route goes down.
PAGE 863
static route (destination) has a non-zero weight assigned to it and other paths do not have any weight configured, then regular ECMP is used for forwarding. You can specify the weight value only to destination address and not on the egress port. A route is considered for weighted ECMP calculations only if each paths corresponding to that route is configured with a weight.
PAGE 864
● connected routes and resolved neighbors remain in the CAM and new IPv6 neighbors are still discoverable ● additional protocol adjacencies (OSPFv3 and BGP4) are brought down and no new adjacencies are formed ● the IPv6 address family configuration (under router bgp) is deleted ● IPv6 Multicast traffic continues to flow unhindered show ipv6 cam stack-unit Displays the IPv6 CAM entries for the specified stack-unit.
PAGE 865
an equivalent /64 entry would be listed in the show ipv6 cam stack-unit unit-number port-set {0-1} output. Similarly, if there is more than one ECMP object with a destination route that has a mask greater than 64, if the first 64 bits in the destination routes of the ECMP objects are the same, only one route is installed in CAM even though multiple ECMP path entries exist. NOTE: The self address is displayed in the neighbor portion for the show ipv6 cam stack-unit unit-number port-set command.
PAGE 866
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.
PAGE 867
show ipv6 interface Display the status of interfaces configured for IPv6. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 interface interface {slot | slot/port} [brief] [configured] [stack-unit id] interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
PAGE 868
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Added support for the managementethernet slot/port parameter. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The Management port is enabled by default (no shutdown).
PAGE 869
IPv6 unicast RPF check is not supported DellEMC# DellEMC# show ipv6 interface vlan 112 Vlan 112 is down, line protocol is down IPV6 is enabled Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e846 Global Unicast address(es): 1111::bbbb, subnet is 1111::/64 (MANUAL) Remaining lifetime: infinite Global Anycast address(es): Joined Group address(es): ff02::1 ff02::2 ff02::1:ff00:bbbb ff02::1:ff8a:e846 ND MTU is 0 ICMP redirects are not sent DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3 ND reachable time is 19390 millisecond
PAGE 870
IPV6 is enabled Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fea7:497e Global Unicast address(es): 400::1, subnet is 400::/64 (MANUAL) Remaining lifetime: infinite Global Anycast address(es): Joined Group address(es): ff02::1 ff02::2 ff02::1:ff00:1 ff02::1:ffa7:497e ND MTU is 0 ICMP redirects are not sent DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3 ND reachable time is 20410 milliseconds ND base reachable time is 30000 milliseconds ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 mi
PAGE 871
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.4.1.0 Introduced on the C- and E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. DellEMC# show ipv6 IPv6 Destination ---------------2001:34::0/64 2001:68::0/64 DellEMC# management-route Gateway ------ManagementEthernet 0/0 2001:34::16 State ----Connected Active show ipv6 mld_host Display the IPv6 MLD host counters.
PAGE 872
Example MLD Host Traffic Counters Elapsed time since counters cleared: 0028:33:52 Received Sent Valid MLD Packets 97962 18036 Reports 79962 18034 Leaves ---0 MLDv2 Queries 18000 ---MLDv1 Queries 0 ---Errors: Malformed Packets: 4510 show ipv6 route Displays the IPv6 routes.
PAGE 873
Usage Information Example (SSeries) Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
PAGE 874
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Dist/Metric, Gateway, Last Change ----------------------------------------------------C 100::/64 [0/0] Direct, Te 1/12/1, 20:00:18 C 400::/64 [0/0] Direct, Tu 1, 00:09:02 S 800::/64 [1/0] via 100::1, Te 1/12/1, 00:00:50
PAGE 875
Trust diffserv (IPv4) can co-exist with trust ipv6-diffserv in an Input Policy Map.
PAGE 876
28 iSCSI Optimization Internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI storage traffic on Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. To configure and verify the iSCSI optimization feature, use the following Dell EMC Networking OS commands.
PAGE 877
iscsi aging time Set the aging time for iSCSI sessions. Syntax iscsi aging time time To remove the iSCSI session aging time, use the no iscsi aging time command. Parameters Defaults time Enter the aging time for the iSCSI session. The range is from 5 to 43,200 minutes. 10 minutes Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 878
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.
PAGE 879
Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP (only on the global, not on the interface) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 880
ip-address (Optional) Defaults Enter the ip-address that the iSCSI monitors. The ip-address specifies the IP address of the iSCSI target. 860, 3260 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.
PAGE 881
-----------------------------------------------iSCSI Targets and TCP Ports: -----------------------------------------------TCP Port Target IP Address 3260 860 Related Commands ● show iscsi session — display information about active iSCSI sessions on the switch. ● show iscsi session detailed — display detailed information about active iSCSI sessions on the switch. ● show run iscsi — show run iscsi. show iscsi session Display information about active iSCSI sessions on the switch.
PAGE 882
show iscsi session detailed Display detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch. Syntax show iscsi session detailed [session isid] Parameters isid Enter the session’s iSCSi ID to display detailed information about the specified iSCSi session. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 883
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.
PAGE 884
29 Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) IS-IS is an interior gateway protocol that uses shortest-path-first algorithm. IS-IS facilitates the communication between open systems, supporting routers passing through both IP and OSI traffic. A router is considered as an intermediate system. Networks are partitioned into manageable routing domains called areas. Intermediate systems send, receive, and forward packets to other routers within their area (Level 1 and Level 1-2 devices).
PAGE 885
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • isis ipv6 metric isis metric isis network point-to-point isis password isis priority is-type log-adjacency-changes lsp-gen-interval lsp-mtu lsp-refresh-interval max-area-addresses max-lsp-lifetime maximum-paths metric-style multi-topology net passive-interface redistribute redistribute bgp redistribute ospf router isis set-overload-bit show config show isis database show isis graceful-restart detail show isis hostname show isis interface show is
PAGE 886
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. To perform protocol-support consistency checks on hello packets, use this command. The adjacencycheck is enabled by default.
PAGE 887
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 ISIS support. 6.3.1.0 Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced You cannot disable leaking from Level 1 to Level 2. Also, you cannot enable leaking from Level 2 to Level 1.
PAGE 888
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. To prevent the link state database from receiving incorrect routing information from unauthorized routers, use the area-password command on routers within an area. The configured password injects into Level 1 LSPs, CSNPs, and PSNPs. Related Commands ● domain-password — set the authentication password for a routing domain. ● isis password — configure an authentication password for an interface.
PAGE 889
Parameters vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to restart the IS-IS process corresponding to that VRF. tag (Optional) Enter an alphanumeric string to specify the IS-IS routing tag area. * Enter the keyword * to clear all IS-IS information and restart the IS-IS process. This command removes IS-IS neighbor information and IS-IS LSP database information and the full SPF calculation is done. database Clears IS-IS LSP database information.
PAGE 890
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Usage Information To configure a shortcut name that you can use instead of entering a long string of numbers associated with an NSAP address, use this command.
PAGE 891
debug isis adj-packets Enable debugging on adjacency-related activity such as hello packets that are sent and received on IS-IS adjacencies. S4820T Syntax debug isis [vrf vrf-name] adj-packets [interface] To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis [vrf vrf-name]adj-packets [interface] command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable the debug information on IS-IS for an adjacency tied to that VRF.
PAGE 892
debug isis local-updates To debug IS-IS local update packets, enable debugging on a specific interface and provides diagnostic information. S4820T Syntax debug isis [vrf vrf-name] local-updates [interface] To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis [vrf vrf—name] updates [interface] command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable the debugging information on IS-IS corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 893
debug isis snp-packets To debug IS-IS complete sequence number PDU (CSNP) and partial sequence number PDU (PSNP) packets, enable debugging on a specific interface and provides diagnostic information. S4820T Syntax debug isis [vrf vrf-name] snp-packets [interface] To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis [vrf vrf-name] snp-packets [interface] command.
PAGE 894
debug isis spf-triggers Enable debugging on the events that triggered IS-IS shortest path first (SPF) events for debugging purposes. S4820T Syntax debug isis [vrf vrf-name] spf-triggers To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis [vrf vrf-name] spf-triggers command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable debugging information on IS-IS corresponding to that VRF. This information contains SPF trigger detail tied to the VRF that you specify.
PAGE 895
interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 896
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 897
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 898
Usage Information Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. The administrative distance indicates the trust value of incoming packets. A low administrative distance indicates a high trust rate. A high value indicates a lower trust rate.
PAGE 899
Related Commands Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 ISIS support. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. ● distribute-list out — suppress networks from being advertised in updates. ● redistribute — redistribute routes from one routing domain to another routing domain. distribute-list out Suppress network prefixes from being advertised in outbound updates.
PAGE 900
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 ISIS support. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. Usage Information You can assign a name to a routing process so a prefix list IS applied to only the routes derived from the specified routing process. Related Commands ● distribute-list in — filter the networks received in updates. ● redistribute — redistribute routes from one routing domain to another routing domain.
PAGE 901
domain-password Set the authentication password for a routing domain. Syntax domain-password [hmac-md5 | encryption-type] password To disable the password, use the no domain-password command. Parameters Defaults hmac-md5 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords hmac-md5 to encrypt the password using MD5. encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter 7 to encrypt the password using DES. password Enter an alphanumeric string up to 16 characters long.
PAGE 902
Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 903
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. graceful-restart restart-wait Enable the graceful restart maximum wait time before a restarting peer comes up.
PAGE 904
Related Commands ● graceful-restart t3 — configure the overall wait time before graceful restart completes. graceful-restart t1 Set the graceful restart wait time before unacknowledged restart requests are generated. This wait time is the interval before the system sends a restart request (an IIH with RR bit set in Restart TLV) until the CSNP is received from the helping router.
PAGE 905
seconds Defaults Enter the gracefule-restart t2 time in seconds. The range is from 5 to 120 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. 30 seconds Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 906
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The running router sets the remaining time value to the current adjacency hold time.
PAGE 907
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Usage Information IS-IS hellos are padded to the full maximum transmission unit (MTU) size.
PAGE 908
ignore-lsp-errors Ignore LSPs with bad checksums instead of purging those LSPs. Syntax ignore-lsp-errors To return to the default values, use the no ignore-lsp-errors command. Defaults In IS-IS, the default deletes LSPs with internal checksum errors (no ignore-lsp-errors). Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 909
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.
PAGE 910
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Configure a network entity title (the net command) to specify the area address and the router system ID.
PAGE 911
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Because the default establishes Level 1 and Level 2 adjacencies, you do not need to configure this command. Routers in an IS-IS system must be configured as a Level 1-only, Level 1-2, or Level 2-only system.
PAGE 912
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. The default values of this command are typically satisfactory transmission times for a specific interface on a designated intermediate system. To maintain database synchronization, the designated routers send CSNPs. You can configure Level 1 and Level 2 CSNP intervals independently. isis hello-interval Specify the length of time between hello packets sent.
PAGE 913
isis hello-multiplier Specify the number of IS-IS hello packets a neighbor must miss before the router declares the adjacency down. Syntax isis hello-multiplier multiplier [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no isis hello-multiplier [multiplier] [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters Defaults multiplier Specifies an integer that sets the multiplier for the hello holding time. Never configure a hello-multiplier lower than the default (3). The range is from 3 to 1000.
PAGE 914
Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.
PAGE 915
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 916
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000.
PAGE 917
isis password Configure an authentication password for an interface. Syntax isis password [hmac-md5] password [level-1 | level-2] To delete a password, use the no isis password [password] [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters Defaults encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter 7 to encrypt the password using DES. hmac-md5 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords hmac-md5 to encrypt the password using MD5. password Assign the interface authentication password.
PAGE 918
isis priority Set the priority of the designated router you select. Syntax isis priority value [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no isis priority [value] [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters Defaults value This value sets the router priority. The higher the value, the higher the priority. The range is from 0 to 127. The default is 64. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Specify the priority for Level 1. This setting is the default. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Specify the priority for Level 2.
PAGE 919
Defaults level-1-2 Allows a router to act as both a Level 1 and Level 2 router. This setting is the default. level-2-only Allows a router to act as a Level 2 router. level-1-2 Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
PAGE 920
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. This command allows you to monitor adjacency state changes, which are useful when you monitor large networks.
PAGE 921
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Added support for LSP Throttling Enhancement. LSP throttling slows down the frequency at which LSPs are generated during network instability.
PAGE 922
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Added support for LSP Throttling Enhancement. The link MTU and the LSP MTU size must be the same. Because each device can generate a maximum of 255 LSPs, consider carefully whether you use the lsp-mtu command. lsp-refresh-interval Set the link state PDU (LSP) refresh interval. LSPs must be refreshed before they expire.
PAGE 923
persist at the cost of increased link utilization. A higher value reduces the link utilization the flooding of refreshed packets causes. Related Commands ● max-lsp-lifetime — set the maximum interval that LSPs persist without being refreshed. max-area-addresses Configure manual area addresses. Syntax max-area-addresses number To return to the default values, use the no max-area-addresses command. Parameters Defaults number Set the maximum number of manual area addresses. The range is from 3 to 6.
PAGE 924
Parameters Defaults seconds The maximum lifetime of LSP in seconds. This value must be greater than the lsp-refresh-interval command. The higher the value the longer the LSPs are kept. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 1200. 1200 seconds Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 925
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.
PAGE 926
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. If you enter the metric-style wide command, the Dell EMC Networking OS generates and accepts only new-style TLVs.
PAGE 927
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced. net To configure an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a routing process, use this mandatory command. If you did not configure a NET, the IS-IS process does not start. Syntax net network-entity-title To remove a net, use the no net network-entity-title command. Parameters Defaults network-entitytitle Specify the area address and system ID for an IS-IS routing process.
PAGE 928
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured.
PAGE 929
metric metric- value metric-type {external | internal} (OPTIONAL) The external link type associated with the default route advertised into a routing domain. Specify one of the following: ● external ● internal level-1 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS as Level 1 routes. level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS as Level-1-2 routes. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS as Level 2 routes.
PAGE 930
How a metric value assigned to a redistributed route is advertised depends on how on the configuration of the metric-style command. If the metric-style command is set for Narrow or Transition mode and the metric value in the redistribute command is set to a number higher than 63, the metric value advertised in LSPs is 63. If the metric-style command is set for Wide mode, the metric value in the redistribute command is advertised.
PAGE 931
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Added support for IPv6 ISIS. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. BGP to IS-IS redistribution supports “match” options using route maps.
PAGE 932
● internal ● external route-map map- name map-name is an identifier for a configured route map. The route map should filter imported routes from the source routing protocol to the current routing protocol. If you do not specify a map-name, all routes are redistributed. If you specify a keyword, but fail to list route map tags, no routes are imported. Defaults See Parameters.
PAGE 933
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 934
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.8.1.0 Added support for multi-topology ISIS.
PAGE 935
Version Description 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. Example (Router- The bold section identifies that Multi-Topology IS-IS is enabled in Transition mode. Isis) DellEMC(conf-router_isis)# show config ! router isis clns host ISIS 49.0000.0001.F100.E120.0013.00 log-adjacency-changes net 49.0000.0001.F100.E120.0013.
PAGE 936
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 937
Example Field Description P This value represents the P bit. This bit is always set to zero as Dell EMC Networking does not support area partition repair. OL This value represents the overload bit, determining congestion. If the overload bit is set, other routers do not use this system as a transit router when calculating routes. The bold sections identify that MultiTopology IS-IS is enabled.
PAGE 938
show isis graceful-restart detail Display detailed IS-IS graceful restart related settings. S4820T Syntax show isis [vrf vrf-name] graceful-restart detail Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Parameters Command History Example vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name if the VRf to display IS-IS graceful restart details corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: If you do not specify this option, the IS-IS graceful restart details corresponding to the default VRF are displayed.
PAGE 939
Restart CSNP rcv count : 0 (level-1), 0 (level-2) Database Sync count : 0 (level-1), 0 (level-2) show isis hostname Display IS-IS host names configured or learned on the switch. S4820T Syntax Parameters show isis [vrf vrf-name] hostname vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display IS-IS host names corresponding to that VRF. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 940
Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display IS-IS interface status information corresponding to that VRF. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
PAGE 941
Number of active level-1 adjacencies: 1 Level-2 Metric: 10, Priority: 64, Circuit ID: systest-3.02 Hello Interval: 10, Hello Multiplier: 3, CSNP Interval: 10 --More-- show isis neighbors Display information about neighboring (adjacent) routers. S4820T Syntax Parameters show isis [vrf vrf-name] neighbors [level-1 | level-2] [detail] [interface] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display adjacent router information corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 942
Usage Information Use this command to confirm that the neighbor adjacencies are operating correctly. If you suspect that they are not, you can verify the specified area addresses of the routers by using the show isis neighbors command. The following describes the show isis neighbors command shown in the following example. Example Field Description System Id The value that identifies a system in an area. Interface The interface, slot, and port in which the router was discovered.
PAGE 943
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 944
● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information 944 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 945
Example Item Description LSP authentication failures Displays the number of LSP authentication failures.
PAGE 946
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for multi-topology ISIS.
PAGE 947
30 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) This section contains commands for Dell EMC Networks’ implementation of the link aggregation control protocol (LACP) for creating dynamic link aggregation groups (LAGs) — known as “port-channels” in the Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: For static LAG commands based on the standards specified in the IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications, see Port Channel Commands .
PAGE 948
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show lacp — display the LACP configuration. debug lacp Debug LACP (configuration, events, and so on).
PAGE 949
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 950
Version Description 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information This command applies to dynamic port-channel interfaces only. When applied on a static port-channel, this command has no effect. Related Commands ● show lacp — display the LACP configuration. lacp port-priority To influence which ports will be put in Standby mode when there is a hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports from aggregating, configure the port priority.
PAGE 951
lacp system-priority Configure the LACP system priority. S4820T Syntax Parameters Defaults lacp system-priority priority-value priority-value Enter the port-priority value. The higher the value number, the lower the priority. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 32768. 32768 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 952
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.
PAGE 953
Example (Port-ChannelNumber) Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show lacp 1 Port-channel 1 admin up, oper up, mode lacp Actor System ID:Priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.
PAGE 954
31 Layer 2 This section describes commands to configure Layer 2 features. Topics: • • • MAC Addressing Commands Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands Far-End Failure Detection (FEFD) MAC Addressing Commands The following commands are related to configuring, managing, and viewing MAC addresses. clear mac-address-table Clear the MAC address table of all MAC address learned dynamically.
PAGE 955
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. mac-address-table aging-time Specify an aging time for MAC addresses to remove from the MAC address table.
PAGE 956
Related Commands ● mac learning-limit — set the MAC address learning limits for a selected interface. ● show mac-address-table aging-time — display the MAC aging time. mac-address-table disable-learning Disable MAC address learning from LACP or LLDP BPDUs. Syntax mac-address-table disable-learning [lacp | lldp] Parameters Defaults lacp Enter lacp to disable MAC address learning from LACP BPDUs. lldp Enter LLDP to disable MAC address learning from LLDP BPDUs.
PAGE 957
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. vlan vlan-id Defaults Enter the keyword vlan then a VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 958
interval seconds Defaults Enter the keyword interval then the number of seconds. The range is from 5 to 60. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 959
Usage Information Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. For more information about using this command, see NIC Teaming in the Layer 2 section of the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. mac learning-limit Limit the maximum number of MAC addresses (static + dynamic) learned on a selected interface.
PAGE 960
Usage Information Version Description 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Added the station-move option. 6.5.1.0 Added support for MAC Learning-Limit on the LAG. This command and its options are supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, LACP LAGs, and VLANs. If you do not specify the vlan option, the MAC address counters are not VLAN-based.
PAGE 961
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 962
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information If you configure mac-learn-limit and the sticky MAC feature is enabled, dynamically learned MAC addresses are converted to sticky for that port. Any new MAC address that is learned also becomes sticky for that port.
PAGE 963
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information This command is supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, and LACP LAGs. Related Commands ● show mac learning-limit — display details of the mac learning-limit.
PAGE 964
mac port-security Enable or disable the port security feature globally in the system. Syntax mac port-security To disable the port security, use the no mac port-security command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.
PAGE 965
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. show cam mac linecard (dynamic or static) Display the CAM size and the portions allocated for MAC addresses and for MAC ACLs.
PAGE 966
Example Version Description 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 967
● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. interface interface-type (OPTIONAL) Instead of entering the keyword interface then the interface type, slot/port information, as above, you can enter the interface type, then just a slot number.
PAGE 968
Example Usage Information Example (Count) Related Commands Column Heading Description Interface Displays the interface type and slot/port information. The following abbreviations describe the interface types: ● Po = port channel ● Te = ten-gigabit Ethernet ● Fo = forty-gigabit Ethernet State Lists if the MAC address is in use (Active) or not in use (Inactive).
PAGE 969
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 970
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 971
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 972
default vlan-id Specify a VLAN as the Default VLAN. S4820T Syntax default vlan-id vlan-id To remove the default VLAN status from a VLAN and VLAN 1 does not exist, use the no default vlan-id vlan-id syntax. Parameters Defaults vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN to become the new Default VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. The default is 1. Default VLAN is VLAN 1. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Related Commands 972 Layer 2 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 973
default-vlan disable Disable the default VLAN so that all switchports are placed in the Null VLAN until they are explicitly configured as a member of another VLAN. S4820T Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 974
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 975
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)# show config ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)# show vlan Display the current VLAN configurations on the switch.
PAGE 976
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1.(0.0) Updated to support OpenFlow. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Augmented to display PVLAN data for the C-Series and S-Series and revised the output to include the Description field to display a user-entered VLAN description. 7.6.1.
PAGE 977
o - OpenFlow untagged, O - OpenFlow tagged G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack i - Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged NUM Status Description Q Ports * 1 Inactive 2 Active U Po1(Te 1/1) T Po20(Te 1/6), Te 1/25 T Te 1/7 3 Active T Po20(Te 1/6) T Te 1/7 U Te 1/1 4 Active U Po2(Te 1/2) T Po20(Te 1/6) T Te 1/7 5 Active T Po20(Te 1/6) T Te 1/7 U Te 1/3 6 Active U Po3(Te 1/4) T Po20(Te 1/6) T Te 1/7 7 Active T Po20(Te 1/6) T Te 1/7 U Te 1/5 P 100 Active T Po1(Te 1/1) T Te 1/2 C 10
PAGE 978
Example (Name) Dellconf)# interface vlan 222 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-222)#name test DellEMC(conf-if-vl-222)#do show vlan name test Codes: Q: U x G - * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM Status Description 222 Inactive DellEMC(conf-if-vl-222)# Example (OpenFlow instance) * O O O Related Commands NUM 1 3 6 8 12 Status Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Q Ports U Te 1/22 Description Q Ports O Te 1/10 ● vlan-stack
PAGE 979
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 980
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 981
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 982
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 983
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 984
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Legacy E-Series command. Usage Information FEFD disable command on the interface prevents the interface from running FEFD when FEFD is enabled globally. Related Commands ● fefd reset — clear an interface in Err-disabled state. It doesn’t work until the interface is in errdisabled state. ● fefd mode — change FEFD mode on an interface.
PAGE 985
fefd mode Change the FEFD mode on an interface. Syntax fefd mode {normal | aggressive}] To return the FEFD mode to the default of normal, use the no fefd mode command. Parameters Defaults normal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword normal to change the link state to “unknown” when a far-end failure the software detects on that interface. When the interface is placed in “unknown” state, the software brings down the line protocol.
PAGE 986
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 987
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Legacy E-Series command. Related Commands ● fefd — enable far-end failure detection. ● fefd-global — enable FEFD globally on the system. fefd-global Enable FEFD globally on the system.
PAGE 988
Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. Legacy E-Series command. Usage Information Related Commands If you enter only the fefd-global syntax, the mode is normal and the default interval is 15 seconds. If you disable FEFD globally (no fefd-global), the system does not remove the FEFD interface configuration. ● fefd — enable far-end failure detection. ● fefd-global interval — configure an interval between FEFD control packets. ● show fefd — display the FEFD command output.
PAGE 989
Field Description Interface Displays the interfaces type and number. Mode Displays the mode (aggressive or normal) or NA if the interface contains fefd reset in its configuration. Interval Displays the interval between FEFD packets. State Displays the state of the interface and can be one of the following: ● bi-directional (interface is up, connected and hearing neighbor’s echoes).
PAGE 990
32 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) The link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) advertises connectivity and management from the local station to the adjacent stations on an IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP facilitates multi-vendor interoperability by using standard management tools to discover and make available a physical topology for network management. The Dell EMC Networking operating software implementation of LLDP is based on IEEE standard 801.1ab.
PAGE 991
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 992
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. advertise interface-port-desc Advertise port descriptor.
PAGE 993
Parameters Defaults managementaddress Enter the keyword management-address to advertise the management IP address TLVs to the LLDP peer. systemcapabilities Enter the keywords system-capabilities to advertise the system capabilities TLVs to the LLDP peer. systemdescription Enter the keywords system-description to advertise the system description TLVs to the LLDP peer. system-name Enter the keywords system-name to advertise the system name TLVs to the LLDP peer.
PAGE 994
system-name Defaults Enter the keywords system-name to advertise the system name TLVs to the specified interface. None Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-interface-lldp) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.
PAGE 995
Version Description 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. clear lldp neighbors Clear LLDP neighbor information for all interfaces or a specific interface.
PAGE 996
debug lldp interface To display timer events, neighbor additions or deletions, and other information about incoming and outgoing packets, enable LLDP debugging. S4820T Syntax debug lldp interface {interface | all}{events | packet {brief | detail} {tx | rx | both}} To disable debugging, use the no debug lldp [interface {interface | all}{events} {packet {brief | detail} {tx | rx | both}}] command.
PAGE 997
Example Version Description 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 998
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● protocol lldp (Configuration) — enable LLDP globally. ● debug lldp interface — debug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors.
PAGE 999
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. mode To receive or transmit, set LLDP. S4820T Syntax mode {tx | rx} To return to the default, use the no mode command. Parameters Defaults tx Enter the keyword tx to set the mode to transmit. rx Enter the keyword rx to set the mode to receive. Both transmit and receive.
PAGE 1000
multiplier Set the multiple of the hello timer before LLDP declares the interface dead. S4820T Syntax multiplier number To return to the default, use the no multiplier command. Parameters Defaults integer Enter the number of consecutive misses before the LLDP declares the interface dead. The range is from 2 to 10. 4 Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1001
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1002
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Before LLDP can be configured on an interface, it must be enabled globally from CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 1003
Usage Information Example Example (Detail) Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1.(0.0) Modified output of detail parameter to display remote management IP addresses. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.
PAGE 1004
Information valid for next 43 seconds Time since last information change of this neighbor: 00:01:17 UnknownTLVList: ( 9, 4) ( 10, 4) ( 11, 4) ( 12, 4) ( 13, 4) ( 14, 4) ( 15, 4) 18, 4) ( 19, 4) ( 20, 4) ( 21, 4) ( 22, 4) ( 23, 4) ( 24, 4) ( 25, 4) 28, 4) ( 29, 4) ( 30, 4) ( 31, 4) ( 32, 4) ( 33, 4) ( 34, 4) ( 35, 4) 38, 4) ( 39, 4) ( 40, 4) ( 41, 4) ( 42, 4) ( 43, 4) ( 44, 4) ( 45, 4) 48, 4) ( 49, 4) ( 50, 4) ( 51, 4) ( 52, 4) ( 53, 4) ( 54, 4) ( 55, 4) 58, 4) ( 59, 4) ( 60, 4) ( 61, 4) ( 62, 4) ( 63, 4) (
PAGE 1005
Total Frames Discarded: 0 Total In Error Frames: 0 Total Unrecognized TLVs: 1056 Total TLVs Discarded: 0 Next packet will be sent after 16 seconds The neighbors are given below: ----------------------------------------------------------------------Remote Chassis ID Subtype: Mac address (4) Remote Chassis ID: 4c:76:25:f4:ab:01 Remote Port Subtype: Interface name (5) Remote Port ID: fortyGigE 1/2/8/1 Local Port ID: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 Locally assigned remote Neighbor Index: 1 Remote TTL: 300 Information va
PAGE 1006
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1007
Example DellEMC# show running-config lldp ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description hello 15 multiplier 3 no disable DellEMC# LLDP-MED Commands The following are the LLDP-MED (Media Endpoint Discovery) commands. Dell EMC Networking OS LLDP-MED commands are an extension of the set of LLDP TLV advertisement commands.
PAGE 1008
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1009
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.
PAGE 1010
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series.
PAGE 1011
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Usage Information Advertise the Extended Power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.3af powered, LLDP-MED endpoint device. Related Commands debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors.
PAGE 1012
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. ● debug lldp interface — debug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors. advertise med streaming-video To advertise streaming video services for broadcast or multicast-based video, configure the system. This command does not include video applications that rely on TCP buffering.
PAGE 1013
Related Commands Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. ● debug lldp interface — debug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors. advertise med video-conferencing To advertise dedicated video conferencing and other similar appliances that support real-time interactive video, configure the system.
PAGE 1014
Related Commands ● debug lldp interface — debug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors. advertise med video-signaling To advertise video control packets that use a separate network policy than video data, configure the system. S4820T Syntax advertise med video-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med video-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command.
PAGE 1015
advertise med voice To advertise a dedicated IP telephony handset or other appliances supporting interactive voice services, configure the system. S4820T Syntax advertise med voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority.
PAGE 1016
advertise med voice-signaling To advertise when voice control packets use a separate network policy than voice data, configure the system. S4820T Syntax advertise med voice-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority.
PAGE 1017
33 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. Microsoft NLB clustering allows multiple servers running Microsoft Windows to be represented by one MAC and one IP address to provide transparent failover and load-balancing.
PAGE 1018
Related Commands ● clear arp-cache — clear dynamic ARP entries from the ARP table. ● show arp — display the ARP table. mac-address-table static (for Multicast MAC Address) For multicast mode of network load balancing (NLB), configure a static multicast MAC address, associate the multicast MAC address with the VLAN used to switch Layer 2 multicast traffic, and add output ports that will receive multicast streams on the VLAN.
PAGE 1019
Example (Multicast) Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.3(0.0) Added support for multicast MAC address on the MXL platform. mac-address-table static 01:00:5E:01:00:01 {multicast vlan 2 output— range Te 1/2,Te 1/3 ip vlan-flooding Enable unicast data traffic flooding on VLAN member ports.
PAGE 1020
34 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) connects multiple PIM sparse-mode (PIM-SM) domains together. MSDP peers connect using TCP port 639. Peers send keepalives every 60 seconds. A peer connection is reset after 75 seconds if no MSDP packets are received. MSDP connections are parallel with MBGP connections. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports MSDP commands on the S4820T platform.
PAGE 1021
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.
PAGE 1022
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added the local option. 7.7.1.0 Added the rejected-sa option. 6.2.1.1 Introduced clear ip msdp statistic Clears the entire source-active cache, the source-active entries of a particular multicast group, rejected, or local source-active entries.
PAGE 1023
debug ip msdp Turn on MSDP debugging. S4820T Syntax debug ip msdp {event peer address | packet peer address | pim} To turn debugging off, use the no debug ip msdp {event peer address | packet peer address | pim} command. Parameters Defaults event peer address Enter the keyword event then the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). packet peer address Enter the keyword packet then the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.).
PAGE 1024
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1025
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added the list option and removed the prefix-list option. 7.4.1.
PAGE 1026
Version Description 6.2.1.1 Introduced ip msdp mesh-group To be a member of a mesh group, configure a peer. S4820T Syntax ip msdp mesh-group {name} {peer address} To remove the peer from a mesh group, use the no ip msdp mesh-group {name} {peer address} command. Parameters Defaults name Enter a string of up to 16 characters long for as the mesh group name. peer address Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). Not configured.
PAGE 1027
ip msdp originator-id Configure the MSDP Originator ID. S4820T Syntax ip msdp originator-id {interface} To remove the originator-id, use the no ip msdp originator-id {interface} command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1028
ip msdp peer Configure an MSDP peer. S4820T Syntax ip msdp peer peer address [connect-source] [description] [sa-limit number] To remove the MSDP peer, use the no ip msdp peer peer address [connect-source interface] [description name] [sa-limit number] command. Parameters peer address Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.).
PAGE 1029
Usage Information Version Description 6.2.1.1 Introduced The connect-source option is used to supply a source IP address for the TCP connection. When an interface is specified using the connect-source option, the primary configured address on the interface is used. If the total number of SA messages received from the peer is already larger than the limit when this command is applied, those SA messages continue to be accepted.
PAGE 1030
To apply the redistribute filter to entries already present in the SA cache, use the clear ip msdp sa-cache local command. ip msdp sa-filter Permit or deny MSDP source active (SA) messages based on multicast source and/or group from the specified peer. S4820T Syntax ip msdp sa-filter {in | out} peer-address list [access-list name] Remove this configuration using the no ip msdp sa-filter {in | out} peer address list [access-list name] command.
PAGE 1031
ip msdp sa-limit Configure the upper limit of source-active (SA) entries in SA-cache. S4820T Syntax ip msdp sa-limit number To return to the default, use the no ip msdp sa-limit number command. Parameters Defaults number Enter the maximum number of SA entries in SA-cache. The range is from 1 to 500000. 50000 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1032
ip msdp shutdown Administratively shut down a configured MSDP peer. S4820T Syntax ip msdp shutdown {peer address} Parameters Defaults peer address Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1033
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1034
Example Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.1 Introduced DellEMC# show ip msdp peer 100.1.1.1 Peer Addr: 100.1.1.1 Local Addr: 100.1.1.
PAGE 1035
Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. 7.4.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 1036
35 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP), as implemented by the Dell EMC Networking OS, conforms to IEEE 802.1s. This command supports the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1037
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug MSTP events. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.
PAGE 1038
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1039
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 1040
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Introduced. ● forward-delay — amount of time the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State before transitioning to the Forwarding State. ● max-age — change the wait time before MSTP refreshes protocol configuration information.
PAGE 1041
Related Commands ● forward-delay — amount of time the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State before transitioning to the Forwarding State. ● hello-time — change the time interval between BPDUs. max-hops Configure the maximum hop count. S4820T Syntax max-hops number To return to the default values, use the no max-hops command. Parameters Defaults range Enter a number for the maximum hop count. The range is from 1 to 40. The default is 20.
PAGE 1042
Parameters msti instance Enter the MSTP instance. The range is from zero (0) to 63. vlan range Enter the keyword vlan then the identifier range value. The range is from 1 to 4094. bridge-priority priority Enter the keywords bridge-priority then a value in increments of 4096 as the bridge priority. The range is from zero (0) to 61440. Valid priority values are: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, and 61440. All other values are rejected.
PAGE 1043
Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1044
The command behavior does not change when a new member port is added to the port-channel or an existing member port is deleted from the configuration. The path cost reflects the cumulative speed of the port-channel member ports. Example DELLEMC(conf)#protocol spanning-tree pvst DELLEMC(conf-pvst)#port-channel path-cost custom protocol spanning-tree mstp To enable and configure the multiple spanning tree group, enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode.
PAGE 1045
revision The revision number for the multiple spanning tree configuration. Syntax revision range To return to the default values, use the no revision command. Parameters Defaults range Enter the revision number for the MST configuration. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 0. 0 Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1046
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1047
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1048
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Support for the optional keyword guard was added on the C-Series, S-Series, and E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1049
Root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 20 Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8 We are the root of MSTI 0 (CIST) Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 20 CIST regional root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8 CIST external path cost 0 Interface Designated Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID ---------------------------------------------------------Te 1/1 128.
PAGE 1050
spanning-tree Enable the multiple spanning tree protocol on the interface. S4820T Syntax spanning-tree To disable the multiple spanning tree protocol on the interface, use the no spanning-tree command. Parameters Defaults spanning-tree Enter the keywords spanning-tree to enable the MSTP on the interface. Enable. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1051
Defaults cost cost (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cost then the port cost value. The range is from 1 to 200000.
PAGE 1052
Parameters mstp edge-port Enter the keyword mstp then the keywords edge-port to configure the interface as a Multiple Spanning Tree edge port. bpduguard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface into forwarding mode immediately after the root fails. Enter the keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU.
PAGE 1053
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1054
36 Multicast The multicast commands are supported by Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • IPv4 Multicast Commands IPv4 Multicast Commands The following section contains the IPv4 multicast commands. clear ip mroute Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table. To clear the protocol-independent multicast (PIM) tree information base, use the clear ip pim tib command.
PAGE 1055
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● show ip pim tib — show the PIM tree information base. ip mroute Assign a static mroute.
PAGE 1056
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1057
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This feature allows you to limit the number of multicast entries on the system. This number is the total of all the multicast entries on all line cards in the system.
PAGE 1058
Version Description E-Series legacy command Usage Information After you enable multicast, you can enable IGMP and PIM on an interface. In INTERFACE mode, enter the ip pim sparse-mode command to enable IGMP and PIM on the interface. Related Commands ● ip pim sparse-mode — enable IGMP and PIM on an interface. mtrace Trace a multicast route from the source to the receiver.
PAGE 1059
|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/Mask| ----------------------------------------------------------------0 1.1.1.1 --> Destination -1 1.1.1.1 PIM Reached RP/Core 103.103.103.0/24 -2 101.101.101.102 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source -----------------------------------------------------------------The mtrace command traverses the path of the response data block in the reverse direction of the multicast data traffic.
PAGE 1060
Version Description E-Series legacy command Example DellEMC# show ip multicast-cam stack-unit 1 port 0 Vrf Id Group Address Source Address Vlan Id L3 Ports ----------------------------------------------------0 224.1.1.1 0.0.0.0 1000 gi 1/10, 0 224.1.1.2 0.0.0.0 1000 gi 1/10, 0 224.1.1.1 165.13.34.5 2000 gi 1/11, IPMC index ------------ L2 Ports ------------ 1 gi 1/3, 1 gi 1/3, 2 gi 1/5, show ip mroute View the multicast routing table.
PAGE 1061
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2.(0.
PAGE 1062
Vlan 20 (S) Vlan 30 (50.1.1.2, 225.1.1.1), uptime 00:39:33 flags: S Incoming interface: Vlan 10 Spanned outgoing interface list: Vlan 20 (S) Usage Information Example The following describes the show ip mroute command shown in the following example. Field Description (S, G) Displays the forwarding entry in the multicast route table. uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the multicast forwarding table.
PAGE 1063
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 1064
37 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) The neighbor discovery protocol for IPv6 is defined in RFC 2461 as part of the Stateless Address Autoconfiguration protocol. It replaces the Address Resolution Protocol used with IPv4.
PAGE 1065
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1066
● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. ● For a tunnel interface, enter the keyword tunnel then the tunnel interface number. The range is from 1 to 16383.
PAGE 1067
show ipv6 neighbors Display IPv6 discovery information. Entering the command without options shows all IPv6 neighbor addresses stored on the control processor (CP). S4820T Syntax Parameters show ipv6 neighbors [vrf vrf-name] [ipv6-address| interface interface] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf and the name of the VRF to display the neighbors corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: If you do not specify this option, neighbors corresponding to the default VRF are displayed.
PAGE 1068
Example Version Description 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. DellEMC# show ipv6 neighbors IPv6 Address Expires(min) Hardware Address State Interface VLAN CPU -------------------------------------------------------------------100::1 0.03 00:00:00:00:00:22 DELAY Te 1/12 CP fe80::200:ff:fe00:22 232 00:00:00:00:00:22 STALE Te 1/12 CP 500::1 0.60 00:01:e8:17:5c:af REACH Te 1/13 CP fe80::200:ff:fe00:17 232 00:00:00:00:00:29 REACH Te 1/14 CP 900::1 0.60 00:01:e8:17:5c:b1 STALE Po 23 CP 400::1 0.
PAGE 1069
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9000 switches. device–role Specify the role of the device attached to the port.
PAGE 1070
hop–limit Enable the verification of the advertised hop count limit. If this command is not configured, the verification process is bypassed. Syntax hop-limit {maximum | minimum limit} To reset the hop count limit, use the no hop-limit {maximum | minimum limit} command. Parameters Defaults maximum limit Enter the keyword maximum then the hop limit value. The range is from 0 to 254. minimum limit Enter the keyword minimum then the hop limit value. The range is from 0 to 254.
PAGE 1071
Related Commands Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9000 switches.
PAGE 1072
Parameters policy policy- name Defaults Enter the keyword policy then the policy-name. The policy name allows a maximum of 140 characters. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148.
PAGE 1073
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, and Z9000 switches. ● ipv6 nd ra-guard enable — configure the RA guard related commands. ● ipv6 nd raguard policy policy-name — define the router advertisement (RA) guard policy name and enter the RA guard policy configuration mode. match ra Enable verifying either of the configured source IPv6 address or prefix address or the source MAC address in the inspected messages.
PAGE 1074
mtu Enable the verification of the configured maximum transmission unit (MTU) value in the received RA packets. Syntax mtu value To reset the MTU value, use the no mtu value command. Parameters Defaults value Enter the maximum transmission unit value in bytes. The range is from 1,280 to 11,982 bytes. 0 Command Modes POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1075
Related Commands Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1076
● ipv6 nd raguard policy policy-name — define the RA guard policy name and enter the RA guard policy configuration mode. retrans-time Enable the verification of the configured retransmission timer value in the received RA packets. Syntax retrans—timer value To reset the advertised retransmission interval, use the no retrans-timervalue command. Parameters Defaults value Enter the advertised retransmission time interval in milliseconds. The range is from 100 to 4,294,967,295 milliseconds.
PAGE 1077
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9000 switches.
PAGE 1078
Related Commands ● ipv6 nd ra-guard enable — configure the RA guard related commands. ● ipv6 nd raguard policy policy-name — define the router advertisement (RA) guard policy name and enter the RA guard policy configuration mode. show config Display the RA guard policy mode configurations. Syntax show config Command Modes POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1079
● router-preference maximum — enable the verification of the advertised default router preference (DRP) value. ● trusted-port — apply the policy to trusted ports. show ipv6 nd ra–guard policy Display the configurations applied on all the RA guard policies or a specific RA guard policy. Syntax Parameter show ipv6 nd ra-guard policy policy-name policy policy- name Enter the keyword policy then the policy name. The policy name allows a maximum of 140 characters.
PAGE 1080
● retrans-timer — set the advertised retransmission time. ● router-preference maximum — enable the verification of the advertised default router preference (DRP) value. ● trusted-port — apply the policy to trusted ports. ● ipv6 nd raguard attach-policy — apply the IPv6 RA guard to a specific interface. trusted–port Allow bypassing the configured RA guard validation and forwards the RA packets received on the interface, which has the trusted port policy attached.
PAGE 1081
38 Object Tracking Object Tracking supports IPv4 and IPv6, and is available on the Dell EMC Networking platforms. Object tracking allows you to define objects of interest, monitor their state, and report to a client when a change in an object’s state occurs.
PAGE 1082
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced. DellEMC# debug track all 04:35:04: %RPM0-P:RP2 %OTM-5-STATE: track 6 - Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 line-protocol DOWN 04:35:04: %RPM0-P:RP2 %OTM-5-NOTIF: VRRP notification: resource ID 6 DOWN delay Configure the time delay used before communicating a change in the status of a tracked object to clients.
PAGE 1083
If the timer expires and an object’s state has changed, a notification is sent to the client. If no delay is configured, a notification is sent immediately after a change in the state of a tracked object is detected. The time delay in communicating a state change is specified in seconds. Related Commands ● track interface ip routing – configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv4 Layer 3 interface.
PAGE 1084
Parameters object-id (OPTIONAL) Display information on the specified tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series.
PAGE 1085
show track Display information about tracked objects, including configuration, current tracked state (UP or DOWN), and the clients which are tracking an object. Syntax Parameters show track [object-id [brief] | interface [brief] [vrf vrf-name] | ip route [brief] [vrf vrf-name] | resolution | vrf vrf-name [brief] | brief] object-id (OPTIONAL) Display information on the specified tracked object. The range is 1 to 500.
PAGE 1086
Example Output Description First hop interface Displays the type and slot/port number of the first-hop interface of the tracked route. Tracked by Client that is tracking an object’s state; for example, VRRP. DellEMC# show track Track 1 IP route 23.0.0.
PAGE 1087
To return to the default setting, use the no threshold metric {up number | down number} command. Parameters Defaults up number Enter a number for the UP threshold to be applied to the scaled metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. The default UP threshold is 254. The routing state is UP if the scaled route metric is less than or equal to the UP threshold. down number Enter a number for the DOWN threshold to be applied to the scaled metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. The default DOWN threshold is255.
PAGE 1088
track interface ip routing Configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv4 Layer 3 interface. Syntax track object-id interface interface ip routing To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters Defaults object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. interface Enter one of the following values: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1089
To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters Defaults object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. interface Enter one of the following values: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
PAGE 1090
vrf vrf-name Defaults (Optional) E-Series only: You can configure a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) instance to specify the virtual routing table to which the tracked route belongs. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1091
To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters Defaults object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. ip-address/ prefix-len Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format. The valid IPv4 prefix lengths are from /0 to /32. vrf vrf-name (Optional) You can configure a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) instance to specify the virtual routing table to which the tracked route belongs.
PAGE 1092
Usage Information Use this command to create an object that tracks the reachability of an IPv4 route. In order for a route’s reachability to be tracked, the route must appear as an entry in the routing table. A tracked IPv4 route is considered to match an entry in the routing table only if the exact IPv4 address and prefix length match a table entry. For example, when configured as a tracked route, 10.0.0.0/24 does not match the routing table entry 10.0.0.0/8.
PAGE 1093
track resolution ip route Configure the protocol-specific resolution value used to scale an IPv4 route metric. Syntax track resolution ip route {isis resolution-value | ospf resolution-value} To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. isis resolution- Enter the resolution used to convert the metric in the routing table for ISIS routes to a scaled metric.
PAGE 1094
IPv6 Object Tracking Commands The following section describes the IPv6 object tracking commands. The following object tracking commands apply to IPv4 and IPv6: ● debug track ● delay ● description ● show running-config track ● threshold metric ● track interface line-protocol show track ipv6 route Display information about all tracked IPv6 routes, including configuration, current tracked state (UP or DOWN), and the clients which are tracking an object.
PAGE 1095
Example Output Description First hop interface Displays the type and slot/port number of the first-hop interface of the tracked route. Tracked by Client that is tracking an object’s state; for example, VRRP.
PAGE 1096
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a tunnel interface, enter the keyword tunnel. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 1097
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1098
ipv6-address/ prefix-len Defaults Enter an IPv6 address in X:X:X:X::X format. The valid IPv6 prefix lengths are from /0 to / 128. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1099
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1100
39 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open Shortest Path First version 2 for IPv4 is supported on platform. OSPF is an interior gateway protocol (IGP), which means that it distributes routing information between routers in a single autonomous system (AS). OSPF is also a link-state protocol in which all routers contain forwarding tables derived from information about their links to their neighbors.
PAGE 1101
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1102
Version Description 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the remaining DNOS platforms. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1103
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 1104
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1105
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. clear ip ospf Clear all OSPF routing tables.
PAGE 1106
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. clear ip ospf statistics Clear the packet statistics in interfaces and neighbors.
PAGE 1107
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. debug ip ospf Display debug information on OSPF. Entering the debug ip ospf commands enables OSPF debugging for the first OSPF process.
PAGE 1108
Usage Information 1108 Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Added the database-timer rate-limit option for the S4810. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1109
Field Description ● MC+ (bit used by MOSPF is set and router is able to forward IP multicast packets) ● MC- (bit used by MOSPF is not set and router cannot forward IP multicast packets) ● E + (router is able to accept AS External LSAs) ● E - (router cannot accept AS External LSAs) ● T + (router can support TOS) ● T - (router cannot support TOS) Example hi: Displays the amount of time configured for the HELLO interval. di: Displays the amount of time configured for the DEAD interval.
PAGE 1110
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 1111
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. description Add a description about the selected OSPF configuration. S4820T Syntax description description To remove the OSPF description, use the no description command.
PAGE 1112
Related Commands Version Description pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show ip ospf asbr — display the VLAN configuration. distance Define an administrative distance for particular routes to a specific IP address. S4820T Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask access-list-name] To delete the settings, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask access-list-name] command. Parameters weight Specify an administrative distance. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 110.
PAGE 1113
distance ospf Configure an OSPF distance metric for different types of routes. S4820T Syntax distance ospf [external dist3] [inter-area dist2] [intra-area dist1] To delete these settings, use the no distance ospf command. Parameters Defaults external dist3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword external then a number to specify a distance for external type 5 and 7 routes. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 110.
PAGE 1114
distribute-list in Apply a filter to incoming routing updates from OSPF to the routing table. S4820T Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] To delete a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] command. Parameters Defaults prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list.
PAGE 1115
distribute-list out To restrict certain routes destined for the local routing table after the SPF calculation, apply a filter. S4820T Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip | static] To remove a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip | static] command. Parameters Defaults prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list. bgp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bgp to specify that BGP routes are distributed.
PAGE 1116
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The distribute-list out command applies to routes autonomous system boundary routers (ASBRs) redistributes into OSPF. It can be applied to external type 2 and external type 1 routes, but not to intra-area and inter-area routes.
PAGE 1117
Defaults None. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1118
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1119
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Restart role enabled on the S-Series (Both Helper and Restart roles now supported on S-Series). Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.7.1.
PAGE 1120
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. graceful-restart role Specify the role for your OSPF router during graceful restart. S4820T Syntax graceful-restart role [helper-only | restart-only] To disable graceful restart role, use the no graceful-restart role command.
PAGE 1121
Version Description pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ip ospf auth-change-wait-time OSPF provides a grace period while OSPF changes its interface authentication type. During the grace period, OSPF sends out packets with new and old authentication scheme until the grace period expires. S4820T Syntax ip ospf auth-change-wait-time seconds To return to the default, use the no ip ospf auth-change-wait-time command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the seconds. The range is from 0 to 300.
PAGE 1122
To delete an authentication key, use the no ip ospf authentication-key command. Parameters Defaults encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter 7 to encrypt the key. key Enter an eight-character string. Strings longer than eight characters are truncated. Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1123
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1124
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.
PAGE 1125
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information The time interval between the hello packets must be the same for routers in a network.
PAGE 1126
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. You can configure a maximum of six digest keys on an interface. Of the available six digest keys, the switches select the MD5 key that is common. The remaining MD5 keys are unused.
PAGE 1127
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ip ospf network Set the network type for the interface. S4820T Syntax ip ospf network {broadcast | point-to-point} To return to the default, use the no ip ospf network command. Parameters Defaults broadcast Enter the keyword broadcast to designate the interface as part of a broadcast network.
PAGE 1128
ip ospf priority To determine the designated router for the OSPF network, set the priority of the interface. S4820T Syntax ip ospf priority number To return to the default setting, use the no ip ospf priority command. Parameters Defaults number Enter a number as the priority. The range is from 0 to 255. The default is 1. 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1129
Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds as the interval between retransmission. The range is from 1 to 3600. The default is 5 seconds. This interval must be greater than the expected round-trip time for a packet to travel between two routers. Defaults 5 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 1130
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1131
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. maximum-paths Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths.
PAGE 1132
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. network area Define which interfaces run OSPF and the OSPF area for those interfaces. S4820T Syntax network ip-address mask area area-id To disable an OSPF area, use the no network ip-address mask area area-id command.
PAGE 1133
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. To enable OSPF on an interface, the network area command must include, in its range of addresses, the primary IP address of an interface. NOTE: An interface can be attached only to a single OSPF area. If you delete all the network area commands for Area 0, the show ip ospf command output does not list Area 0.
PAGE 1134
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Modified to include the keyword default. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Although the passive interface does not send or receive routing updates, the network on that interface is still included in OSPF updates sent using other interfaces.
PAGE 1135
Parameters connected Enter the keyword connected to specify that information from active routes on interfaces is redistributed. isis Enter the keyword isis to specify that ISO IS-IS information is redistributed. ospf Enter the keyword ospf to specify that information corresponding to OSPF is redistributes. rip Enter the keyword rip to specify that RIP routing information is redistributed. static Enter the keyword static to specify that information from static routes is redistributed.
PAGE 1136
Related Commands ● default-information originate — generate a default route into the OSPF routing domain. redistribute bgp Redistribute BGP routing information throughout the OSPF instance. Syntax redistribute bgp as number [metric metric-value] | [metric-type type-value] | [tag tag-value] To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute bgp as number [metric metric-value] | [metric-type type-value] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value] command.
PAGE 1137
Version Description pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. redistribute isis Redistribute IS-IS routing information throughout the OSPF instance. Syntax redistribute isis [tag] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metricvalue | metric-type type-value] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value] To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute isis [tag] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value | metric-type type-value] [route-map mapname] [tag tag-value] command.
PAGE 1138
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. router-id To configure a fixed router ID, use this command. Syntax router-id ip-address To remove the fixed router ID, use the no router-id ip-address command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter the router ID in the IP address format. None.
PAGE 1139
Example DellEMC(conf)# router ospf 100 DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)#router-id 1.1.1.1 Changing router-id will bring down existing OSPF adjacency [y/n]: DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)#show config ! router ospf 100 router-id 1.1.1.1 DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)# no router-id Changing router-id will bring down existing OSPF adjacency [y/n]: DellEMC# router ospf To configure an OSPF instance, enter ROUTER OSPF mode.
PAGE 1140
Usage Information You must have an IP address assigned to an interface to enter ROUTER OSPF mode and configure OSPF. You can create only one OSPFv2 process per VRF. After the OSPF process and the VRF are tied together, you cannot use the OSPF Process ID again in the system. Example DellEMC(conf)# router ospf 2 DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)# show config Display the non-default values in the current OSPF configuration.
PAGE 1141
show ip ospf Display information on the OSPF process configured on the switch. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf [process-id | vrf vrf name] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. vrf vrf name Show only the OSPF information tied to the VRF process. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1142
Line Beginning with Description “Supports only...” Displays the number of Type of Service (TOS) rouse supported. “SPF schedule...” Displays the delay and hold time configured for this process ID. “Convergence Level” Example “Min LSA....” Displays the intervals set for LSA transmission and acceptance. “Number of...” Displays the number and type of areas configured for this process ID. DellEMC# show ip ospf 10 Routing Process ospf 10 with ID 1.1.1.
PAGE 1143
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support of Multi-Process OSPF. 7.8.1.0 Added the process-id option, in support of Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1144
Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 1145
0.0.0.0 1.1.1.1 10.1.1.0 10.1.2.0 10.2.2.0 10.2.3.0 10.2.4.0 11.1.1.0 11.1.2.0 12.1.2.0 13.1.1.0 13.1.2.0 172.16.1.0 DellEMC> Related Commands 192.68.135.2 192.68.135.2 11.1.2.1 11.1.2.1 11.1.2.1 11.1.2.1 13.1.1.1 11.1.2.1 11.1.2.1 192.68.135.2 13.1.1.1 13.1.1.1 13.1.1.
PAGE 1146
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip ospf database asbr-summary command shown in the following example.
PAGE 1147
LS type: Summary Asbr Link State ID: 104.1.50.1 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10 LS Seq Number: 0x80000010 Checksum: 0x4198 Length: 28 --More-Related Commands ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information. show ip ospf database external Display information on the AS external (type 5) LSAs. S4820T Syntax Parameters show ip ospf [process-id | vrf vrf-name ] database external [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
PAGE 1148
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip ospf process-id database external command shown in the following example. Field Description LS Age Displays the LSA’s age.
PAGE 1149
Length: 36 Network Mask: /32 Metrics Type: 2 TOS: 0 Metrics: 25 Forward Address: 0.0.0.0 External Route Tag: 43 LS age: 1868 Options: (No TOS-capability, DC) LS type: Type-5 AS External Link State ID: 24.216.12.0 Advertising Router: 20.20.20.8 LS Seq Number: 0x80000005 Checksum: 0xa00e Length: 36 Network Mask: /24 Metrics Type: 2 TOS: 0 Metrics: 1 Forward Address: 0.0.0.0 External Route Tag: 701 DellEMC# Related Commands ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information.
PAGE 1150
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 1151
Advertising Router: 20.20.20.8 LS Seq Number: 0x80000006 Checksum: 0xa35 Length: 36 Network Mask: /24 Attached Router: 20.20.20.8 Attached Router: 20.20.20.9 Attached Router: 20.20.20.7 Network (Area 0.0.0.1) LS age: 252 Options: (TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Network Link State ID: 192.10.10.2 Advertising Router: 192.10.10.2 LS Seq Number: 0x80000007 Checksum: 0x4309 Length: 36 Network Mask: /24 Attached Router: 192.10.10.2 Attached Router: 20.20.20.1 Attached Router: 20.20.20.
PAGE 1152
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1153
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.
PAGE 1154
LS type: Type-10 Opaque Link Area Link State ID: 1.0.0.1 Advertising Router: 10.16.1.160 LS Seq Number: 0x80000416 Checksum: 0x376 Length: 28 Opaque Type: 1 Opaque ID: 1 Unable to display opaque data LS age: 833 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Type-10 Opaque Link Area Link State ID: 1.0.0.2 Advertising Router: 10.16.1.160 LS Seq Number: 0x80000002 Checksum: 0x19c2 --More-Related Commands ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information.
PAGE 1155
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information. show ip ospf database opaque-link Display the opaque-link (type 9) LSA information.
PAGE 1156
Related Commands Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information.
PAGE 1157
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added supported for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.20 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1158
Router (Area 0) LS age: 967 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Router Link State ID: 1.1.1.10 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10 LS Seq Number: 0x8000012f Checksum: 0x3357 Length: 144 AS Boundary Router Area Border Router Number of Links: 10 Link connected to: a Transit Network (Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.129.1 (Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.129.1 Number of TOS metric: 0 TOS 0 Metric: 1 Link connected to: a Transit Network (Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.130.
PAGE 1159
link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following: ● the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs ● the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs ● the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs adv-router ip- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router then the IP address of an Advertising Router to display only the LSA information about that router.
PAGE 1160
Example Item Description Advertising Router Identifies the router ID of the LSA’s originating router. LS Seq Number Displays the link state sequence number. This number allows you to identify old or duplicate LSAs. Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of an LSA’s complete contents. Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA. Network Mask Displays the network mask implemented on the area. TOS Displays the TOS options. Option 0 is the only option. Metric Displays the LSA metrics.
PAGE 1161
show ip ospf interface Display the OSPF interfaces configured. If OSPF is not enabled on the switch, no output is generated. S4820T Syntax Parameters show ip ospf [process-id | vrf vrf-name] interface [interface] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to show the OSPF processes that are tied to a specific VRF.
PAGE 1162
Usage Information The following describes the show ip ospf process-id interface command shown in the following example. Item Description GigabitEthernet.. This line identifies the interface type slot/port and the status of the OSPF protocol . on that interface. Internet Address... This line displays the IP address, network mask and area assigned to this interface. Process ID... This line displays the OSPF Process ID, Router ID, Network type and cost metric for this interface. Transmit Delay...
PAGE 1163
show ip ospf neighbor Display the OSPF neighbors connected to the local router. S4820T Syntax Parameters show ip ospf [process-id | vrf vrf-name ] neighbor process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to show information corresponding to the OSPF neighbors that are tied to a specific VRF.
PAGE 1164
Example Item Description Area Displays the neighbor’s area (process ID). DellEMC# show ip ospf 34 neighbor Neighbor ID 20.20.20.7 192.10.10.2 20.20.20.1 DellEMC# Pri State Dead Time Address 1 FULL/DR 00:00:32 182.10.10.3 1 FULL/DR 00:00:37 192.10.10.2 1 FULL/DROTHER00:00:36 192.10.10.4 Interface Area Te 1/1 0.0.0.2 Te 1/2 0.0.0.1 Te 1/3 0.0.0.1 show ip ospf routes Display routes OSPF calculates and stores in OSPF RIB.
PAGE 1165
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. This command is useful in isolating routing problems between the OSPF and the RTM. For example, if a route is missing from the RTM/FIB but is visible from the display output of this command, the problem is with downloading the route to the RTM. This command has the following limitations: ● The display output is sorted by prefixes; intra-area ECMP routes are not displayed together.
PAGE 1166
neighbor routerid Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword neighbor then the neighbor’s router-id in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information 1166 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1167
Row Heading Description Hello-Q The queue, for transmission or reception, for the hello packets. LSR-Q The queue, for transmission or reception, for the link state request packets. Other-Q The queue, for transmission or reception, for the link state acknowledgement, database description, and update packets. The following describes the error definitions for the show ip ospf statistics process-id global command.
PAGE 1168
Socket Errors DellEMC# Usage Information Example (Statistics) 0 The show ip ospf process-id statistics command displays the error packet count received on each interface as: ● The hello-timer remaining value for each interface ● The wait-timer remaining value for each interface ● The grace-timer remaining value for each interface ● The packet count received and transmitted for each neighbor ● Dead timer remaining value for each neighbor ● Transmit timer remaining value for each neighbor ● The LSU Q lengt
PAGE 1169
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1170
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.
PAGE 1171
Command History Usage Information Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1172
Defaults ● delay = 5 seconds ● holdtime = 10 seconds Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv2 Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced the keyword msec. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series.
PAGE 1173
Parameters Defaults start-interval Set the minimum interval between initial sending and resending the same LSA. The range is from 0 to 600,000 milliseconds. hold-interval Set the next interval to send the same LSA. This interval is the time between sending the same LSA after the start-interval has been attempted. The range is from 1 to 600,000 milliseconds. max-interval Set the maximum amount of time the system waits before sending the LSA. The range is from 1 to 600,000 milliseconds.
PAGE 1174
Defaults 1000 msec Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1175
The values are 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). key Text string used in authentication. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1176
Parameters area area-id Area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be encrypted. For area-id, enter a number. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. ipsec spi number Security Policy index (SPI) value that identifies an IPsec security policy. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. esp encryptionalgorithm Encryption algorithm used with ESP. Valid values are: 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL. For AES-CBC, only the AES-128 and AES-192 ciphers are supported.
PAGE 1177
Usage Information Before you enable IPsec encryption on an OSPFv3 interface, first enable OSPFv3 globally on the router. Configure the same encryption policy (same SPI and keys) on each interface in an OSPFv3 link. An SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router. When you configure encryption for an OSPFv3 area with the area encryption command, you enable both IPsec encryption and authentication.
PAGE 1178
DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)# clear ipv6 ospf process Reset an OSPFv3 router process without removing or re-configuring the process. S4820T Syntax clear ipv6 ospf [vrf vrf-name] process Parameters vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to clear IPv6 routes corresponding to that VRF. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1179
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf to view debugging information on OSPF corresponding to that VRF. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1180
fe80:0000:0000:0000:0201:e8ff:fe8b:7720 Aug 25 11:19:59: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %BFDMGR-1-BFD_STATE_CHANGE: Changed session state to Init for neighbor fe80::201:e8ff:fe8b:7720 on interface Te 1/2 (diag: NBR_DN) Aug 25 11:20:00: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %BFDMGR-1-BFD_STATE_CHANGE: Changed session state to Up for neighbor fe80::201:e8ff:fe8b:7720 on interface Te 1/2 (diag: NO_DIAG) 00:59:45 : OSPFv3INFO: OSPFV3 got BFD msg 00:59:45 : OSPFv3INFO: Bfd Msg Type Up for interface Te 1/2 00:59:45 : OSPFv3INFO: OSPFV3 updating NBR st
PAGE 1181
05:20:25 : OSPFv3: Sending, Ver:3, Type:4(LS Update), Len:580, Router ID:223.255.255.254, Area ID:0, Inst:0, on Vl 1000 07:21:40 : OSPFv3: Received, Ver:3, Type:1(Hello), Len:40, Router ID:223.255.255.254, Area ID:0, Chksum:af8f, Inst:0, from Te 1/6 DellEMC# Example (detail) DellEMC# debug ipv6 ospf packet te 0/7 detail 00:37:52 : OSPFv3: Rcv,V:3 Type:4(LSUpd) RId:10,130.254.101 Area:0 Inst:0 Len:96 Cksum:0x6779 #LSA:2 -LSA:ASExt Age:3600 LSId:0.0.0.1 RId:10.130.254.
PAGE 1182
vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf to view debugging information on OSPF corresponding to that VRF. detail Enter the keyword detail to view detailed debugging information. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example Example (detail) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14.1.0 The detailoption is introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.
PAGE 1183
Command Fields Lines Beginning With or Including Description OSPFv3... Debugging is on for all OSPFv3 packets and all interfaces. 05:21:01 Displays the time stamp. Sending Ver:3 Sending OSPF3 version.. type: Displays the type of packet sent: ● 1 - Hello packet ● 2 - database description ● 3 - link state request ● 4 - link state update ● 5 - link state acknowledgement Length: Displays the OSPFv3 packet length. Router ID: Displays the OSPFv3 router ID. Area ID: Displays the OSPFv3 area ID.
PAGE 1184
Example Lines Beginning With or Including Description 05:21:01 Displays the time stamp. Sending Ver:3 Sending OSPF3 version..
PAGE 1185
Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1186
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.4.2.2 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA.
PAGE 1187
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. OSPFv3 graceful restart supports planned-only and/or unplanned-only restarts. The default is support for both planned and unplanned restarts. ● A planned restart occurs when you enter the redundancy force-failover rpm command to force the primary RPM to switch to the backup RPM. During a planned restart, OSPF sends out a Type-11 Grace LSA before the system switches over to the backup RPM.
PAGE 1188
ipv6 ospf authentication Configure an IPsec authentication policy for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6 interface. Syntax ipv6 ospf authentication {null | ipsec spi number {MD5 | SHA1} [keyencryption-type] key}} Parameters null Causes an authentication policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface. ipsec spi number Security Policy index (SPI) value that identifies an IPsec security policy. The range is from 256 to 4294967295.
PAGE 1189
ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors Establish BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface or use non-default BFD session parameters. Syntax ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors [disable | [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}]] To disable all BFD sessions on an OSPFv3 interface implicitly, use the no ipv6 ospf bfd allneighbors disable command in interface mode.. Parameters disable (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword disable to disable BFD on this interface.
PAGE 1190
ipv6 ospf cost Explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an interface. S4820T Syntax ipv6 ospf interface-cost Parameters Defaults interface-cost Enter a unsigned integer value expressed as the link-state metric. The range is from 1 to 65535. Default cost based on the bandwidth. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1191
Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the time interval in seconds. The range is from 1 to 65535 seconds. 40 seconds (Ethernet). Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1192
authenticationalgorithm Specifies the authentication algorithm to use for encryption. Valid values are MD5 or SHA1. key-encryptiontype (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the authentication key is encrypted. key Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). Text string used in authentication. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted).
PAGE 1193
Defaults The helper-reject role is not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1194
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Usage Information The time interval between hello packets must be the same for routers in a network.
PAGE 1195
Usage Information Setting a priority of 0 makes the router ineligible for election as a Designated Router or Backup Designated Router. Use this command for interfaces connected to multi-access networks, not point-to-point networks. ipv6 router ospf Enable OSPF for IPv6 router configuration. S4820T Syntax ipv6 router ospf process-id [vrf vrf-name] To exit OSPF for IPv6, use the no ipv6 router ospf process-id command. Parameters Defaults process-id Enter the process identification number.
PAGE 1196
Parameters Defaults number Specify the number of paths. The range is from 1 to 64. The default is 8 paths. 8 Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1197
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.
PAGE 1198
● 1 for a type 1 external route ● 2 for a type 2 external route The default is 2. route-map map- name tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map. If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag to set the tag for routes redistributed into OSPFv3. The range is from 0 to 4294967295 The default is 0. Defaults Not configured.
PAGE 1199
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1200
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. The show crypto ipsec policy command output displays the AH and ESP parameters configured in IPsec security policies, including the SPI number, keys, and algorithms used.
PAGE 1201
Field Description Outbound Auth Key Inbound ESP Cipher Key and Outbound ESP Cipher Key The ESP encryption key for inbound and outbound links. Transform set The set of security protocols and algorithms used in the policy. Inbound AH SPI The authentication header (AH) security policy index (SPI) for inbound and outbound links. and Outbound AH SPI Inbound AH Key The AH key for inbound and outbound links.
PAGE 1202
Version Description 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Usage Information The show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 command output displays security associations set up for OSPFv3 links in IPsec authentication and encryption policies on the router. Related Commands show crypto ipsec policy – displays the configuration of IPsec authentication and encryption policies.
PAGE 1203
Field Description Link local address IPv6 address of interface IPSecv6 policy name Name of the IPsec security policy applied to the interface. inbound/ outbound ah Authentication policy applied to inbound or outbound traffic. inbound/ outbound esp Encryption policy applied to inbound or outbound traffic. spi Security policy index number used to identify the policy. transform Security algorithm that is used to provide authentication, integrity, and confidentiality.
PAGE 1204
Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example (gracelsa) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14.1.0 The support to display detailed information of all the types of LSAs is introduced in S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.0) Added support to display all the types of LSAs in detail. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1205
Ext LSA Count 0 Rte Max Eq Cost Paths 10 GR grace-period 180 GR mode planned and unplanned Area 0 database summary Type Count/Status Brd Rtr Count 1 AS Bdr Rtr Count 1 LSA count 6 Rtr LSA Count 2 Net LSA Count 1 Inter Area Pfx LSA Count 1 Inter Area Rtr LSA Count 0 Group Mem LSA Count 0 Type-7 LSA count 0 Intra Area Pfx LSA Count 2 Intra Area TE LSA Count 2 Area 1 database summary Type Count/Status Brd Rtr Count 1 AS Bdr Rtr Count 1 LSA count 8 Rtr LSA Count 1 Net LSA Count 0 Inter Area Pfx LSA Count 5 Inte
PAGE 1206
Prefix Options: 0x8 ( P ) Metric Type: 2 Metric: 20 Forwarding Address: 101:101:1::1 show ipv6 ospf interface View OSPFv3 interface information. S4820T Syntax show ipv6 ospf [process-number] [vrf vrf-name] [interface] Parameters process-number Enter the OSPF process number. vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display neighbors corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: If you do not specify this option, neighbors corresponding to the default VRF are displayed.
PAGE 1207
Usage Information Example If you enable BFD at the global level, show ipv6 ospf interface shows the BFD provisioning. If you enable BFD at the interface level, show ipv6 ospf interface shows the BFD interval timers. DellEMC# show ipv6 ospf 3 interface tengigabitethernet 1/2 TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 is up, line protocol is up Link Local Address fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bbd, Interface ID 67420217 Area 0, Process ID 1, Instance ID 0, Router ID 11.1.1.
PAGE 1208
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced support for OSPFv3 on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show ipv6 ospf 3 neighbor gi 1/2 Neighbor ID 63.114.8.
PAGE 1209
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON, S6000, S4820T, S4810, S5000. Setting the delay and holdtime parameters to a low number enables the switch to an alternate path quickly but requires more CPU usage.
PAGE 1210
40 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows you to apply routing policies to specific interfaces. To enable PBR, create a redirect list and apply it to the interface. After the redirect list is applied to the interface, all traffic passing through the interface is subject to the rules defined in the redirect list. PBR is supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1211
Related Commands Version Description 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ip redirect-list – enable an IP Redirect List. ip redirect-group Apply a redirect list (policy-based routing) on an interface. You can apply multiple redirect lists to an interface by entering this command multiple times. S4820T Syntax ip redirect-group redirect-list-name test [l2–switch] To remove a redirect list from an interface, use the no ip redirect-group name command.
PAGE 1212
NOTE: Apply the redirect list to physical, VLAN, or LAG interfaces only. The Layer2 PBR option matches the layer2 traffic flow. If you un-configure this option, then the Layer2 traffic is not matched. You can apply the l2–switch option to redirect Layer2 traffic only on a VLAN interface. This VLAN interface must be configured with an IP address for ARP resolution. NOTE: The l2–switch option that redirects Layer2 traffic is applicable only on VLAN interfaces.
PAGE 1213
permit Configure a permit rule. A permit rule excludes the matching packets from PBR classification and routes them using conventional routing. S4820T Syntax permit {ip-protocol-number | protocol-type} {source mask | any | host ipaddress} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operators] To remove the rule, use one of the following: ● If you know the filter sequence number, use the no seq sequence-number syntax command.
PAGE 1214
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 8.4.2.
PAGE 1215
● ● ● ● ● Defaults fin psh rst syn urg = = = = = finish (no more data from the user) push function reset the connection synchronize sequence number urgent field source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x). any Enter the keyword any to specify that all traffic is subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address.
PAGE 1216
seq Configure a filter with an assigned sequence number for the redirect list.
PAGE 1217
● lt= less than ● range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command parameter.) source port Enter the keywords source-port then the port number to be matched in the ACL rule in the ICAP rule destination-port Enter the keywords destination-port then the port number to be matched in the ACL rule in the ICAP rule. source-portrange Enter the keywords Source-port-range then the range of the start port to end port to be matched in the ACL rule in the ICAP rule.
PAGE 1218
Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000.
PAGE 1219
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000. DellEMC# show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.0/24, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 10 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp any any, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 15 redirect tunnel 2 udp 155.55.0.0/16 host 144.144.144.
PAGE 1220
41 PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) The protocol-independent multicast (PIM) commands are supported by the Dell EMC Networking operating software on the platform. The following describes the IPv4 PIM-SIM commands. Topics: • IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands The following describes the IPv4 PIM-sparse mode (PIM-SM) commands. clear ip pim rp-mapping The bootstrap router (BSR) feature uses this command to remove all or particular rendezvous point (RP) advertisement.
PAGE 1221
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. This command re-applies the RP mapping logic for all the groups learnt by the node. Any stale information corresponding to the existing mapping configuration is updated. The existing BSR cache and the *,G's are deleted only if these entries are stale. clear ip pim tib Clear PIM tree information from the PIM database.
PAGE 1222
If you use this command on a peer VLT node, only the synced routes are deleted from the multicast route table. debug ip pim View IP PIM debugging messages. S4820T Syntax debug ip pim [vrf vrf-name] [bsr | events | group | packet [in | out] | register | state | timer [assert | hello | joinprune | register]] To disable PIM debugging, use the no debug ip pim [vrf vrf-name] command or use the undebug all to disable all debugging command.
PAGE 1223
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. ip pim bsr-border Define the border of PIM domain by filtering inbound and outbound PIM-BSR messages per interface.
PAGE 1224
ip pim bsr-candidate To join the Bootstrap election process, configure the PIM router. S4820T Syntax ip pim [vrf vrf-name] bsr-candidate interface [hash-mask-length] [priority] To return to the default value, use the no ip pim bsr-candidate [vrf vrf-name] command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure the PIM router on a VRF.
PAGE 1225
ip pim dr-priority Change the designated router (DR) priority for the interface. Syntax ip pim dr-priority priority-value To remove the DR priority value assigned, use the no ip pim dr-priority command. Parameters Defaults priority-value Enter a number. Preference is given to larger/higher number. The range is from 0 to 4294967294. The default is 1. 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1226
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Removed the in and out parameters. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.
PAGE 1227
Example Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced DellEMC(conf)# ip access-list standard map1 DellEMC(config-std-nacl)# permit 224.0.0.
PAGE 1228
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Do not enter this command before creating the access-list. ip pim query-interval Change the frequency of PIM Router-Query messages. Syntax ip pim query-interval seconds To return to the default value, use the no ip pim query-interval seconds command.
PAGE 1229
ip pim register-filter To prevent a PIM source DR from sending register packets to an RP for the specified multicast source and group, use this feature. S4820T Syntax ip pim [vrf vrf-name] register-filter access-list To return to the default, use the no ip pim [vrf vrf-name] register-filter access-list command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF.
PAGE 1230
ip pim rp-address Configure a static PIM rendezvous point (RP) address for a group or access-list. S4820T Syntax ip pim [vrf vrf-name] rp-address address {group-address group-address mask} [override] To remove an RP address, use the no ip pim [vrf vrf-name] rp-address address {group-address group-address mask} [override] command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF.
PAGE 1231
ip pim rp-candidate Configure a PIM router to send out a Candidate-RP-Advertisement message to the bootstrap (BS) router or define group prefixes that are defined with the RP address to PIM BSR. Syntax ip pim [vrf vrf-name] rp-candidate {interface [priority] [acl-name]} To return to the default value, use the no ip pim [vrf vrf-name] rp-candidate {interface [priority]} command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF.
PAGE 1232
ip pim sparse-mode Enable PIM sparse mode and IGMP on the interface. Syntax ip pim sparse-mode To disable PIM sparse mode and IGMP, use the no ip pim sparse-mode command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1233
seconds Enter the number of seconds the S, G entries are retained. The range is from 211 to 65535. access-list-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a previously configured Extended ACL to enable the expiry time to specified S,G entries. Defaults Disabled. The default expiry timer (with no times configured) is 210 sec. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1234
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1235
To return to the default value, use the no ip pim [vrf vrf-name] spt-threshold [infinity] command. Parameters value (OPTIONAL) Enter the traffic value in kilobits per second. The default is 10 packets per second . A value of zero (0) causes a switchover on the first packet. vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure the PIM router on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF.
PAGE 1236
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. By default, when you enable PIM-SM snooping, a switch floods all multicast traffic to the PIM designated router (DR), including unnecessary multicast packets. To minimize the traffic sent over the network to the designated router, you can disable designated-router flooding.
PAGE 1237
Example Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. DellEMC# show ip pim bsr-router PIMv2 Bootstrap information This system is the Bootstrap Router (v2) BSR address: 7.7.7.7 (?) BSR Priority: 0, Hash mask length: 30 Next bootstrap message in 00:00:08 This system is a candidate BSR Candidate BSR address: 7.7.7.
PAGE 1238
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. The following describes the show ip pim interface command shown in the following example. Field Description Address Lists the IP addresses of the interfaces participating in PIM. Interface List the interface type, with either slot/port information or ID (VLAN or Port Channel), of the interfaces participating in PIM.
PAGE 1239
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.
PAGE 1240
Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. mapping (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mapping to display the multicast groups-to-RP mapping and information on how RP is learnt. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address mask in dotted decimal format to view RP for a specific group.
PAGE 1241
show ip pim snooping interface Display information on VLAN interfaces with PIM-SM snooping enabled. Syntax Parameters show ip pim snooping interface [vlan vlan-id] vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter a VLAN ID to display information about a specified VLAN configured for PIM-SM snooping. The valid VLAN IDs range is from 1 to 4094. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example (#2) This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1242
● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1243
source-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the source address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) to display TIB information PIM-SM snooping discovered for a specified multicast source. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 1244
flags: J Incoming interface: Vlan 2, RPF neighbor 0.0.0.0 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 RPF 165.87.32.2 00:00:01/00:02:59 TenGigabitEthernet 2/13 Upstream Port -/DellEMC# show ip pim snooping tib vlan 2 225.1.2.1 165.87.1.7 PIM Multicast Snooping Table Flags: J/P - (*,G) Join/Prune, j/p - (S,G) Join/Prune SGR-P - (S,G,R) Prune Timers: Uptime/Expires * : Inherited port (165.87.1.7, 225.1.2.1), uptime 00:00:08, expires 00:02:52, flags: j Incoming interface: Vlan 2, RPF neighbor 0.0.0.
PAGE 1245
Example Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Group Address / MaskLen show ip pim summary View information about PIM-SM operation. S4820T Syntax Parameters show ip pim [vrf vrf-name] summary vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF.
PAGE 1246
Uptime 22:44:52 Entries in PIM-TIB/MFC : 2/2 Active Modes : PIM-SNOOPING Interface 1 0 3 summary: active PIM interface passive PIM interfaces active PIM neighbors TIB summary: 1/1 (*,G) entries in PIM-TIB/MFC 1/1 (S,G) entries in PIM-TIB/MFC 0/0 (S,G,Rpt) entries in PIM-TIB/MFC 0 0 0 0 PIM nexthops RPs sources Register states Message summary: 2582/2583 Joins sent/received 5/0 Prunes sent/received 0/0 Candidate-RP advertisements sent/received 0/0 BSR messages sent/received 0/0 State-Refresh messages sent
PAGE 1247
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.
PAGE 1248
K - Ack-Pending State Timers: Uptime/Expires Interface state: Interface, next-Hop, State/Mode (*, 225.1.1.1), uptime 00:40:16, expires 00:00:00, RP 20.40.4.4, flags: SCJ Incoming interface: Vlan 2007, RPF neighbor 20.30.124.4 Outgoing interface list: Vlan 2006 Forward/Sparse 00:06:21/Never (20.10.4.9, 225.1.1.1), uptime 00:06:21, expires 00:02:06, flags: CT Incoming interface: Vlan 2007, RPF neighbor 20.30.124.4 Outgoing interface list: Vlan 2006 Forward/Sparse 00:06:21/Never (*, 225.1.1.
PAGE 1249
42 Port Monitoring The port monitoring feature allows you to monitor network traffic by forwarding a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port to another port. Important Points to Remember ● Port monitoring is supported on physical ports and logical interfaces, such as port channels and virtual local area networks (VLANs). ● The monitoring (destination, “MG”) and monitored (source, “MD”) ports must be on the same switch.
PAGE 1250
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.
PAGE 1251
monitor session Create a session for monitoring traffic with port monitoring. Syntax monitor session session-ID [type { rpm | erpm [set ip dscp dscp_value | set ip ttl ttl_value]}] [drop] To delete a session, use the no monitor session session-ID command. To delete all monitor sessions, use the no monitor session all command. Parameters Defaults session-ID Enter a session identification number. The range is from 0 to 65535.
PAGE 1252
Usage Information Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. The monitor command is saved in the running configuration at Monitor Session mode level and can be restored after a chassis reload. Example Related Command Version DellEMC# show monitor session SessID Source Destination DSCP TTL ------ ------------------- --0 Te 1/12 remote-ip 255 0 Po 1 remote-ip 255 1 Vl 11 remote-ip 255 Dir Mode Source IP Dest IP --- ---- --------- -------- rx Flow 1.1.1.1 7.1.1.2 0 tx Flow 1.1.1.1 7.1.
PAGE 1253
Command Modes MONITOR SESSION (conf-mon-sess-session-ID) Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 1254
Example Example (show monitor session access-list) 1254 Version Description 9.14(0.0) Updated to display the IPv6 ACLs applied to monitor session on the S6000, S6000–ON, S5048F-ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. 9.12(0.0) Introduced the access-list optional keyword to display the ACLs applied to monitor sessions on the S6000, S6100–ON and Z9100–ON. 9.11(0.0) Introduced the support for GRE Protocol and FC Monitor in the command output. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1255
Related Commands ● monitor session — creates a monitoring session. ● rate-limit — configures the rate-limit. show running-config monitor session Display the running configuration of all monitor sessions or a specific session. Syntax show running-config monitor session {session-ID} To display the running configuration for all monitor sessions, use the show running-config monitor session command. Parameters Defaults session-ID (OPTIONAL) Enter a session identification number. The range from 0 to 65535.
PAGE 1256
Related Commands ● monitor session — creates a monitoring session. ● show monitor session — displays a monitoring session. source (port monitoring) Configure a port monitor source. Syntax source {interface | range | any} destination interface direction {rx | tx | both} To disable a monitor source, use the no source interface destination interface direction {rx | tx | both} command.
PAGE 1257
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Added the any parameter. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4.0.0 Added support for Source and destination. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1258
43 Private VLAN (PVLAN) The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature of the Dell EMC Networking OS is supported on the S4820T platforms. Private VLANs extend the Dell EMC Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same private VLAN. A private VLAN partitions a traditional VLAN into subdomains identified by a primary and secondary VLAN pair. The Dell EMC Networking OS private VLAN implementation is based on RFC 3069. For more information, see the following commands.
PAGE 1259
ip local-proxy-arp Enable/disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN. S4820T Syntax [no] ip local-proxy-arp To disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN, use the no ip localproxy-arp command in INTERFACE VLAN mode for the primary VLAN. To disable Layer 3 communication in a particular secondary VLAN, use the no ip local-proxy-arp command in INTERFACE VLAN mode for the selected secondary VLAN.
PAGE 1260
private-vlan mode Set PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary. S4820T Syntax [no] private-vlan mode {community | isolated | primary} To remove the PVLAN configuration, use the no private-vlan mode {community | isolated | primary} command syntax. Parameters Defaults community Enter the keyword community to set the VLAN as a community VLAN. isolated Enter the keyword isolated to configure the VLAN as an isolated VLAN.
PAGE 1261
private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN. Syntax [no] private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list To remove specific secondary VLANs from the configuration, use the no private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list command syntax. Parameters Defaults vlan-list Enter the list of secondary VLANs to associate with the selected primary VLAN. The list can be in comma-delimited or hyphenated-range format, following the convention for the range input.
PAGE 1262
To remove PVLAN mode from the selected port, use the no switchport mode private-vlan command. Parameters Defaults host Enter the keyword host to configure the selected port or port channel as an isolated interface in a PVLAN. promiscuous Enter the keyword promiscuous to configure the selected port or port channel as an promiscuous interface. trunk Enter the keyword trunk to configure the selected port or port channel as a trunk port in a PVLAN. Disabled.
PAGE 1263
44 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning tree protocol. Dell EMC Networking OS supports PVST+ on the S4820T platform. NOTE: For easier command line entry, the plus (+) sign is not used at the command line.
PAGE 1264
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. pre- 7.7.1.1 Introduced. ● protocol spanning-tree pvst — enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. disable Disable PVST+ globally. S4820T Syntax disable To enable PVST+, use the no disable command.
PAGE 1265
Related Commands ● protocol spanning-tree pvst — enter PVST+ mode. extend system-id To augment the Bridge ID with a VLAN ID so that PVST+ differentiate between BPDUs for each VLAN, use extend system ID. If the VLAN receives a BPDU meant for another VLAN, PVST+ does not detect a loop, and both ports can remain in Forwarding state. S4820T Syntax extend system-id Defaults Disabled Command Modes PROTOCOL PVST Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1266
-------------------------------------------------------Te 1/10 Desg 128.140 128 200000 FWD 0 P2P No Te 1/12 Dis 128.142 128 200000 DIS 0 P2P No DellEMC(conf-pvst)# Related Commands ● protocol spanning-tree pvst – enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. protocol spanning-tree pvst To enable PVST+ on a device, enter the PVST+ mode. Syntax protocol spanning-tree pvst To disable PVST+, use the disable command.
PAGE 1267
Usage Information After you enable PVST+, the device runs an STP instance for each VLAN it supports. Related Commands ● disable — disables PVST+. ● show spanning-tree pvst — displays the PVST+ configuration. show spanning-tree pvst View the Per-VLAN spanning tree configuration. S4820T Syntax Parameters Defaults show spanning-tree pvst [vlan vlan-id] [brief] [guard] vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is 1 to 4094.
PAGE 1268
Usage Information Example (Brief) Version Description 8.4.2.1 Support for the optional guard keyword was added on the C-Series, S-Series, and E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.4.1.0 Expanded to display port error disable state (EDS) caused by loopback BPDU inconsistency and Port VLAN ID inconsistency. 6.2.1.1 Introduced. The following describes the show spanning-tree pvst command shown in the following examples.
PAGE 1269
Port 131 (TenGigabitEthernet 1/1) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.131 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06 Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 1270
Related Commands ● spanning-tree pvst — configure PVST+ on an interface. spanning-tree pvst Configure a PVST+ interface with one of these settings: edge port with optional bridge port data unit (BPDU) guard, port disablement if an error condition occurs, port priority or cost for a VLAN range, loop guard, or root guard.
PAGE 1271
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.
PAGE 1272
no ip address switchport spanning-tree pvst vlan 3 cost 1800 no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)# end DellEMC# Related Commands ● show spanning-tree pvst — views the PVST+ configuration. spanning-tree pvst err-disable Place ports in an Err-Disabled state if they receive a PVST+ BPDU when they are members an untagged VLAN.
PAGE 1273
tc-flush-standard Enable the MAC address flushing after receiving every topology change notification. S4820T Syntax tc-flush-standard To disable, use the no tc-flush-standard command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1274
bridge-priority value Defaults Enter the keywords bridge-priority then the bridge priority value in increments of 4096. The range is from 0 to 61440. The default is 32768. 32768 Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1275
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1276
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1277
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1278
45 Quality of Service (QoS) The Dell EMC Networking OS commands for quality of service (QoS) include traffic conditioning and congestion control. QoS commands are not universally supported on all Dell EMC Networking products. Topics: • • • • Global Configuration Commands Per-Port QoS Commands Policy-Based QoS Commands DSCP Color Map Commands Global Configuration Commands There is only one global configuration QoS command.
PAGE 1279
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced. By default, when rate policing and shaping, the system does not include the Preamble, SFD, or the IFG fields. These fields are overhead; only the fields from MAC destination address to the CRC are used for forwarding and are included in these rate metering calculations. Per-Port QoS Commands Per-port QoS (port-based QoS) allows you to define the QoS configuration on a per-physical-port basis.
PAGE 1280
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The dot1p-priority command changes the priority of incoming traffic on the interface. The system places traffic marked with a priority in the correct queue and processes that traffic according to its queue.
PAGE 1281
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Added the kbps option on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1282
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Added the kbps option on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series and C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. If traffic is shaped between 64 and 1000 Kbs, for some values, the shaped rate is much less than the value configured.
PAGE 1283
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information To apply dot1p-queue-mapping, use the service-class dynamic dot1p command. Related Commands ● show qos dot1p-queue-mapping — displays the dot1p priority to queue mapping on the switch. service-class dynamic dot1p Honor all 802.1p markings on incoming switched traffic on an interface (from INTERFACE mode) or on all interfaces (from CONFIGURATION mode).
PAGE 1284
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Added the kbps option on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Expanded the command to permit configuration on port channels. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. To honor all incoming 802.
PAGE 1285
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. After you configure a unicast queue as strict-priority, that particular queue, on the entire chassis, is treated as a strict-priority unicast. Traffic for a strict priority is scheduled before any other queues are serviced.
PAGE 1286
Version Description 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information The unit of bandwidth percentage is 1%. If the sum of the bandwidth percentages given to all eight classes exceeds 100%, the bandwidth percentage automatically scales down to 100%. Related Commands ● qos-policy-output — creates a QoS output policy. class-map Create/access a class map. Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality-of-service policies to each class.
PAGE 1287
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Expanded to add support for Layer 2. Packets arriving at the input interface are checked against the match criteria and configured using this command to determine if the packet belongs to that class. This command accesses CLASS-MAP mode, where the configuration commands include thematch ip and match mac options.
PAGE 1288
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.18.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show qos statistics — displays the QoS statistics. description Add a description to the selected policy map or QoS policy.
PAGE 1289
Related Commands Version Description pre- 7.7.1.0 Introduced. ● ● ● ● ● policy-map-input — creates an input policy map. policy-map-output — creates an output policy map. qos-policy-input — creates an input QoS-policy on the router. qos-policy-output — creates an output QoS-policy on the router. wred-profile — creates a WRED profile. match ip access-group Configure match criteria for a class map, based on the access control list (ACL). NOTE: IPv6 class-maps and IP-any class-maps do not match.
PAGE 1290
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Added the DSCP Marking option support on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series; added support for the DSCP Marking option. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command.
PAGE 1291
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Added the ipv6 and ip-any options on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.
PAGE 1292
Defaults none Command Modes CLASS-MAP CONFIGURATION (config-class-map) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the seq option for the class-map on all the Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON.
PAGE 1293
Parameters Defaults mac-acl-name Enter a MAC ACL name. Its contents is used as the match criteria in the class map. none Command Modes CLASS-MAP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the seq option for the class-map on all the Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1294
Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the seq option for the class-map on all the Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.
PAGE 1295
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced. Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command. You can match against only one VLAN ID.
PAGE 1296
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information An aggregate output QoS policy applies to all outbound port traffic. An aggregate output QoS policy can coexist with per-queue output QoS policies.
PAGE 1297
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Expanded to add support for Layer 2. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1298
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information To assign traffic to different flows using QoS policy, use the Output Policy map. This command enables Policy-Map-Output Configuration mode (conf-policy-map-out).
PAGE 1299
Usage Information Version Description 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Use this command to specify the name of the input QoS policy. Once input policy is specified, rate-police can be defined. This command enables the qos-policy-input configuration mode— (conf-qos-policy-in).
PAGE 1300
Version Description 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information Use this command to specify the name of the output QoS policy. Once output policy is specified, rateshape, scheduler strict, bandwidth-percentage, and WRED can be defined. This command enables the qos-policy-output configuration mode—(conf-qos-policy-out). Related Commands ● bandwidth-percentage — assigns percentage of bandwidth to the class/queue. ● wred — assigns yellow or green drop precedence.
PAGE 1301
● A unique multicast weighted fair queuing (WFQ) setting can be applied only on a per port-pipe basis. The minimum percentage of the multicast bandwidth assigned to any of the ports in the port-pipe takes effect for the entire port-pipe. ● If the percentage of multicast bandwidth is 0, control traffic going through multicast queues are dropped. ● The no form of the command without multicast-bandwidth and wred-profile, removes both the wred-profile and multicast-bandwidth configuration.
PAGE 1302
rate-police Specify the policing functionality on incoming traffic. Syntax rate-police [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peak-rate [burstKB]] Parameters Defaults kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). Make the following value a multiple of 64. The range is from 0 to 40000000. The default granularity is Megabits per second (Mbps). committed-rate Enter the bandwidth in Mbps. The range is from 0 to 40000.
PAGE 1303
rate-shape Shape traffic output as part of the designated policy. Syntax Parameters Defaults rate-shape [kbps | pps] peak-rate [burst-kbps | burst-packets] commited [kbps | pps] commited-rate [burst-kbps | burst-packets] pps Enter the keyword pps to specify the rate limit in packets per second (pps). kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). Make the following value a multiple of 64. The range is from 0 to 40000000.
PAGE 1304
size. Traffic is considered to be green-colored up to the point at which the unused bandwidth does not exceed the committed burst size. Related Commands ● rate shape — shapes traffic output as part of the designated policy. ● qos-policy-output — creates a QoS output policy. service-policy input Apply an input policy map to the selected interface.
PAGE 1305
NOTE: The service-policy commands are not allowed on a port channel. The servicepolicy input policy-map-name command and the service-class dynamic dot1p command are not allowed simultaneously on an interface. However, the service-policy input command (without the policy-map-name option) and the service-class dynamic dot1p command are allowed on an interface. Related Commands ● policy-map-input — creates an input policy map. service-policy output Apply an output policy map to the selected interface.
PAGE 1306
service-queue Assign a class map and QoS policy to different queues. S4820T Syntax service-queue queue-id [class-map class-map-name] [qos-policy qos-policyname] To remove the queue assignment, use the no service-queue queue-id [class-map classmap-name] [qos-policy qos-policy-name] command. Parameters queue-id Enter the value used to identify a queue. The range is from 0 to 7.
PAGE 1307
set Mark outgoing traffic with a differentiated service code point (DSCP) or dot1p value. S4820T Syntax Parameters Defaults set {ip-dscp value | mac-dot1p value} ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ip-dscp then the IP DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. mac-dot1p value Enter the keywords mac-dot1p then the dot1p value. The range is from 0 to 7. none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-qos-policy-in) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1308
Defaults none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the seq option on all the Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.
PAGE 1309
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 1310
Example (IPv4) Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1311
show qos policy-map-input View the input QoS policy map details. S4820T Syntax Parameters show qos policy-map-input [policy-map-name] [class class-map-name] [qospolicy-input qos-policy-name] policy-map-name Enter the policy map name. class class-map- name qos-policy-input qos-policy-name Defaults Enter the keyword class then the class map name. Enter the keyword qos-policy-input then the QoS policy name.
PAGE 1312
Example DellEMC# show qos policy-map-input Policy-map-input pmap1 Trust ipv6-diffserv Queue# Class-map-name 0 c0 1 c1 2 c2 3 c3 4 c4 5 c5 6 c6 7 c7 DellEMC# Qos-policy-name q0 q1 q2 q3 q4 q6 q7 show qos policy-map-output View the output QoS policy map details. S4820T Syntax show qos policy-map-output [policy-map-name] [qos-policy-output qos-policyname] Parameters policy-map-name Enter the policy map name. qos-policyoutput qos- Enter the keyword qos-policy-output then the QoS policy name.
PAGE 1313
Example Version Description 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show qos policy-map-output Policy-map-output PolicyMapOutput Aggregate Qos-policy-name AggPolicyOut Queue# Qos-policy-name 0 qosPolicyOutput DellEMC# show qos qos-policy-input View the input QoS policy details. S4820T Syntax Parameters Defaults show qos qos-policy-input [qos-policy-name] qos-policy-name Enter the QoS policy name.
PAGE 1314
DellEMC# Rate-police 100 50 peak 100 50 Dscp 32 show qos qos-policy-output View the output QoS policy details. S4820T Syntax show qos qos-policy-output [qos-policy-name] Parameters Defaults qos-policy-name Enter the QoS policy name. none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1315
show qos statistics View QoS statistics. Syntax Parameters show qos statistics {egress—queue [interface]} | {wred-profile [interface]} | [interface] egress-queue interface wred-profile interface interface Defaults Enter the keyword egress-queue to display the egress-queue statistics and optionally one o the following keywords and slot/port or number information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1316
Version Description 7.7.1.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1317
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Modified to display the global WRED state. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 1318
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1319
stack-unit|Portpipe|CAM Partition|Available CAM|Estimated CAM per Port | Status | | | |per Port |(Allowed ports) 0 0 L2ACL 500 200 Allowed (2) 0 1 L2ACL 100 200 Exception 1 0 L2ACL 1000 200 Allowed (5) 1 1 L2ACL 0 200 Exception … … … 13 1 L2ACL 400 200 Allowed (2) DellEMC# threshold Specify the minimum and maximum threshold values for the configured WRED profiles.
PAGE 1320
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. To configure the minimum and maximum threshold values for user-defined profiles, use this command. Additionally, to modify the minimum and maximum threshold values for the pre-defined WRED profiles, use this command. If you delete the threshold values of the pre-defined WRED profiles, the profiles revert to their original default values. Table 5.
PAGE 1321
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Added fallback to the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Added dot1p to the C-Series and S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added dot1p and IPv6 DSCP . 6.1.
PAGE 1322
To remove the WRED drop precedence, use the no wred {yellow | green} [profile-name] command. Parameters yellow | green Enter the keyword yellow for yellow traffic. A DSCP value of xxx110 and xxx100, xxx101 maps to yellow. Enter the keyword green for green traffic. A DSCP value of xxx0xx are green and DSCP 111111 are red packets. profile-name Enter your WRED profile name in character format (32 character maximum). Or use one of the five pre-defined WRED profile names.
PAGE 1323
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1324
Defaults The five pre-defined WRED profiles. When you configure a new profile, the minimum and maximum threshold defaults to predefined wred_ge_g values. If green profile is applied, default yellow also take effect and vice-versa. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1325
by commas – no spaces (1,2,3) or indicates a list of values separated by a hyphen (1-3). Range is 0 to 63. Defaults None Command Modes CONFIG-COLOR-MAP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1326
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.5(0.
PAGE 1327
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. Version 9.5.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. Usage Information If the specified color-map does not exist, the Diffserv Manager (DSM) creates a color map and sets all the DSCP values to green (low drop precedence). Example The following example assigns the color map, bat-enclave-map, to interface te 1/11.
PAGE 1328
TE 1/10 TE 1/11 mapONE mapTWO Display summary information about a color policy on a specific interface. DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-policy summary te 1/10 Interface dscp-color-map TE 1/10 mapONE Displayed detailed color policy information on an interface. DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-policy detail te 1/10 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10 Dscp-color-map mapONE yellow 4,7 red 20,30 Related Commands ● show qos dscp-color-map — displays DSCP color maps.
PAGE 1329
DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-map mapTWO Dscp-color-map mapTWO yellow 16,55 DellEMC# Related Commands ● show qos dscp-color-policy — Displaying a DSCP Color Policy Configuration.
PAGE 1330
46 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Routing information protocol (RIP) is a distance vector routing protocol. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports both RIP version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2). The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of RIP is based on IETF RFCs 2453 and RFC 1058. For more information about configuring RIP, see the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 1331
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1332
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. This command triggers updates of the main RIP routing tables. debug ip rip Examine RIP routing information for troubleshooting. S4820T Syntax debug ip rip [interface | database | events [interface] | trigger] To turn off debugging output, use the no debug ip rip command.
PAGE 1333
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. default-information originate Generate a default route for the RIP traffic.
PAGE 1334
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The default route must be present in the switch routing table for the default-information originate command to take effect. default-metric Change the default metric for routes. To ensure that all redistributed routes use the same metric value, use this command with the redistribute command.
PAGE 1335
Related Commands ● redistribute — allows you to redistribute routes learned by other methods. description Enter a description of the RIP routing protocol. S4820T Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters Defaults description Enter a description to identify the RIP protocol (80 characters maximum). none Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1336
To return to the default values, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask] command. Parameters Defaults weight Enter a number from 1 to 255 for the weight (for prioritization). The default is 120. ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D), of the host or network to receive the new distance metric. mask If you enter an IP address, also enter a mask for that IP address, in either dotted decimal format or /prefix format (/x).
PAGE 1337
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1338
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to filter only directly connected routes.
PAGE 1339
ip poison-reverse Set the prefix of the RIP routing updates to the RIP infinity value. S4820T Syntax ip poison-reverse To disable poison reverse, use the no ip poison-reverse command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1340
2 Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 2 for RIP version 2. RIPv1 and RIPv2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1341
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1342
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1343
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. RIP supports a maximum of 16 ECMP paths. neighbor Define a neighbor router with which to exchange RIP information. S4820T Syntax neighbor ip-address To delete a neighbor setting, use the no neighbor ip-address command.
PAGE 1344
Usage Information Related Commands When a neighbor router is identified, unicast data exchanges occur. Multiple neighbor routers are possible. To ensure that only specific interfaces are receiving and sending data, use the passive-interface command with the neighbor command. ● passive-interface — sets the interface to only listen to RIP broadcasts. network Enable RIP for a specified network. To enable RIP on all networks connected to the switch, use this command.
PAGE 1345
offset-list Specify a number to add to the incoming or outgoing route metrics learned using RIP. S4820T Syntax offset-list prefix-list-name {in | out} offset [interface] To delete an offset list, use the no offset-list prefix-list-name {in | out} offset [interface] command. Parameters Defaults prefix-list-name Enter the name of an established Prefix list to determine which incoming routes are modified.
PAGE 1346
Related Commands ● ip prefix-list — enters PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list. output-delay Set the interpacket delay of successive packets to the same neighbor. S4820T Syntax output-delay delay To return to the switch software defaults for interpacket delay, use the no output-delay command. Parameters Defaults delay Specify a number of milliseconds as the delay interval. The range is from 8 to 50. Not configured.
PAGE 1347
passive-interface Suppress routing updates on a specified interface. S4820T Syntax passive-interface interface To delete a passive interface, use the no passive-interface interface command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1348
redistribute Redistribute information from other routing instances. Syntax redistribute {connected | static} To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute {connected | static} command. Parameters Defaults connected Enter the keyword connected to specify that information from active routes on interfaces is redistributed. static Enter the keyword static to specify that information from static routes is redistributed. Not configured.
PAGE 1349
Parameters tag (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the IS-IS routing process. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-1 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-1 routes. level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-1-2 to redistribute both IS-IS Level-1 and Level-2 routes. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-2 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-2 routes. metric metric- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number as the metric value. The range is from 0 to 16.
PAGE 1350
metric metric- value route-map map- name Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number as the metric value. The range is from 0 to 16. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of a configured route map. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1351
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1352
Example Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC(conf-router_rip)# show config ! router rip network 172.31.0.0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-router_rip)# show ip rip database Display the routes that RIP learns. If the switch learned no RIP routes, no output is generated.
PAGE 1353
Usage Information Example Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip rip database command shown in the following example. Field Description Total number of routes in RIP database Displays the number of RIP routes stored in the RIP database. 100.10.10.0/24 directly connected Lists the routes directly connected. 150.100.0.0 redistributed Lists the routes learned through redistribution. 209.9.16.0/24...
PAGE 1354
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 1355
flush Defaults ● ● ● ● Enter the number of seconds to specify the time interval during which the route is advertised as unreachable. When this interval expires, the route is flushed from the routing table. The flush value should be greater than the update value. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. The default is 240 seconds.
PAGE 1356
Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands 1356 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1357
47 Remote Monitoring (RMON) Dell EMC Networking OS RMON is based on IEEE standards, providing both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring and long-term statistics collection.
PAGE 1358
interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. The range is from 5 to 3600 seconds. delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table.
PAGE 1359
rmon collection history Enable the RMON MIB history group of statistics collection on an interface. Syntax rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner name] [buckets number] [interval seconds] To remove a specified RMON history group of statistics collection, use the no rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} command. Parameters controlEntry integer Defaults Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics using a value.
PAGE 1360
rmon collection statistics Enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface. Syntax rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} [owner name] To remove RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface, use the no rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} command. Parameters controlEntry integer owner name Defaults Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics using a value. Then enter an integer value from 1 to 65535 that identifies the RMON Statistic Table.
PAGE 1361
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to generate an RMON event log. This option sets the eventType to either log or log-and-snmptrap in the RMON event table. The default is None. trap community (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword trap followed by the SNMP community string to generate SNMP traps for an RMON event entry. This option sets the eventType to either snmptrap or log-and-snmptrap in the RMON event table. In addition to the SNMP traps, this option also generates a syslog.
PAGE 1362
interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. The range is from 5 to 3600 seconds. delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table.
PAGE 1363
show rmon Display the RMON running status including the memory usage. S4820T Syntax show rmon Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1364
show rmon alarms Display the contents of the RMON alarm table. S4820T Syntax show rmon alarms [index] [brief] Parameters Defaults index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON alarm table in an easy-to-read format. none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example (Index) Example (Brief) 1364 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1365
-------------------------1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 2 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 4 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 6 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 7 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 8 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 9 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 10 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 11 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 12 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 13 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 14 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 15 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 16 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 17 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 18 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 19 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 20 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 21 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 22 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 DellEMC# show rmon events Display the contents of the RMON event table.
PAGE 1366
Example (Index) Example (Brief) 1366 Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC(conf)# rmon event 111 -> DellEMC(conf)# rmon event 112 log -> DellEMC(conf)# rmon event 113 trap private -> DellEMC(conf)# rmon event 114 log trap public-> options DellEMC(conf)#do show rmon events RMON event entry 111 description: event type: none.
PAGE 1367
21 21 22 22 DellEMC# show rmon hc-alarm Display the contents of RMON High-Capacity alarm table. S4820T Syntax Parameters Defaults show rmon hc-alarm [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON High-Capacity alarm table in an easy-to-read format. none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example (Index) This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1368
falling threshold: 300, RMON event index: 4 alarm sampling failed 0 times. alarm owner: alarm storage type: non-volatile. alarm status: OK DellEMC# Example (Brief) DellEMC# show rmon hc-alarm brief index SNMP OID ---------------------------------1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 2 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 4 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 DellEMC# show rmon history Display the contents of the RMON Ethernet history table.
PAGE 1369
Example (Index) Example (Brief) Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show rmon history 6001 RMON history control entry 6001 interface: ifIndex.
PAGE 1370
Usage Information Example (Index) Example (Brief) Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The log table has a maximum of 500 entries.
PAGE 1371
Example (Index) Example (Brief) Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1372
6003 101236775 6004 101236775 9001 134529054 9002 134529054 9003 134791198 9004 134791198 DellEMC# 1372 Remote Monitoring (RMON) TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 2/1 3/2 3/2 3/1 3/1
PAGE 1373
48 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning-tree protocol. The RSTP algorithm configures connectivity throughout a bridged local area network (LAN) that is comprised of LANs interconnected by bridges. Dell EMC Networking OS supports RSTP.
PAGE 1374
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● protocol spanning-tree rstp — enters rapid spanning tree mode. debug spanning-tree rstp Enable debugging of RSTP and view information on the protocol.
PAGE 1375
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# debug spanning-tree rstp bpdu tengigabitethernet 2/1 ? in Receive (in) out Transmit (out) description Enter a description of the rapid spanning tree.
PAGE 1376
disable Disable RSTP globally on the system. Syntax disable To enable Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, use the no disable command. Defaults RSTP is disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1377
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1378
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Added the milli-second option to the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1379
Related Commands Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● forward-delay — changes the wait time before RSTP transitions to the Forwarding state. ● hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs.
PAGE 1380
Example Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# protocol spanning-tree rstp DellEMC(config-rstp)# no disable ● disable — disables RSTP globally on the system. show config View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are displayed. Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp) Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1381
guard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on an RSTP interface and the current port state. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example (Brief) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1382
Te 4/1 128.419 128 20000 FWD 20000 16384 0001.e801.6aa8 128.419 Te 4/8 128.426 128 20000 FWD 20000 8192 0001.e805.e306 128.130 Te 4/9 128.427 128 20000 BLK 20000 8192 0001.e805.e306 128.131 Interface Name Role ----------Te 4/2 Desg Te 4/1 Desg Te 4/8 Root Te 4/9 Altr DellEMC# Example (EDS, LBK) PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge ---- ------- --- ------- --------- ---128.418 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P Yes 128.419 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P Yes 128.426 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P No 128.
PAGE 1383
Parameters cost port-cost Enter the keyword cost then the port cost value. The range is from 1 to 200000.
PAGE 1384
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added the optional bridge port data unit (BPDU) guard. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The BPDU guard option prevents the port from participating in an active STP topology in case a BPDU appears on a port unintentionally, or is misconfigured, or is subject to a DOS attack.
PAGE 1385
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.
PAGE 1386
49 Software-Defined Networking (SDN) The Dell EMC Networking OS supports software-defined networking (SDN). For more information, see the SDN Deployment Guide.
PAGE 1387
50 Security The commands in this chapter are available on Dell EMC Networking OS. For configuration details, see the Security section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking OS implements LEAP with MSCHAP v2 supplicant. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • AAA Accounting Commands Authorization and Privilege Commands Obscure Password Commands Authentication and Password Commands RADIUS Commands TACACS+ Commands Port Authentication (802.
PAGE 1388
Defaults commands { level | role role-name } Enter the keyword commands then a privilege level for accounting of commands executed at that privilege level or enter the keyword role then the role name for accounting of commands executed by a user with that user role. name | default Enter one of the following: ● For name, enter a user-defined name of a list of accounting methods. ● For default, the default accounting methods used.
PAGE 1389
Example (TACACS+) DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting exec default start-stop tacacs+ DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting command 15 default start-stop tacacs+ DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting command role secaadmin default start-stop tacacs+ Example (RADIUS) Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop radius DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting dot1x default stop-only radius ● ● ● ● enable password — changes the password for the enable command.
PAGE 1390
accounting Apply an accounting method list to terminal lines. S4820T Syntax accounting {exec | commands {level | role role-name} method-list Parameters Defaults exec Enter the keyword exec to apply an EXEC level accounting method list. commands { level | role role-name } Enter the keywords commands level to apply an EXEC and CONFIGURATION level accounting method list or enter the keyword role and then the role name for accounting of commands executed by a user with that user role.
PAGE 1391
Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 1392
Authorization and Privilege Commands To set command line authorization and privilege levels, use the following commands. authorization Apply an authorization method list to terminal lines. S4820T Syntax authorization {exec | commands {level | role role-name}} method-list Parameters Defaults exec Enter the keyword exec to apply an EXEC level authorization method list.
PAGE 1393
aaa authorization commands Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC and CONFIGURATION level commands. Syntax aaa authorization commands {level | role role-name}{name|default} {local | tacacs+| none} Undo a configuration with the no aaa authorization commands {level | role rolename} {name|default} {local | tacacs+ | none} command. Parameters Defaults commands level Enter the keyword commands then the command privilege level for command level authorization.
PAGE 1394
aaa authorization config-commands Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC level commands. Syntax aaa authorization config-commands Disable authorization checking for CONFIGURATION level commands using the no aaa authorization config-commands command. Defaults Enabled when you configure aaa authorization commands command. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1395
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1396
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1397
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1398
VRRP authentication by obscuring this information. Passwords and keys are stored encrypted in the configuration file and by default are displayed in the encrypted form when the configuration is displayed. Enabling theservice obscure-passwords command displays asterisks instead of the encrypted passwords and keys. This command prevents a user from reading these passwords and keys by obscuring this information with asterisks.
PAGE 1399
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.
PAGE 1400
● line: use the password the password command defines in LINE mode. Not available if role-only is in use. ● local: use the password for the userid contained in the local password database. ● none: no authentication. Not available if role-only is in use. ● radius: use the RADIUS servers configured with the radius-server host command. ● tacacs+: use the TACACS+ servers configured with the tacacs-server host command. ... method4 Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter up to four additional methods.
PAGE 1401
NOTE: If authentication fails using the primary method, Dell EMC Networking OS employs the second method (or third method, if necessary) automatically. For example, if the TACACS+ server is reachable, but the server key is invalid, Dell EMC Networking OS proceeds to the next authentication method. The TACACS+ is incorrect, but the user is still authenticated by the secondary method.
PAGE 1402
To delete a setting, use the no access-class command. Parameters Defaults access-list-name Enter the name of an established IP Standard ACL. Not configured. Command Modes LINE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1403
password Defaults Enter a text string, up to 96 characters long, as the clear text password. No password is configured. level = 15. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Changed the maximum length of the password from 32 to 96. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1404
Parameters sha256-password Enter the keyword sha256-password then the encryption-type or the password. level level (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level then a number as the level of access. The range is from 1 to 15. encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 8 or 0 as the encryption type. Enter 8 to enter the sha256–based hashed password. password Defaults Enter a text string, up to 96 characters long, as the clear text password. No password is configured. level = 15.
PAGE 1405
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Only Dell EMC Networking Technical Support staff use this command.
PAGE 1406
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. To control access to command modes, use this command to define a password for a level and use the privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) command.
PAGE 1407
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.6.0.0 Revised introductory and usage guidelines description. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.
PAGE 1408
Version Description 9.13(0.0) Changed the maximum length of the password from 32 to 96. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1409
user-lockoutperiod minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword user-lockout-period then the number of minutes. The range is from 1 to 1440 minutes. The default is 0 minutes and the lockout-period is not enabled. This parameter enhances the security of the switch by locking out the local user account if there are more number of unsuccessful login attempts than what is configured using the max-retry parameter. The default value is 3 times.
PAGE 1410
Example In the following example, after 5 un-successful login attempts, the session (SSH/TELNET) goes into a locked state for 5 minutes. If all the 10 sessions are locked out with 5 un-successful attempts in each session, no users can login during the lockout-period. DellEMC(conf)# password-attributes max-retry 5 lockout-period 5 Related Commands ● password — specifies a password for users on terminal lines. secure-cli enable Enable the secured CLI mode.
PAGE 1411
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information CAUTION: Encrypting passwords with this command does not provide a high level of security. When the passwords are encrypted, you cannot return them to plain text unless you re-configure them.
PAGE 1412
Example Version Description pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show privilege Current privilege level is 15. DellEMC# DellEMC# show privilege Current privilege level is 14. DellEMC# DellEMC# show privilege Current privilege level is 10. DellEMC# Related Commands ● privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) — assign access control to different command modes. show users Allows you to view information on all users logged in to the switch.
PAGE 1413
Usage Information Example Related Commands The following describes the show user command shown in the following example. Field Description (untitled) Indicates with an asterisk (*) which terminal line you are using. Line Displays the terminal lines currently in use. User Displays the user name of all users logged in. Host(s) Displays the terminal line status. Location Displays the IP address of the user.
PAGE 1414
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1415
privilege level Enter the keyword privilege then a number from zero (0) to 15. role role-name Enter the keyword role followed by the role name to associate with that user ID. secret Enter the keyword secret then the encryption type. sha256-password Enter the keyword sha256-password then the encryption-type or the password. Defaults The default encryption type for password option is 0. The default encryption type for secret option is 5. The default encryption type for sha256-password option is 8.
PAGE 1416
● ● ● ● Related Commands A A A A minimum minimum minimum minimum of of of of one one one one lower case letter (a to z) upper case letter (A to Z) numeric character (0 to 9) special character including a space (" !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~") ● password — specifies a password for users on terminal lines. ● show running-config — views the current configuration. RADIUS Commands The following RADIUS commands are supported by Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1417
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1418
The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, S3100, S3048–ON, S4048T-ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6010–ON, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, S6000, Z9100–ON, Z9500, FM-IOM, and MXL. client-key Configures global shared key for the trusted DAC clients. Syntax client—key [encryption-type] key To remove the shared key configuration, enter the no client-key command.
PAGE 1419
Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, S3100, S3048–ON, S4048T-ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6010–ON, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, S6000, Z9100–ON, Z9500, FN-IOM, and MXL. coa-disable-port Configure NAS to reject disable-port requests from DAC. Syntax coa-disable-port To undo this configuration, enter the no coa-disable-port command. Defaults Enabled.
PAGE 1420
debug radius View RADIUS transactions to assist with troubleshooting. Syntax debug radius To disable debugging of RADIUS, use the no debug radius command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1421
Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, S3100, S3048–ON, S4048T-ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6010–ON, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, S6000, Z9100–ON, Z9500, FN-IOM, and MXL. disconnect-user Configure NAS to allow or reject DM requests corresponding to AAA users-sessions coming from the DAC. Syntax disconnect-user To undo this configuration, enter the no disconnect-user command. Defaults Enabled.
PAGE 1422
ip radius source-interface Specify an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for RADIUS connections. Syntax ip radius source-interface interface To delete a source interface, use the no ip radius source-interface command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1423
To remove the NAS port configuration, enter the no port command. Defaults Parameters 3799 port-number Enter the NAS port number to accept CoA and DM requests. The range is from 1 to 65535. Command Modes ● CONF-DYNAMIC-AUTH Usage Information ● Optionally specify dynamic authorization port number. Default port is 3799. Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1424
Defaults 0 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1425
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series. DellEMC(conf)# radius-server group group1 DellEMC(conf-radius-group)# radius-server host 1.1.1.1 key secret DellEMC(conf-radius-group)# radius-server host 2.2.2.
PAGE 1426
Command Modes ● RADIUS SERVER GROUP ● CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.5) Added support for RADIUS accounting. 9.11(0.0) Included a prompt to force the users to re-authenticate when there is a change in the RADIUS server list. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1427
Example DellEMC(config)#radius-server host 192.100.0.12 Force all logged-in users to re-authenticate (y/n)? DellEMC(config)#no radius-server host 192.100.0.12 Force all logged-in users to re-authenticate (y/n)? Related Commands ● login authentication — sets the database to be checked when a user logs in. ● radius-server key — sets an authentication key for RADIUS communications. ● radius-server retransmit — sets the number of times the RADIUS server attempts to send information.
PAGE 1428
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The key configured on the switch must match the key configured on the RADIUS server daemon. If you configure the key parameter in the radius-server host command, the key configured with the radius-server key command is the default key for all RADIUS communications. ● radius-server host — configures a RADIUS host.
PAGE 1429
radius-server timeout To reply to a request, configure the amount of time the RADIUS client (the switch) waits for a RADIUS host server . Syntax radius-server timeout seconds To return to the default value, use the no radius-server timeout command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the number of seconds between an unsuccessful attempt and the Dell EMC Networking OS times out. The range is from zero (0) to 1000 seconds. The default is 5 seconds.
PAGE 1430
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number.
PAGE 1431
rate-limit Configure NAS to allow or reject RADIUS dynamic authorization (DA) packets based on the configurable rate limit value. Syntax rate-limit packets per minute To undo the configuration, enter the no rate-limit command. Defaults Parameters 30 packets per minute. packet per minute Enter the number of packets that you want processed per minute. The range is between 10 to 60 packets per minute.
PAGE 1432
terminate-session Configure NAS to reject dot1x terminate-session requests from DAC. Syntax terminate-session To drop the DM terminate-session requests from DAC, enter the no terminate-session command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ● CONF-DYNAMIC-AUTH Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command.
PAGE 1433
Usage Information Example Related Commands If the TACACS group is not configured for Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting, then globally configured TACACS servers are used for the purposes. When the TACACS group is removed, the AAA configuration is also removed. DellEMC(conf)# tacacs-server group group1 DellEMC(conf-tacacs-group)# tacacs-server host 1.1.1.1 key secret DellEMC(conf-tacacs-group)# tacacs-server host 2.2.2.
PAGE 1434
ip tacacs source-interface Specify an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for TACACS+ connections. Syntax ip tacacs source-interface interface To delete a source interface, use the no ip tacacs source-interface command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1435
Parameters Defaults group-name Enter the name of the TACACS server group. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1436
key key Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword key then a string up to 42 characters long as the authentication key. This authentication key must match the key specified in the tacacs-server key for the TACACS+ daemon. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1437
Related Commands ● aaa authentication login — specifies the login authentication method. ● tacacs-server key — configures a TACACS+ key for the TACACS server. tacacs-server vrf Create an association between a TACACS server group and a VRF and source interface. Syntax tacacs-server vrf vrf-name [source-interface interface] To delete the association between a TACACS server group and a VRF and source interface, use the no tacacs-server vrf vrf-name [source-interface interface] command.
PAGE 1438
DellEMC(conf)# tacacs-server group group2 DellEMC(conf-tacacs-group)# tacacs-server vrf default tacacs-server key Configure a key for communication between a TACACS+ server and a client. Syntax tacacs-server key [encryption-type] key To delete a key, use the no tacacs-server key key command. Parameters Defaults encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter either zero (0) or 7 as the encryption type for the key entered.
PAGE 1439
Port Authentication (802.1X) Commands An authentication server must authenticate a client connected to an 802.1X switch port. Until the authentication, only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic is allowed through the port to which a client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic passes through the port. Dell EMC Networking OS supports RADIUS and Active Directory environments using 802.1X Port Authentication.
PAGE 1440
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● dot1x authentication (Interface) — enable dot1x on an interface. dot1x authentication (Interface) Enable dot1x on an interface; dot1x must be enabled both globally and at the interface level.
PAGE 1441
To delete the authentication failure VLAN, use the no dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id [maxattempts number] command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier. The range is from 1 to 4094. max-attempts (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords max-attempts then number of attempts desired before authentication fails. The range is from 1 to 5. The default is 3. number Defaults 3 attempts Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1442
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1443
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, S-Series, and E-Series. 802.1X authentication is enabled when an interface is connected to the switch. If the host fails to respond within a designated amount of time, the authenticator places the port in the guest VLAN. If a device does not respond within 30 seconds, it is assumed that the device is not 802.1X capable.
PAGE 1444
dot1x max-eap-req Configure the maximum number of times an extensive authentication protocol (EAP) request is transmitted before the session times out. Syntax dot1x max-eap-req number To return to the default, use the no dot1x max-eap-req command. Parameters Defaults number Enter the number of times an EAP request is transmitted before a session time-out. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2. 2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1445
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1446
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. dot1x reauthentication Enable periodic re-authentication of the client. Syntax dot1x reauthentication [interval seconds] To disable periodic re-authentication, use the no dot1x reauthentication command.
PAGE 1447
dot1x reauth-max Configure the maximum number of times a port can re-authenticate before the port becomes unauthorized. Syntax dot1x reauth-max number To return to the default, use the no dot1x reauth-max command. Parameters Defaults number Enter the permitted number of re-authentications. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2. 2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1448
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1449
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. dot1x tx-period Configure the intervals at which EAPOL PDUs are transmitted by the Authenticator PAE. Syntax dot1x tx-period seconds To return to the default, use the no dot1x tx-period command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the interval time, in seconds, that EAPOL PDUs are transmitted.
PAGE 1450
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. Defaults none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1451
Backend State: DellEMC# Initialize DellEMC# show dot1x interface fortyGigE 1/48 802.
PAGE 1452
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1453
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL debug ip ssh Enables collecting SSH debug information.
PAGE 1454
Usage Information Debug information includes details for key-exchange, authentication, and established session for each connection. ip scp topdir Identify a location for files used in secure copy transfer. Syntax ip scp topdir directory To return to the default setting, use the no ip scp topdir command. Parameters Defaults directory Enter a directory name. The internal flash (flash:) is the default directory. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1455
Defaults 3 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1456
Usage Information If both the challenge response authentication and password authentication methods are configured, the challenge response authentication takes priority. ip ssh cipher Configure the list of ciphers supported on both SSH client and SCP. Syntax ip ssh cipher cipher-list Parameters Defaults cipher cipher-list Enter the keyword cipher and then a space-delimited list of ciphers that the SSH client supports. The following ciphers are available.
PAGE 1457
Defaults 10 per minute Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Increased the SSH rate–limit range. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1458
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1459
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The server-generated key is used for SSHv1 key-exchange. ip ssh mac Configure the list of MAC algorithms supported on both SSH client and SCP. Syntax Parameters ip ssh mac mac-list mac mac-list Enter the keyword mac then a space-delimited list of message authentication code (MAC) algorithms supported by the SSH client.
PAGE 1460
Usage Information ● You can select one or more MAC algorithms from the list. ● Client-supported MAC list gets preference over the server-supported MAC list in selecting the MAC algorithm for the SSH session. ● When the MAC (-m) option is used with the SSH CLI, it overrides the configured or default MAC list. ● When FIPS is enabled or disabled, the client MACs get default configuration. ip ssh password-authentication Enable password authentication for the SSH server.
PAGE 1461
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 1462
To reset to the default, use no ip ssh rekey [time rekey-interval] [volume rekeylimit] command. Parameters Defaults time minutes Enter the keywords time then the amount of time in minutes. The range is from 10 to 1440 minutes. The default is 60 minutes volume rekeylimit Enter the keywords volume then the amount of volume in megabytes. The range is from 1 to 4096 to megabytes. The default is 1024 megabytes The default time is 60 minutes. The default volume is 1024 megabytes.
PAGE 1463
Example Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC#conf DellEMC(conf)# ip ssh rhostsfile flash://shosts DellEMC(conf)# This command specifies the rhost file used for host-based authentication.
PAGE 1464
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Enabling RSA authentication allows the user to log in without being prompted for a password.
PAGE 1465
ip ssh source-interface Specifies an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for an outgoing SSH connections. Syntax ip ssh source-interface interface To delete a source interface, use the no ip ssh source-interface command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1466
ip ssh server {ciphers cipher-list} {enable | port port-number} [kex keyexchange-algorithm] [mac hmac-algorithm][version 2] To disable SSH server functions, use the no ip ssh server {ciphers cipher-list} {enable | port port-number} [kex key-exchange-algorithm] [mac hmac-algorithm] command. Parameters enable Enter the key word enable to start the SSH server. ciphers cipher- Enter the keyword ciphers and then a space-delimited list of ciphers that the SSH server supports.
PAGE 1467
● diffie-hellman-group1-sha1 ● diffie-hellman-group14-sha1 When FIPS is enabled, the default key-exchange-algorithm is diffie-hellmangroup14-sha1. When FIPS is not enabled, the default key-exchange-algorithms are the following: ● diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1 ● diffie-hellman-group1-sha1, ● diffie-hellman-group14-sha1 port port-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword port then the port number of the listening port of the SSH server. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 22.
PAGE 1468
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command enables the SSH server and begins listening on a port. If a port is not specified, listening is on SSH default port 22. NOTE: Starting with Dell EMC Networking OS Release 9.2(0.0), SSH server is enabled by default.
PAGE 1469
Usage Information You can enable the SSH server on either a management VRF or a user defined VRF but not both. If no VRF is specified, then the SSH server is enabled on the default VRF. If the SSH server is enabled on a VRF with name vrf1, then use the following command to restart the SSH server on a VRF with name vrf2: ip ssh server vrf vrf2. If the SSH server is enabled on a VRF with name vrf1, then use the following command to restart the SSH server on the default VRF: ip ssh server vrf.
PAGE 1470
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command is useful if the remote SSH client implements Strict Host Key Checking. You can copy the host key to your list of known hosts.
PAGE 1471
Example Related Commands Version Description pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show ip ssh SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v2. SSH server vrf : default. SSH server ciphers : aes256-ctr,aes256-cbc,aes192-ctr,aes192cbc,aes128-ctr,aes128-cbc,3des-cbc. SSH server macs : hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96,hmacmd5,hmac-md5-96. SSH server kex algorithms : diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1,diffiehellman-group1-sha1,diffie-hellman-group14-sha1. Password Authentication : enabled.
PAGE 1472
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command displays the contents of the flash://ADMIN_DIRssh/knownhosts file. DellEMC# show ip ssh client-pub-keys 4.8.1.2 ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAu5NoTbmnLxBknaeXZmUJMupNwNUoGlo1/ yLPI5eehQTyaldRPHtGyPlcmMbCH+QJkqtyiwDPmH4njyDMYDCXY85vc55ibWsN9qalagklnh2cj2q4nYj5x8+8OOhYeFPaHiygd8 FXict61jWs84Co1UTsAgRzDJ9aUSS75TVac= root@dt-maa-linux-1.force10networks.
PAGE 1473
Usage Information Example This command displays the contents of the flash:/ADMIN_DIR/ssh/authorizedkeys.username file. DellEMC# show ip ssh rsa-authentication my-authorized-keys ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAyB17l4gFp4r2DRHIvMc1VZ d0Sg5GQxRV1y1X1JOMeO6Nd0WuYyzrQMM 4qJAoBwtneOXfLBcHF3V2hcMIqaZN+CRCnw/ zCMlnCf0+qVTd1oofsea5r09kS0xTp0CNfHXZ3NuGCq9Ov33m9+ U9tMwhS8vy8AVxdH4x4km3c3t5Jvc= freedom@poclab4 DellEMC# Related Commands ● ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config) — configures the RSA authorized keys.
PAGE 1474
● aes256-ctr : Force ssh to use aes256-ctr encryption cipher -l username (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -l then the user name used in this SSH session. The default is the user name of the user associated with the terminal. -m HMAC Enter one of the following HMAC algorithms to use: algorithm "no fips mode enable"(disable) will support v1 & v2 client. ● ● ● ● ● Defaults hmac-md5: Force ssh to use hmac-md5 HMAC algorithm. hmac-md5-96: Force ssh to use hmac-md5-96 HMAC algorithm.
PAGE 1475
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.12.0 Added support for the -c and -m parameters on the S4810. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 support. Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Dell EMC Networking OS supports both inbound and outbound SSH sessions using IPv4 or IPv6 addressing.
PAGE 1476
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ● show ip dhcp snooping — display the contents of the DHCP binding table. ip dhcp relay Enable Option 82.
PAGE 1477
ip dhcp snooping Enable DHCP Snooping globally. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1478
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. Defaults slot/port Enter the slot and port number of the interface. lease time Enter the keyword lease then the amount of time the IP address is leased. The range is from 1 to 4294967295. none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1479
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ip dhcp snooping database renew Renew the binding table.
PAGE 1480
Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.
PAGE 1481
Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ip dhcp snooping vlan Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs. Syntax Parameters Defaults [no] ip dhcp snooping vlan name name Enter the name of a VLAN on which to enable DHCP Snooping. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1482
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1483
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL.
PAGE 1484
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1485
Examples Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL DellEMC# show role mode configure username Role access: sysadmin DellEMC# show role mode configure management route Role access: netadmin, sysadmin DellEMC# show role mode configure management crypto-policy Role access: secadmin, sysadmin Related Commands ● userrole — create user roles.
PAGE 1486
Example DellEMC# show userroles Role Inheritance netoperator netadmin secadmin sysadmin netoperator testadmin Related Commands netadmin Modes Exec Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC Exec Config Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC ● userrole — create user roles. userrole Create user roles for the role-based security model.
PAGE 1487
Important Points to Remember Consider the following when creating a user role: ● Only the system administrator and user-defined roles inherited from the system administrator can create roles and usernames. Only the system administrator, security administrator, and roles inherited from these can use the role command to modify command permissions. The security administrator and roles inherited by security administrator can only modify permissions for commands they already have access to.
PAGE 1488
NOTE: The Dell EMC Networking OS does not suppress the ICMPv4 message type Echo request (8). Table 8.
PAGE 1489
NOTE: There is no separate CLI to enable IP ID randomness. By default, the IP ID in the kernel is randomized. For more information on the ICMP message types, see the ICMP Commands section.
PAGE 1490
51 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging is composed of virtual local area network (VLAN) Stacking, Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling, and Provider Backbone Bridging as described in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide Service Provider Bridging section. This section includes command line information (CLI) for the Dell EMC Networking OS Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT). L2PT enables protocols to tunnel through an 802.1q tunnel. Dell EMC Networking OS supports L2PT on Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1491
Defaults in | out | both Enter the keyword in, out, or both to debug incoming interfaces, outgoing interfaces, or both incoming and outgoing interfaces. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. count value Enter the keyword count then the number of debug outputs. The range is from 1 to 100. Debug disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1492
Example Related Command Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.
PAGE 1493
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced Usage Information When you enable VLAN-Stacking, no protocol packets are tunneled. Related Command ● show protocol-tunnel — displays tunneling information for all VLANs.
PAGE 1494
protocol-tunnel rate-limit Enable traffic rate limiting per box. Syntax protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate To reset the rate limit to the default, use the no protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate command. Parameters Defaults rate Enter the rate in frames per second. The range is from 75 to 3000. The default is 75. 75 frames per second. Command Modes CONF-IF-VLAN-STACK Command History Example Related Commands 1494 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1495
show protocol-tunnel Display protocol tunnel information for all or a specified VLAN-Stack VLAN. Syntax Parameters Defaults show protocol-tunnel [vlan vlan-id] vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display information for the one VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example Example (Specific VLAN) Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1496
52 sFlow The Dell EMC Networking OS supports sFlow commands. The Dell EMC Networking OS sFlow monitoring system includes an sFlow Agent and an sFlow Collector. ● The sFlow Agent combines the flow samples and interface counters into sFlow datagrams and forwards them to the sFlow Collector. ● The sFlow Collector analyses the sFlow Datagrams received from the different devices and produces a network-wide view of traffic flows.
PAGE 1497
sflow collector Configure a collector device to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded. Syntax sflow collector {ip-address | ipv6-address} agent-addr {ip-address | ipv6address} [number [max-datagram-size number]] | [max-datagram-size number] [vrf management] To delete a configured collector, use the no sflow collector {ip-address | ipv6address} agent-addr {ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [number [max-datagramsize number]] | [max-datagram-size number] [vrf management] command.
PAGE 1498
Usage Information Version Description 8.2.1.0 Introduced S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Expanded the no form of the command to mirror the syntax used to configure. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. You can configure up to two sFlow collectors (IPv4 or IPv6). If two collectors are configured, traffic samples are sent to both.
PAGE 1499
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information sFlow is disabled by default. In addition to this command, sFlow needs to be enable on individual interfaces where sFlow sampling is desired.
PAGE 1500
sflow extended-switch enable Enable packing information on a switch only. Syntax sflow extended-switch enable To disable packing information, use the no sflow extended-switch [enable] command. Parameters Defaults enable Enter the keyword enable to enable global extended information. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1501
Parameters Defaults extended Enter the keyword extended to copy 256 bytes from the sample packets to sFlow datagram. 128 bytes Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1502
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1503
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information This command sets the counter polling interval for an interface. Related Commands ● sflow polling-interval (Global) — globally sets the polling interval. sflow sample-rate (Global) Change the global default sampling rate.
PAGE 1504
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information Sample-rate is the average number of packets skipped before the sample is taken. This command changes the global default sampling rate. You can configure an interface to use a different sampling rate than the global sampling rate. If the value entered is not a correct power of 2, the command generates an error message with the previous and next power of 2 value.
PAGE 1505
Usage Information This command changes the sampling rate for an interface. By default, the sampling rate of an interface is set to the same value as the current global default sampling rate. If the value entered is not a correct power of 2, the command generates an error message with the previous and next power-of-2 value. Select one of these two number and re-enter the command. Related Commands ● sflow sample-rate (Global) — changes the sampling rate globally.
PAGE 1506
Usage Information Example The dropEvent counter (sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling) shown in the following example always displays a value of zero. DellEMC#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Egress Management Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global default extended maximum header size: 128 bytes Global extended information enabled: none 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 100.1.1.1, Agent IP addr: 1.1.1.
PAGE 1507
53 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and Syslog This section contains commands to configure and monitor the simple network management protocol (SNMP) v1/v2/v3 and Syslog. Both features are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • SNMP Commands Syslog Commands SNMP Commands The following SNMP commands are available in the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1508
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1509
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.
PAGE 1510
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Example Related Commands The following Example displays a group named ngroup.
PAGE 1511
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Example DellEMC#show snmp user User name: v1v2creadu Engine ID: 0000178B02000001E80214A8 storage-type: nonvolatile active Authentication Protocol: None Privacy Protocol: None DellEMC# snmp context Enables you to map a BGP VRF instance within an SNMP context through community mapping in SNMPv2c and SNMPv3.
PAGE 1512
Example Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. unknown Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1513
security-name name (Optional) Enter the keywords security-name then the security name as defined by the community MIB. access-list-name (Optional) Enter a standard IPv4 access list name (a string up to 16 characters long). Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1514
DellEMC(conf)# snmp-server community guest ro security-name guestuser DellEMC(conf)# Example Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# ip access-list standard snmp-ro-acl DellEMC(config-std-nacl)#seq 5 permit host 10.10.10.224 DellEMC(config-std-nacl)#seq 10 deny any count ! DellEMC(conf)# snmp-server community guest ro snmp-ro-acl DellEMC(conf)# ● ip access-list standard — names (or selects) a standard access list to filter based on IP address.
PAGE 1515
snmp-server enable traps Enable SNMP traps. Syntax snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notification-option] To disable traps, use the no snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notification-option] command.
PAGE 1516
Version Description 8.4.1.0 Added support for VRRP traps. 7.6.1.0 Added support for STP and xSTP traps. Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Dell EMC Networking OS supports up to 16 SNMP trap receivers. For the cam-utilization notification option, the system generates syslogs and SNMP traps when the L3 host table or route table utilization goes above the threshold.
PAGE 1517
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1518
The default is 1. auth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet without encryption. noauth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword noauth to specify no authentication of a packet. priv (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword priv to specify both authentication and then scrambling of the packet. read name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword read then a name (a string of up to 20 characters long) as the read view name.
PAGE 1519
Usage Information The following example specifies the group named harig as a version 3 user requiring both authentication and encryption and read access limited to the read named rview. NOTE: The number of configurable groups is limited to 16 groups. Example Related Commands DellEMC# conf DellEMC(conf)# snmp-server group harig 3 priv read rview DellEMC# ● show snmp group — displays the group name, security model, view status, and storage type of each group.
PAGE 1520
NOTE: For version 1 and version 2c security models, this string represents the name of the SNMP community. The string can be set using this command; however, Dell EMC Networking OS recommends setting the community string using the snmp-server community command before executing this command. For version 3 security model, this string is the USM user security name. udp-port port- number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords udp-port followed by the port number of the remote host to use. The range is from 0 to 65535.
PAGE 1521
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Added support for VRRP traps. 7.6.1.0 Added support for STP and xSTP notification types. Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information To configure the router to send SNMP notifications, enter at least one snmp-server host command. If you enter the command with no keywords, all trap types are enabled for the host.
PAGE 1522
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1523
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command snmp-server trap-source Configure a specific interface as the source for SNMP traffic.
PAGE 1524
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information To enable this snmp-server trap-source command, configure an IP address on the interface and enable the interface configured as an SNMP trap source. Related Commands ● snmp-server community — sets the community string.
PAGE 1525
auth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet without encryption. md5 | sha (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword md5 or sha to designate the authentication level. ● md5 — Message Digest Algorithm ● sha — Secure Hash Algorithm auth-password (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) password that enables the agent to receive packets from the host. Minimum: eight characters long.
PAGE 1526
Usage Information NOTE: For IPv6 ACLs, only IPv6 and UDP types are valid for SNMP. TCP and ICMP rules are not valid for SNMP. In IPv6 ACLs port rules are not valid for SNMP. No default values exist for authentication or privacy algorithms and no default password exists. If you forget a password, you cannot recover it; the user must be reconfigured. You can specify either a plain-text password or an encrypted cypher-text password.
PAGE 1527
Defaults aes128 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword aes128 to initiate the AES128-CFB encryption algorithm for transmission of SNMP packets. priv-password (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) password that enables the host to encrypt the contents of the message it sends to the agent and to decrypt the contents of the message it receives from the agent. Minimum: eight characters long.
PAGE 1528
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 1529
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Example Related Commands The oid-tree variable is a full sub-tree starting from 1.3.6 and cannot specify the name of a sub-tree or a MIB.
PAGE 1530
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information If the interface is expected to flap during normal usage, you could disable this command. Syslog Commands The following commands allow you to configure logging functions on all Dell EMC Networking switches. clear logging Clear the messages in the logging buffer.
PAGE 1531
Related Commands ● show logging — display logging settings and system messages in the internal buffer. clear logging auditlog Clears audit log. Syntax clear logging auditlog Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1532
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● logging buffered — set the logging buffered parameters. default logging console Return the default settings for messages logged to the console.
PAGE 1533
default logging monitor Return to the default settings for messages logged to the terminal. Syntax default logging monitor Defaults level = 7 or debugging Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.
PAGE 1534
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1535
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Added udp and tcp keywords for the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Added udp and tcp keywords for the S4810, S4820T, S6000, Z9000, and MXL. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.
PAGE 1536
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 1537
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, Z9000, and MXL. This command is available with or without RBAC enabled. When RBAC is enabled you can restrict access to audit and security logs based on the CLI sessions’ user roles.
PAGE 1538
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● clear logging — clears the logging buffer.
PAGE 1539
The default is local7. Defaults local7 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON.
PAGE 1540
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1541
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1542
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● default logging monitor — returns the logging monitor parameters to the default setting. logging on Specify that debug or error messages are asynchronously logged to multiple destinations, such as the logging buffer, Syslog server, or terminal lines.
PAGE 1543
● logging console — set the logging console parameters. ● logging monitor — set the logging parameters for the terminal connections. logging source-interface Specify that the IP address of an interface is the source IP address of Syslog packets sent to the Syslog server. Syntax logging source-interface interface To disable this command and return to the default setting, use the no logging source-interface command.
PAGE 1544
Version Description E-Series legacy command Usage Information Syslog messages contain the IP address of the interface used to egress the router. By configuring the logging source-interface command, the Syslog packets contain the IP address of the interface configured. Related Commands ● logging — enables logging to the Syslog server. logging synchronous Synchronize unsolicited messages and Dell EMC Networking OS output.
PAGE 1545
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information When you enable logging synchronous, unsolicited messages appear between software prompts and outputs. Only the messages with a severity at or below the set level are sent to the console. If the message queue limit is reached on a terminal line and messages are discarded, a system message appears on that terminal line. Messages may continue to appear on other terminal lines.
PAGE 1546
Usage Information To block a type of message parameter, set the logging trap level to a lower number. For example, to block severity messages at level 6, set the level to 5. Related Commands ● logging — enables the logging to another device. ● logging on — enables logging. logging version Displays syslog messages in a RFC 3164 or RFC 5424 format. Syntax logging version {0|1} Defaults 0 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1547
reverse (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword reverse to view the Syslog messages in FIFO (first in, first out) order. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table showing the number of messages per type and per slot. Slots *7* and *8* represent RPMs. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1548
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: 1.1.10.2 (Hold time expired) Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Oct 8 09:26:25: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: 1.1.11.2 closed. Neighbor recycled Oct 8 09:26:25: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: 1.1.14.2 closed. Neighbor recycled --More-Example (History) Neighbor 1.1.10.2 Up Session closed by neighbor Neighbor 192.200.14.
PAGE 1549
defaults none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 1550
terminal monitor Configure the Dell EMC Networking OS to display messages on the monitor/terminal. Syntax terminal monitor To return to default settings, use the terminal no monitor command. defaults Disabled. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1551
54 SNMP Traps This section lists the traps sent by the Dell EMC Networking OS. Each trap is listed by the fields Trap Type, Trap Name, Object Name, and MIB file. Table 9. SNMP Trap List TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 1 TR_COLD_START 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 COLDSTART rfc3418.mib SNMP COLD_START trap sent. 2 TR_WARM_START 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 WARMSTART rfc3418.mib SNMP WARM_START trap sent. 3 TR_LINK_DOWN 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 LINKDOWN rfc3418.
PAGE 1552
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 19 TR_CHM_RPM_U P 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.5 dellNetSysAlarmRp mUp DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The primary RPM generate this trap when the primary RPM or the secondary RPM is up and running. 20 TR_CHM_RPM_D OWN 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.6 dellNetSysAlarmRp mDown DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
PAGE 1553
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation the minor threshold. 28 TR_CHM_FANTRA 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 Y_BAD_CLR 6.1.5.1.14 dellNetSysAlarmFa nTrayClear DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The driver/agent generate this trap when a fan tray is now operational. 29 TR_CHM_MIN_FA NBAD_CLR 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.15 dellNetSysAlarmMi norFanBadClear DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
PAGE 1554
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME 42 Object Name MIB File Explanation TR_STP_NEW_RO 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1 OT newRoot BRIDGE-MIB.mib 802.1d new root trap support. 43 TR_STP_TOPOLO GY_CHANGE topologyChange BRIDGE-MIB.mib 802.1d topology change trap support. 44 TR_MSTP_NEW_R 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.20. OOT_BRIDGE 2.0.1 Not Available Not Available MSTP Not Supporting 45 TR_MSTP_NEW_R 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.20. OOT_PORT 2.0.
PAGE 1555
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation type. Implementation of this trap is optional 55 TR_VRRPV3_LEAV 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 E_MASTER 6.1.5.1.44 dellNetSysAlarmVrr DELLpGoMaster NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The VRRP generate this trap when it become a backup 56 TR_VRRPV3_GIVE UP_MASTER dellNetSysAlarmVrr DELLpGiveupMaster NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
PAGE 1556
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation MEP has a persistent defect, it may or may not generate a Fault Alarm to warn the system administrator of the problem, as controlled by the MEP Fault Notification Generator State Machine and associated Managed Objects. If a defect with a higher priority is raised after a Fault Alarm has been issued, another Fault Alarm is issued.
PAGE 1557
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation index into the MEP table (dot1agCfmMepTa ble). 62 TR_EOAM_THRSH 1.3.6.1.2.1.158.0.1 LD_EVT dot3OamThreshold Event stdeoam.mib "A dot3OamThreshold Event notification is sent when a local or remote threshold crossing event is detected.
PAGE 1558
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation detected by the reception of an Ethernet OAM Event Notification OAMPDU that indicates a nonthreshold crossing event. This notification should not be sent more than once per second. The OAM entity can be derived from extracting the ifIndex from the variable bindings. The objects in the notification correspond to the values in a row instance of the dot3OamEventLog Table.
PAGE 1559
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 68 TR_FIPS_ENODE_ DROP 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 2.4.0.5 dellNetENodeDrop pedTrap DELLNETWORKINGFIPSNOOPINGMIB.mib This trap is sent when a new ENode discovered is dropped, as the maximum allowed ENodes limit in the system is already reached 69 TR_FIPS_SESSION 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 _DROP 2.4.0.6 dellNetSessionReq uestDroppedTrap DELLNETWORKINGFIPSNOOPINGMIB.
PAGE 1560
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation dellNetETSGlobalE nableTrap is enabled to send the trap for Peer Up or Peer Down 74 TR_ETS_OPER_ST 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.15 dellNetETSPortDcb DELLATE_CHANGE .4.0.4 xOperStateTrap NETWORKINGDCB-MIB.mib This trap is generated in the following conditions.
PAGE 1561
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation enabled to send the trap for Peer Up or Peer Down 78 TR_PFC_OPER_S TATE_CHANGE 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.15 dellNetPFCPortDcb DELL.4.0.8 xOperStateTrap NETWORKINGDCB-MIB.mib This trap is generated in the following conditions. Whenever there is a change in the PFC Operational State and the dellNetPFCGlobalE nableTrap is enabled to send the trap for PFC state machine state change 79 TR_MPLS_TUNNE L_UP 1.3.6.
PAGE 1562
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 92 TR_CHM_MIN_AL ARM_PS_CLR 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.19 dellNetSysAlarmMi norPSClr DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The agent generate this trap when a power supply minor alarm is cleared. 93 TR_CHM_MIN_FA NBAD 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.20 dellNetSysAlarmMi norFanBad DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The agent generate this trap when fan is bad. 94 TR_SYSADM_CPU _THRESHOLD 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.
PAGE 1563
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation remote systems table maintenance polls. Note that transmission of lldpRemTablesChan ge notifications are throttled by the agent, as specified by the 'lldpNotificationInte rval' object. 103 TR_LLDP_MED_T OPOLOGY_CHAN GE 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.47 lldpXMedTopology 95.0.1 ChangeDetected lldp-ext-med.
PAGE 1564
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps. 108 TR_RMON_HC_RI SING_THRESHOL D 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.29.2.0. hcRisingAlarm 1 rfc3434.mib The SNMP notification that is generated when a high capacity alarm entry crosses its rising threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps.
PAGE 1565
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation conflict resolved during audit 113 TR_BATCH_CONFI 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5. batchConfigCommi G_IN_PROGRESS 1.2.0.4 tProgress DELLNETWORKINGCOPY-CONFIGMIB.mib The agent generate this trap when a configuration commit is initiated 114 TR_BATCH_CONFI 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5. batchConfigCommi G_COMPLETE 1.2.0.5 tCompleted DELLNETWORKINGCOPY-CONFIGMIB.
PAGE 1566
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID 129 TR_VLT_ICL_STA TUS_CHANGE MIB File Explanation 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.17 dellNetVLTIclStatu .2.0.2 sChange DELLNETWORKINGVIRTUAL-LINKTRUNK-MIB.mib The agent generates this notification to denote the change in InterConnect Link Status.The notification contains information on the new ICL status. The possible states are as follows: 1. NotEstabished 2. LinkUp 3. LinkDown 4. LinkError" 130 TR_VLT_PEER_ST 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.
PAGE 1567
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation in Bandwidth usage of ICL Link, when it crosses the threshold above 80 %. The possible states are as follows: 0. Below threshold 1. Above threshold" 133 TR_VLT_DOMAIN _CFG_ERROR 134 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.17 dellNetVLTDomain .2.0.6 ConfigError DELLNETWORKINGVIRTUAL-LINKTRUNK-MIB.
PAGE 1568
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation generated when the value of entLastChangeTim e changes. It can be utilized by an NMS to trigger logical/physical entity table maintenance polls. An agent should not generate more than one entConfigChange 'notification-event' in a given time interval (five seconds is the suggested default). A 'notification-event' is the transmission of a single trap or inform PDU to a list of notification destinations.
PAGE 1569
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation throttling or transmission loss. 139 TR_CHM_STACK_ UNIT_ROLE 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.46 dellNetSysAlarmSta DELLckUnitRoleChanged NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib Trap generated when a stack unit's role in a stack changes to management/ standby/member 140 TR_CHM_VERSIO N_MISMATCH 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.23 dellNetSysAlarmCa DELLrdVersionMismatch NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
PAGE 1570
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 148 TR_BRM_PE_UNI T_DOWN 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.30 dellNetSysAlarmPE UnitDown DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The driver/agent generate this trap when a PE Unit operational status is down 149 TR_SYSLOG_SER VER_CONNECTIO N_SUCCESSFUL 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3 0.1.1.2 Not Available Not Available Connecting to server with Valid configuration. 150 TR_SYSLOG_SER VER_CONNECTIO N_FAILURE 1.3.6.1.4.
PAGE 1571
55 Stacking All commands in this chapter are specific to the Dell EMC Networking OS. You can use the commands to pre-configure a switch, so that the configuration settings are invoked when the switch is attached to other S-Series units. For information about using the S-Series stacking feature, see the Stacking S-Series Switches section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. CAUTION: You cannot enable stacking simultaneously with virtual link trunking (VLT).
PAGE 1572
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.0 Added the members option.
PAGE 1573
... Proceed with stack-unit hot failover [confirm yes/no]:yes redundancy protocol Enable hitless failover for a protocol. Syntax Protocols Defaults redundancy protocol lacp Enter the LACP protocol xstp Enter one of the following protocols: STP, RSTP, MSTP, PVST. Not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1574
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.0 Added the hard reset option. Resetting the management unit is not allowed, and an error message displays if you try to do so. Resetting is a soft reboot, including flushing the forwarding tables. Starting with Dell EMC Networking OS version 7.8.1.0, you can run this command directly on the stack standby unit (standby master) to reset the standby.
PAGE 1575
● grep — show only text that matches a pattern. ● no-more — do not paginate the output. ● save — save the output to a file.
PAGE 1576
Usage Information Example Example (Status) Example (Topology) Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. The following describes the show system stack-ports command shown in the following example.
PAGE 1577
2/49 2/51 2/52 DellEMC# Related Commands 0/51 1/50 ● reset stack-unit – resets the designated stack member. ● show hardware stack-unit – displays the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member. ● show system – displays the current status of all stack members or a specific member. stack-unit priority Configure the ability of a switch to become the management unit of a stack.
PAGE 1578
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000.
PAGE 1579
upgrade system stack-unit Copy the boot image or Dell EMC Networking OS from the management unit to one or more stack members. Syntax Parameters Defaults upgrade {boot | system} stack-unit {all | stack-unit-number | A | B} boot Enter the keyword boot to copy the boot image from the management unit to the designated stack members. system Enter the keyword system to copy the Dell EMC Networking OS image from the management unit to the designated stack members. stack-unit Enter the stack-unit number.
PAGE 1580
56 Storm Control The Dell EMC Networking OS storm control feature allows you to limit or suppress traffic during a traffic storm (Broadcast/ Unknown Unicast Rate Limiting or Multicast on the C-Series and S-Series). Storm control is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Important Points to Remember ● Interface commands can only be applied on physical interfaces (virtual local area networks [VLANs] and link aggregation group [LAG] interfaces are not supported).
PAGE 1581
Parameters Defaults interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface-specific storm control configuration: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1582
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1583
● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1584
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1585
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added the percentage decimal value option. 6.5.1.
PAGE 1586
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON.
PAGE 1587
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-series and S-Series.
PAGE 1588
Usage Information Version Description 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added the percentage decimal value option. 6.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Unknown Unicast Storm-Control is valid for Layer 2 and Layer 2/Layer 3 interfaces. storm-control unknown-unicast (Interface) Configure percentage of unknown-unicast traffic allowed on an interface (ingress only).
PAGE 1589
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added the percentage decimal value option. 6.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1590
57 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The commands in this section configure and monitor the IEEE 802.1d spanning tree protocol (STP) and are supported on the Dell EMC Networking switch/routing platform. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • bridge-priority bpdu-destination-mac-address debug spanning-tree description disable forward-delay hello-time max-age protocol spanning-tree show config show spanning-tree 0 spanning-tree bridge-priority Set the bridge priority of the switch in an IEEE 802.1D spanning tree.
PAGE 1591
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. bpdu-destination-mac-address Use the Provider Bridge Group address in Spanning Tree or GVRP PDUs.
PAGE 1592
To disable debugging, use the no debug spanning-tree command. Parameters stp-id Enter zero (0). The switch supports one spanning tree group with a group ID of 0. protocol Enter the keyword for the type of STP to debug, either mstp, pvst, or rstp. all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations. bpdu (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug bridge protocol data units. config (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword config to debug configuration information.
PAGE 1593
Parameters Defaults description Enter a description to identify the spanning tree (80 characters maximum). none Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-stp”.) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON.
PAGE 1594
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● protocol spanning-tree — enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
PAGE 1595
Related Commands Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● max-age — changes the wait time before STP refreshes protocol configuration information. ● hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs. hello-time Set the time interval between generation of the spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). Syntax hello-time seconds To return to the default value, use the no hello-time command.
PAGE 1596
max-age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information, set the time interval for the spanning tree bridge. Syntax max-age seconds To return to the default values, use the no max-age command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter a number of seconds the Dell EMC Networking OS waits before refreshing configuration information. The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds.
PAGE 1597
Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1598
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1599
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.
PAGE 1600
Example Field Description “Designated port...” Displays the designated port ID. DellEMC# show spann 0 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.0a56 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 We are the root of the spanning tree Current root has priority 32768 address 0001.e800.
PAGE 1601
Example (Guard) Field Description Interface Name STP interface. Instance STP 0 instance. Sts Port state: root-inconsistent (INCON Root), forwarding (FWD), listening (LIS), blocking (BLK), or shut down (EDS Shut). Guard Type Type of STP guard configured (Root, Loop, or BPDU guard).
PAGE 1602
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1603
58 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell EMC Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell EMC Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell EMC Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell EMC Networking Open Automation guide.
PAGE 1604
Usage Information ● When you run the command, the system displays a message with the information directing to the URL for further information. ● Even before you accept or reject the EULA, the configuration data is sent to the default centrally deployed SupportAssist Server. If you reject the EULA, the configuration data is not transmitted to the SupportAssist server. ● If there is an existing SupportAssist configuration, the configuration is not removed and the feature is disabled.
PAGE 1605
Related Commands ● support-assist — moves to the SupportAssist Configuration mode. support-assist Move to the SupportAssist configuration mode. Syntax support-assist To remove all the configuration of the SupportAssist service, use the no support-assist command. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.
PAGE 1606
support-assist activity Trigger an activity event immediately. Syntax support-assist activity {full-transfer | core-transfer} start now Parameters full-transfer Enter the keyword full-transfer to specify transfer of configuration, inventory, logs, and other information. core-transfer Enter the keyword core-transfer to specify transfer of core files. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1607
Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. Introduced the core-transfer and event-transfer parameters. Usage Information 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. By default, each activity follows a set of default actions using a default schedule.
PAGE 1608
Parameters first-name (Optional) Enter the first name for the contact person. This is optional provided each contact person name is unique. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes. last-name Enter the last name for the contact person. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes. Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1609
server Configure the name of the remote SupportAssist Server and move to SupportAssist Server mode. Syntax server {default | server-name} To delete a server, use the no server server-name command. Parameters Defaults default Enter the keyword default for the default server. server-name Enter the name of the custom server to which the logs would be transferred. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes. Default server has URL stor.g3.ph.dell.
PAGE 1610
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.
PAGE 1611
Related Commands ● action-manifest get — copy an action-manifest file for an activity to the system. ● action-manifest show — view the list of action-manifest for a specific activity. ● action-manifest remove — remove the action-manifest file for an activity. action-manifest remove Remove the action-manifest file from Dell EMC Networking OS. Syntax Parameters action-manifest remove } local-file-name Enter the name of the local action-manifest file.
PAGE 1612
Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. ● action-manifest get — copy an action-manifest file for an activity to the system. ● action-manifest install — configure the action-manifest to use for a specific activity. ● action-manifest remove — remove the action-manifest file for an activity. enable Enable a specific SupportAssist activity.
PAGE 1613
To remove the complete company contact information, use the no address command. Parameters city company- city province | region | state name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword city then the city or town for the company site. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword province, region or state then the name of province, region or state for the company site. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes.
PAGE 1614
Usage Information Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. This command is optional for SupportAssist service configuration. territory Configure the territory and set the coverage for the company site.
PAGE 1615
Parameters primary email- address alternate emailaddress Enter the keyword primary then the primary email address for the person. Enter the keyword alternate then the alternate email address for the person. Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST PERSON Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM.
PAGE 1616
Related Commands ● preferred-method — configure the preferred method for contacting the person. preferred-method Configure the preferred method for contacting the person. Syntax preferred-method {email | no-contact | phone] Parameters Defaults email Enter the keyword email to specify email as preferred method. no-contact Enter the keywords no-contact to specify that there is no preferred method. phone Enter the keyword phone to specify phone as preferred method.
PAGE 1617
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. This command is optional for SupportAssist service configuration. SupportAssist Server Commands Dell EMC Networking OS supports the following SupportAssist Server mode commands. proxy-ip-address Configure a proxy for reaching the SupportAssist remote server.
PAGE 1618
Usage Information The passwords are stored encrypted in the running configuration. enable Enable communication with the SupportAssist server. Syntax enable To disable communication to a specific SupportAssist server, use the no enable command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST SERVER Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 1619
Usage Information The URL should be formatted to follow the ISO format. show eula-consent Display the EULA for the feature. Syntax Parameters show eula-consent {support-assist | other feature} support-assist | other feature Enter the keywords support-assist or the text corresponding to other feature. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1620
allow Dell to transmit and store the Collected Data from SupportAssist in accordance with these terms. You agree that the provision of SupportAssist may involve international transfers of data from you to Dell and/or to Dells affiliates, subcontractors or business partners. When making such transfers, Dell shall ensure appropriate protection is in place to safeguard the Collected Data being transferred in connection with SupportAssist.
PAGE 1621
preferred-method email time-zone zone +05:30 start-time 12:23 end-time 15:23 ! server Dell enable url http://1.1.1.1:1332 DellEMC# show support-assist status Display information on SupportAssist feature status including any activities, status of communication, last time communication sent, and so on. Syntax show support-assist status Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1622
59 System Time and Date The commands in this section configure time values on the system, either using the Dell EMC Networking OS, or the hardware, or using the network time protocol (NTP). With NTP, the switch can act only as a client to an NTP clock host. For more information, see “Network Time Protocol” of the Management section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 1623
Defaults end-day Enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. end-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English. You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year. end-time Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. end-year Enter a four-digit number as the year.
PAGE 1624
Defaults start-week (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following as the week that daylight saving begins and then enter values for start-day through end-time: ● week-number: Enter a number from 1 to 4 as the number of the week in the month to start daylight saving time. ● first: Enter this keyword to start daylight saving time in the first week of the month. ● last: Enter this keyword to start daylight saving time in the last week of the month.
PAGE 1625
Related Commands Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Updated the start-day and end-day options to allow for using the three-letter abbreviation of the weekday name. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ntp trusted-key — configures a trusted key. ● clock summer-time date — sets a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight saving time on a one-time basis. ● show clock — displays the current clock settings.
PAGE 1626
Usage Information Coordinated universal time (UTC) is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time standard, commonly known as Greenwich Mean time. When determining system time, include the differentiator between UTC and your local timezone. For example, San Jose, CA is the Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of -8. debug ntp Display Network Time Protocol (NTP) transactions and protocol messages for troubleshooting.
PAGE 1627
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. You also must configure an authentication key for NTP traffic using the ntp authentication-key command. ntp authentication-key Specify a key for authenticating the NTP server.
PAGE 1628
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.2.1.0 Added options [0 | 7] for entering the authentication key. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. After configuring the ntp authentication-key command, configure the ntp trusted-key command to complete NTP authentication. Dell EMC Networking OS versions 8.2.1.
PAGE 1629
ntp broadcast client Set up the interface to receive NTP broadcasts from an NTP server. Syntax ntp broadcast client To disable broadcast, use the no ntp broadcast client command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
PAGE 1630
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.
PAGE 1631
Version Description 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6 multicast addresses. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ntp master Configure the switch as NTP Server. Syntax Parameters Defaults ntp master ntp Enter the stratum number to identify the NTP Server's hierarchy. The master stratum range value is from 2 to 15 and the default value is 8. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1632
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3038–ON, S4048-ON, S3100 Series, S4810P, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, Z9500, and Z9100–ON. The ntp offset-threshold command does not time synchronization. DellEMC(config)# ntp offset-threshold 4 ntp server Configure an NTP time-serving host.
PAGE 1633
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.6(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.1.0 Added IPv6 support. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. You can configure multiple time-serving hosts.
PAGE 1634
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then slot/port information. ● For a port-channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then the port-channel ID. ● For VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured.
PAGE 1635
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced the trusted-key range update on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.14(0.0) The trusted-key range value is increased from 1 to 65534. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series.
PAGE 1636
Example Example (Detail) Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC#show clock 11:05:56.
PAGE 1637
Usage Information Example (without ntp master configuration) Example (with ntp master configuration) Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ntp associations command shown in the Example below.
PAGE 1638
* master (synced), # backup, + selected, - outlier, x falseticker Dell EMC# In the above example, ● LOCAL(0) indicates that the local machine synchronizes with itself. ● .LOCL. indicates reference clock of the NTP master. Related Commands ● show ntp status — displays the current NTP status. show ntp vrf associations Displays the NTP servers configured for the VRF instance . Syntax show ntp [vrf] associations.
PAGE 1639
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1640
60 u-Boot All commands in this section are in u-Boot and are supported on the Dell Networking S4810 and 4820T platforms only. To access this mode, press any key when the following line appears on the console during a system boot. Hit any key to stop autoboot: Enter u-Boot immediately, as the => prompt indicates. NOTE: This section describes only a few commands available in u-Boot.
PAGE 1641
ethact=eTSEC1 ethaddr=00:01:E8:82:09:B2 serverip=10.11.9.4 primary_boot=f10boot tftp://10.11.9.2/si-S4810-40g secondary_boot=f10boot flash0 default_boot=f10boot tftp://192.168.128.1/FTOS-SC-1.2.0.0E3.bin gatewayip=10.11.192.254 ipaddr=10.11.198.114 netmask=255.255.0.0 mgmtautoneg=true mgmtspeed100=true mgmtfullduplex=true stdin=serial stdout=serial stderr=serial Environment size: 1002/8188 bytes => Usage Information ● ethaddr=00:01:E8:82:09:B2 is the MAC address. ● primary_boot=f10boot tftp://10.11.9.
PAGE 1642
Version 8.3.7.0 Usage Information Introduced on the S4810. Save your changes before resetting the system or all your changes will be lost. setenv Configure system settings. Syntax setenv [gatewayip address | primary_image f10boot location | secondary_image f10boot location | default_image f10boot location | ipaddre address | ethaddr address | enablepwdignore | stconfigignore] Parameters gatewayip Enter the IP address for the default gateway.
PAGE 1643
61 Tunneling Tunneling is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • ip unnumbered ipv6 unnumbered tunnel allow-remote tunnel destination tunnel dscp tunnel flow-label tunnel hop-limit tunnel keepalive tunnel-mode tunnel source ip unnumbered Configure a tunnel interface to operate without a unique IPv4 address and select the interface from which the tunnel borrows its address.
PAGE 1644
Usage Information The ip unnumbered command fails in two conditions: ● If the logical ip address is configured. ● If Tunnel mode is ipv6ip (where ip address over tunnel interface is not possible). To ping the unnumbered tunnels, the logical address route information must be present at both the ends. NOTE: The ip unnumbered command can specify an interface name that does not exist or does not have a configured IPv6 address.
PAGE 1645
tunnel allow-remote Configure an IPv4 or IPv6 address or prefix whose tunneled packets are accepted for decapsulation. If you do not configure allow-remote entries, tunneled packets from any remote peer address is accepted. This feature is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Syntax tunnel allow-remote {ip-address | ipv6-address} [mask] To delete a configured allow-remote entry use the no tunnel allow-remote command. Any specified address/mask values must match an existing entry for the delete to succeed.
PAGE 1646
Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter the destination IPv4 address for the tunnel. ipv6–address Enter the destination IPv6 address for the tunnel. none Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL (conf-if-tu) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1647
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S6000, S4810, S4820T, Z9000.
PAGE 1648
tunnel hop-limit Configure the method to set the IPv4 time-to-live or the IPv6 hop limit value in the outer tunnel header. Syntax tunnel hop-limit value To restore the default tunnel hop-limit, use the no tunnel hop-limit command. Parameters Defaults value Enter the hop limit (ipv6) or time-to-live (ipv4) value to include in the tunnel header. The range is from 0 to 255. The default is 64.
PAGE 1649
Defaults Tunnel keepalive is disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1650
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added the decapsulate-any command. 9.3(0.1) Introduced on the S6000 and Z9000. To enable a tunnel interface, use this command.
PAGE 1651
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added the tunnel source anylocal command. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000 and Z9000. Added an optional keyword “anylocal” to the tunnel source command.
PAGE 1652
62 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if you use this with NIC teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link.
PAGE 1653
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50. ● downstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface.
PAGE 1654
description Enter a text description of an uplink-state group. Syntax description text Parameters Defaults text Text description of the uplink-state group. The maximum length is 80 alphanumeric characters. none Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10.0.2 Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.
PAGE 1655
Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10.0.2 Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.
PAGE 1656
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50. ● downstream — assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface. ● uplink-state-group — create an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links.
PAGE 1657
enable Enable uplink state group tracking for a specific UFD group. Syntax enable To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, use the no enable command. Defaults Upstream-link tracking is automatically enabled in an uplink-state group. Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1658
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.
PAGE 1659
Example Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.
PAGE 1660
5/12(Dis) Te 5/13(Dis) Te 5/14(Dis) Te 5/15(Dis) Uplink State Group : 6 Status: Enabled, Up Upstream Interfaces : Downstream Interfaces : Uplink State Group : 7 Status: Enabled, Up Upstream Interfaces : Downstream Interfaces : Uplink State Group : 16 Status: Disabled, Up Upstream Interfaces : Te 1/25(Dwn) Po 8(Dwn) Downstream Interfaces : Te 1/30(Dwn) Related Commands ● show running-config uplink-state-group — displays the current configuration of one or more uplinkstate groups.
PAGE 1661
To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, use the no enable command in uplink-state-group configuration mode. Example Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# uplink-state-group 16 DellEMC(conf)# 02:23:17: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-ASTATE_UP: Changed uplink state group Admin state to up: Group 16 DellEMC(conf)# ● show running-config uplink-state-group — displays the current configuration of one or more uplinkstate groups.
PAGE 1662
You can assign individual member ports of a port channel to the group. An uplink-state group can contain either the member ports of a port channel or the port channel itself, but not both. Example Related Commands 1662 DellEMC(conf-uplink-state-group-16)# upstream tengigabitethernet 1/10-15 DellEMC(conf-uplink-state-group-16)# ● downstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface.
PAGE 1663
63 VLAN Stacking With the virtual local area network (VLAN)-stacking feature (also called stackable VLANs and QinQ), you can “stack” VLANs into one tunnel and switch them through the network transparently. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports this feature. For more information about basic VLAN commands, see the Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands section in Layer 2.
PAGE 1664
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. When packets are colored green; no packets are dropped.
PAGE 1665
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Enable DEI before using this command. dei mark Set the DEI value on egress according to the color currently assigned to the packet. S4820T Syntax Parameters Defaults dei mark {green | yellow} {0 | 1} 0|1 Enter the bit value you want to map to a color. green | red | yellow Choose a color: ● Green: High priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped.
PAGE 1666
member Assign a stackable VLAN access or trunk port to a VLAN. The VLAN must contain the vlan-stack compatible command in its configuration. Syntax member interface To remove an interface from a Stackable VLAN, use the no member interface command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel, and then a number.
PAGE 1667
stack-group-id Enter the stack group ID. The range is from 0 to 16. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1668
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. E-Series original Command Usage Information Prior to enabling this command, to place the interface in Layer 2 mode, enter the switchport command.
PAGE 1669
Version Description E-Series original Command Usage Information Prior to disabling the stackable VLAN feature, remove the members. To view the stackable VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode. Stackable VLANs contain members, designated by the M in the Q column of the command output. If you enabled VRF, you cannot enable the stacked VLAN feature using this command. If you enabled IGMP snooping, you cannot enable the stacked VLAN feature using this command.
PAGE 1670
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. You can separate the C-Tag values by commas or dashed ranges. In the case of conflicts, dynamic mode CoS overrides any Layer 2 QoS configuration.
PAGE 1671
Usage Information For specific interoperability limitations regarding the S-Tag TPID, see the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. The four characters you may enter are shown in the following table. Related Commands Number Resulting TPID 1 0x0001 10 0x0010 81 0x0081 8100 0x8100 ● portmode hybrid — sets a port (physical ports only) to accept both tagged and untagged frames. A port configured this way is identified as a hybrid port in report displays.
PAGE 1672
Version Description E-Series original Command Usage Information Prior to using this command, to place the interface in Layer 2 mode, use the switchport command. To remove the trunk port designation, first remove the port (using the no member interface command) from all stackable VLAN-enabled VLANs. In Example 1, a VLAN-Stack trunk port is configured and then made part of a single-tagged VLAN. In Example 2, the tag protocol identifier (TPID) is set to 88A8.
PAGE 1673
DellEMC(conf-if-te-5/1)# vlan-stack trunk DellEMC(conf-if-te-5/1)# exit DellEMC(config)# interface vlan 10 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# vlan-stack compatible DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# member Te 4/1, Te 3/10, TenGi 5/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# exit DellEMC(config)# interface vlan 30 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# untagged TenGi 5/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# exit DellEMC(config)# DellEMC(config)# interface vlan 40 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# tagged TenGi 5/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# exit DellEMC(config)# VLAN Stacking 1673
PAGE 1674
64 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core. VLT eliminates the requirement for Spanning Tree protocols by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches, and by supporting a loop-free topology.
PAGE 1675
back-up destination Configure the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the management interface on the remote VLT peer used as the VLT backup link endpoint for sending out-of-band (OOB) hello messages. Syntax Parameters Defaults back-up destination {[ipv4–address] | [ipv6 ipv6–address] [interval seconds] vrf [management vrf-name | vrf-name]} ipv4–address Enter the IPv4 address of the backup destination. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 then an IPv6 address in the X:X:X:X::X format.
PAGE 1676
clear vlt statistics Clear the VLT operation statistics. Syntax clear vlt statistics [arp | domain | igmp-snoop | mac | multicast | ndp] Parameters domain Clear the VLT statistics for the domain. multicast Clear the VLT statistics for multicast. mac Clear the VLT statistics for the MAC address. arp Clear the VLT statistics for ARP. igmp-snoop Clear the VLT statistics for IGMP snooping. ndp Clear the VLT statistics for NDP.
PAGE 1677
delay-restore Configure the delay in bringing up VLT ports after reload or peer-link restoration between the VLT peer switches. Syntax Parameters Defaults delay-restore delay-restore Enter the amount of time, in seconds, to delay bringing up the VLT ports after the VLTi device reloads or after the peer-link restores between VLT peer switches. The range from 1 to 1200. The default is 90 seconds. Not configured. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1678
This delay restore timer applies only during reload/boot-up and not in other scenarios (for example, during ICL flap). Defaults 60 seconds Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1679
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Added port-channel parameter on the S4810. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. LACP on the VLT ports (on a VLT switch or access device), which are members of the VLT, are not brought up until the VLT domain is recognized on the access device.
PAGE 1680
Command Modes VLT DOMAIN (conf-vlt-domain) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1681
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Added support for the peer-down-vlan option. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. To configure the VLAN from where the VLT peer forwards packets received over the VLTi from an adjacent VLT peer that is down, use the peer-down-vlan option.
PAGE 1682
peer-routing-timeout Configure the delay after which peer routing disables when the peer is unavailable. This command is applicable for both IPv6 and IPv4. Syntax peer-routing-timeout value To restore the default value, use the no peer-routing-timeout command. Parameters value Enter the timeout value (in seconds). The range is from 1 to 65535. The default value is infinity. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN (conf-vlt-domain) Default Infinity Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1683
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
PAGE 1684
Usage Information Example (Brief) Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. The version shown in the show vlt brief output command displays the VLT version number which is different from the Dell EMC Networking OS version number. VLT version numbers begin with odd numbers.
PAGE 1685
Example Version Description 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. Dell_VLTpeer1# show vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.11.200.18 Up 1 3 34998 1026 1025 show vlt counters Displays counter information.
PAGE 1686
Usage Information Example Example (igmpsnoop) Example (igmpsnoop interface port-channel) If you do not add a parameter such as arp or mac, the output displays all the counters.
PAGE 1687
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 1688
-----------------------(22.22.22.200, 225.1.1.2) VLAN 5 (*, 225.1.1.2) VLAN 15 DellEMC# --------VLAN 6 te 1/5 show vlt mismatch Display mismatches in VLT parameters. Syntax show vlt mismatch Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Updated to show mismatch in VXLAN instance parameters. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1689
Example for Q-in-Q implementation over VLT DellEMC#show vlt mismatch Domain -----Parameters Local Peer ----------------PB for stp Enabled Disabled Vlan-type-config ---------------Codes:: P - Primary, C - Community, I - Isolated, N - Normal vlan, M Vlan-stack Vlan-ID ------- Local ----- 100 N Peer ---M Port-type-config ---------------Codes:: p - PVLAN Promiscuous port, h - PVLAN Host port, t - PVLAN Trunk port, mt - Vlan-stack trunk port, mu - Vlan-stack access port, n Normal port Vlt Lag ------128 Lo
PAGE 1690
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 1691
Related Commands Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.2) Added parameters multicast and ndp 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 1692
Reg Response Sent: 1 Reg Response Rcvd: 0 Route updates sent to Peer: 0 Route updates rcvd from Peer: 0 Route update pkts sent to Peer: 0 Route update pkts rcvd from Peer: 0 VLT NDP Statistics -------------------NDP NA VLT Tunnel Pkts sent:16 NDP NA VLT Tunnel Pkts Rcvd:46 NDP NA Non-VLT Tunnel Pkts sent:0 NDP NA Non-VLT Tunnel Pkts Rcvd:0 Ndp-sync Pkts Sent:144 Ndp-sync Pkts Rcvd:105 Ndp Reg Request sent:25 Ndp Reg Request rcvd:24 show vlt statistics igmp-snoop Displays the informational packets and IGMP
PAGE 1693
system-mac Reconfigure the default MAC address for the domain. Syntax Parameters Defaults system-mac mac-address mac-address Enter the system MAC address for the VLT domain. Not configured. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 1694
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. When you create a VLT domain on a switch, the Dell EMC Networking OS automatically assigns a unique unit ID (0 or 1) to each peer switch.
PAGE 1695
Related Commands ● show vlt brief — display the delay-restore value. vlt-peer-lag port-channel Associate the port channel to the corresponding VLT peer port channel for the VLT connection to an attached device. Syntax Parameters Defaults vlt-peer-lag port-channel id-number id-number Enter the respective VLT port-channel number of the peer device. The range is from 1 to 128. Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1696
Usage Information Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S4810, and S4820T. If you add an ICL or VLTi link as a member of a primary VLAN, the ICL becomes a part of the primary VLAN and its associated secondary VLANs, similar to the behavior for normal trunk ports. VLAN symmetry is not validated if you associate an ICL to a PVLAN.
PAGE 1697
65 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1698
proxy-gateway static Enables the proxy-gateway feature using static configurations. Syntax [no] proxy-gateway static Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1699
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000.
PAGE 1700
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000. You must configure the VLT port channel interface which is connecting to the remote VLT domain as peer-domain-link.
PAGE 1701
vlt-peer-mac transmit Enables the device to transmit the peer MAC address along with its own MAC address in LLDP TLV packets to the remote VLT domain. S4820T Syntax [no] vlt-peer-mac transmit Command Modes VLT DOMAIN PROXY GW LLDP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1702
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000.
PAGE 1703
66 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to coexist on the same router at the same time. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ip vrf ip http vrf description ip vrf forwarding ip route-export ip route-import ipv6 route-export ipv6 route-import match source-protocol redistribute interface management maximum dynamic-routes show ip vrf show run vrf ip vrf Create or delete a customer VRF.
PAGE 1704
ip http vrf Configure an HTTP client with a VRF used to connect to the HTTP server. S4820T Syntax ip http vrf {management | vrf-name} To undo the HTTP client configuration, use the ip http vrf command. Parameters Defaults management Enter the keyword management for configuring the management VRF that uses an HTTP client. vrf-name Enter a VRF name that the HTTP client uses. If you do not specify a VRF name, the HTTP client uses the default VRF.
PAGE 1705
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series. ip vrf forwarding Attach an interface to a VRF.
PAGE 1706
You can configure an IP subnet or address on a physical or VLAN interface that overlaps the same IP subnet or address configured on another interface only if the interfaces are assigned to different VRFs. If you assign two interfaces to the same VRF, you cannot configure overlapping IP subnets or the same IP address to them.
PAGE 1707
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9500. To export all the routes corresponding to a source VRF, you can use the ip route-export tag command without specifying the route-map attribute. This action exposes source VRF routes to various other VRFs, which then import these routes using the ip route-import tag command.
PAGE 1708
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9500. It is possible to configure multiple import conditions per VRF depending on the exporting VRF. The export-target and import-target support only the match protocol and match prefix-list options. Other options that are configured in the route-maps are ignored. ● ip route-export – exports routes to another VRF.
PAGE 1709
You can expose a unique set of routes from the source VRF for leaking to other VRFs. When two VRFs leak or export routes, there is no option to discretely filter leaked routes from each source VRF. For example, you cannot import one set of routes from one VRF and another set of routes from another VRF. Only active routes are eligible for leaking. For example, if one VRF has two routes corresponding to BGP and OSPF, in which the BGP route is not active, the OSPF route takes precedence over BGP.
PAGE 1710
match source-protocol Specify matching source-protocol criteria while exporting or importing routes. Syntax match source-protocol {bgp | isis | ospf | connected | static} Parameters bgp Enter the keyword bgp to leak or share routes corresponding to the BGP protocol. isis Enter the keyword isis to leak or share routes corresponding to the ISIS protocol. ospf Enter the keyword ospf to leak or share routes corresponding to the OSPF protocol.
PAGE 1711
route-map Enter the name of the route-map to specify the filtering criteria for imported routes. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.
PAGE 1712
maximum dynamic-routes Specify the maximum number of dynamic (protocol) routes a VRF can have. Syntax maximum dynamic-routes limit {warn-threshold threshold-value | warningonly} To remove the limit on the maximum number of routes used, use the no maximum dynamic-routes command. Parameters limit Maximum number of routes allowed in a VRF. The valid range is from 1 to 16,000 (or maximum allowable for that platform if a smaller value).
PAGE 1713
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1714
Usage Information Example 1714 Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z9000.
PAGE 1715
67 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • IPv4 VRRP Commands IPv6 VRRP Commands IPv4 VRRP Commands The following are IPv4 VRRP commands. advertise-interval Set the time interval between VRRP advertisements. Syntax advertise-interval {seconds | centisecs centisecs } To return to the default settings, use the no advertise-interval command. Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds.
PAGE 1716
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Dell EMC Networking recommends keeping the default setting for this command. If you do change the time interval between VRRP advertisements on one router, change it on all routers. authentication-type Enable authentication of VRRP data exchanges.
PAGE 1717
Usage Information The system encrypts the password and the show config command displays the encrypted text string. clear counters vrrp Clear the counters maintained on VRRP operations. S4820T Syntax Parameters clear counters vrrp [vrrp-id] [ipv6] vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of the VRRP group ID to clear the group’s counters. The range is from 1 to 255. ipv6 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv6 to clear counters from the IPv6 VRRP group.
PAGE 1718
● For ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port/[subport] - slot/port/ [subport]. For example, if you want to clear the port configurations corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as clear counters interfaces interfacetype 1/1/1 - 1/1/4. Example DellEMC#clear counters vrrp vrf jay Clear "show vrrp" counters of all vrrp groups on all interfaces in VRF jay [confirm] yes debug vrrp Enable VRRP debugging.
PAGE 1719
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. If you do not specify an option, debug is active on all interfaces and all VRRP groups.
PAGE 1720
disable Disable a VRRP group. Syntax disable To re-enable a disabled VRRP group, use the no disable command. Command Modes VRRP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1721
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1722
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. priority Specify a VRRP priority value for the VRRP group. The VRRP protocol uses this value during the MASTER election process.
PAGE 1723
Usage Information To guarantee that a VRRP group becomes MASTER, configure the VRRP group’s virtual address with same IP address as the interface’s primary IP address and change the priority of the VRRP group to 255. If you set the priority command to 255 and the virtual-address is not equal to the interface’s primary IP address, an error message appears. show config View the non-default VRRP configuration.
PAGE 1724
show vrrp View the VRRP groups that are active. If no VRRP groups are active, the Dell EMC Networking OS returns No Active VRRP group. S4820T Syntax show vrrp [vrrp-id][brief][interface type][ipv6][interface type][vrf vrfname] Parameters vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the virtual router identifier for the VRRP group to view only that group. The range is from 1 to 255. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a table of information about the VRRP groups.
PAGE 1725
Usage Information Example (Brief) Usage Information The following describes the show vrrp brief command. Item Description Interface Lists the interface type, slot, and port of the configured VRRP group. Grp Displays the VRRP group ID. Pri Displays the priority value assigned to the interface. If you configured the track command to track that interface and you disable the interface, the cost is subtracted from the priority value assigned to the interface.
PAGE 1726
Item Description Authentication:... States whether authentication is configured for the VRRP group. If it is configured, this lists the authentication type and password. Tracking states.. Example Example (VRRP VRF) Displays if the track command is configured on an interface. Also displays the following information about the tracked interface: ● Dn or Up states whether the interface is down or up. ● The interface type slot/port information.
PAGE 1727
Parameters Defaults interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan, and then the VLAN ID. The VLAN ID range is from 1 to 4094. priority-cost (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the amount to subtract from the priority value.
PAGE 1728
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1729
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1730
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information This command applies to a single interface. When you use this command with the vrrp delay reload command, the later timer rules VRRP enabling. For example, if vrrp delay reload is 600 and vrrp delay minimum is 300: ● When the system reloads, VRRP waits 600 seconds (10 minutes) to bring up VRRP on all interfaces that are up and configured for VRRP.
PAGE 1731
Related Command ● vrrp delay minimum — sets the delay time for VRRP initialization after a line card reboot. vrrp-group Assign a VRRP ID to an interface. You can configure up to 12 VRRP groups per interface. Syntax Parameters Defaults vrrp-group vrrp-id vrrp-id Enter a number as the group ID. The range is from 1 to 255. Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1732
● ● ● ● ● ● disable hold-time preempt priority show config virtual-address clear counters vrrp ipv6 Clear the counters recorded for IPv6 VRRP groups. Syntax clear counters vrrp ipv6 [vrid | vrf vrf-name] Parameters vrid (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of an IPv6 VRRP group; range is from 1 to 255. vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a VRF instance to clear the counters of all IPv6 VRRP groups in the specified VRF. The maximum is 32 characters.
PAGE 1733
debug vrrp ipv6 Enable VRRP debugging. Syntax Parameters debug vrrp ipv6 interface [vrid] {all | packets | state | timer} interface Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel, and then a number.
PAGE 1734
show vrrp ipv6 View the active IPv6 VRRP groups. If no VRRP groups are active, the Dell EMC Networking OS returns No Active VRRP group. Syntax show vrrp ipv6 [vrid] [interface] [brief] [vrf vrf-name] Parameters vrid (OPTIONAL) Enter the virtual router identifier for the VRRP group to view only that group. The range is from 1 to 255.
PAGE 1735
Line starting with Description ● master (MASTER virtual router) ● backup (BACKUP virtual router) Also displays the interface’s priority and IP address of the MASTER. Hold Down:... Displays additional VRRP configuration information: ● Hold Down displays the hold down timer interval in seconds. ● Preempt displays TRUE if preempt is configured and FALSE if preempt is not configured. ● AdvInt displays the Advertise Interval in seconds. Adv rcvd:...
PAGE 1736
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.4.2.
PAGE 1737
68 X.509v3 X.509v3 is a standard for public key infrastructure (PKI) to manage digital certificates and public key encryption. This standard specifies a format for public-key certificates or digital certificates. Dell EMC Networking OS supports X.509v3 standards.
PAGE 1738
crypto ca-cert install Downloads and installs the certificate of a Certificate Authority (CA) on to the device. Syntax crypto ca-cert install path Parameters Defaults path Enter the path where the CA certificate is available for download. The format that you use to specify the location of the CA certificate also includes the protocol that is used to contact the CA.
PAGE 1739
● secadmin The certificate matching the current FIPS state is deleted. If the system is in FIPS mode, the FIPS certificate is deleted. If the system is in non-FIPS mode, the non-FIPS certificate is deleted. Before deleting the system’s trusted certificate, the system prompts you to specify whether to proceed with deletion. If you proceed, the system deletes the certificate and also the private key.
PAGE 1740
email email- address Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword email followed a valid email address used for communication with the organization. validity days (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword validity followed by the number of days for which the certificate is valid. NOTE: For CSRs, validity has no effect. For self-signed certificates, if validity is not specified, it defaults to 3650 days, or 10 years. length length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword length followed by a bit length value.
PAGE 1741
Parameters cert-file Enter the keyword cert-file to specify that the certificate needs to be downloaded. cert-path Enter the path where the certificate is locally stored. The path can be a full path or a relative path. If the system accepts this path, a notification is sent indicating the location where the certificate file is stored. Following are example of a path that you can specify: flash://certs/s4810-001-request.crtand usbflash:/certs/s4810-001-cert.
PAGE 1742
If the system is in non-FIPS mode, the certificate will be installed as the non-FIPS certificate. When FIPS mode is enabled/disabled, the certificates (and keys) are switched by the system. Related Commands ● crypto ca-cert install crypto x509 ocsp Configures the OCSP behavior. Syntax crypto x509 ocsp [nonce] [sign-requests] Parameters Defaults nonce Enter the keyword nonce to use the nonce feature for the OCSP requests to OCSP responder communication.
PAGE 1743
Command Modes ● CONFIGURATION Mode Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command: Related Commands Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced this command.
PAGE 1744
tcp Enter the keyword tcp to enable TCP. udp Enter the keyword udp to enable UDP. vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF. sha1 fingerprint Enter the keyword sha1 followed by the finger print. This option is only available when the secure option is configured. This new option enables the Syslog feature to compare the received certificate’s sha-1 fingerprint against this configured sha-1 fingerprint.
PAGE 1745
Usage Information Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced this command. The following RBAC roles are allowed to issue this command: ● sysadmin ● secadmin When you use this command, the device maps the current certificate context in the certificate store to a CA certificate through the subject key identifier field. The subject key identifier field contains the SHA-1 hash of the CA’s public key. This configuration provides a way to uniquely identify a CA and associate it with any CA-specific settings.
PAGE 1746
Related Commands ● crypto x509 ocsp ocsp-server prefer Configures OCSP responder preference. You can configure the preference or order that the CA or a device should follow while contacting multiple OCSP responders. Syntax ocsp-server prefer Defaults None. Command Modes CERTIFICATE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1747
show crypto cert Displays the certificate information that is specified. Syntax Parameters Defaults show crypto cert {path} path (OPTIONAL) Enter the path to a local file where a certificate chain is stored in PEM format. If a path is not specified, display the certificate that is currently installed on the system. None. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.